Home

Hydro GeoAnalyst 2012.1 Users Manual

1. Station Group Query Data Query Dean nuse Select a Query SELECT station id AS id station x AS x station y AS y station name 4S name INterpretation_Results layer 4S Layer_Name INterpretation_Results TOP_elevation AS Top_elevation Interpretation_Results thickness 45 Thickness Interpretation_Results interpretation AS Interpretation Cross_section_interpretations y FROM Station RIGHT JOIN SStation ON Station ID SStation SID LEFT JOIN interpretation_results ON Station id interpretation_results Station WHERE SStation ID 2 Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Layer_Name Top_elevation Thickness Interpretation E Mining Exploration 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Topography 323 500000072527 52 00000001512 Model Geophysics 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 BottLayerl 271 500000057407 0 Model Well History 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 BottLayer2 271 500000057407 48 000000070855 Model 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 BottLayer3 223 499999986552 1 4999999865517 Model 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Medium Sand 316 999999908833 19 4999999363255 Geology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Gravel 297 499999972507 25 9999999151006 Geology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Coarse Gravel 323 500000072527 6 50000016369393 Geology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Fine Sand 271 500000057407 17 0000000867341 Geolo
2. ccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaeeeneeaeeenenaees 244 Adding EMNOlOGY COMIM Navia daa ada idad 246 EI COUMA FTOPSTE Srii ire eE riot oda 248 Specity Dala SOUE a E 249 Add Well Construction CO ION isisa dd a 251 Ada PIOU C GNU NS il ee A EA E ua elo Us cairo 251 saving the Borehole Log Plot vinil 255 Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeaeeeneeaeeseeeaeesees 256 Chapter XI Map Manager 260 1 ADOUL Me Interaccion 260 A ee eae cea ence cetera E cawenuetual Cen usec cheated saeen oneieaneeecunvaae 263 Description of Toolbar Items ia ii 263 2 Description ot Menu tems i 265 Project aaa 265 LAYER aa 268 o E O II A A E 269 OPEN ae ici 269 Eoad AOA AA assed OP o seca E A e O aA 272 e A P a AA 274 O 281 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3 Chapter XII Chapter XIII Contents DEIS enano coa acapara 281 Create MISES Coli seis os base alsa seta A A nua c raat oe ro E 281 o e Ailend tates ce eee hee peictaas T E es 281 SAUS UIC ina cid 282 PR VS ie leat ters cs carats eactoatceieicsio ans such staacavasauectomtne Sate maaan na canton ban teieipamiae oases aban nhc saute aanigute ns bane ta ousaa nena seeec nen eraate 283 Ch Cate Memati Mat dd oie eee lh ne N 289 Mod Mera S E81 MaD neria o ario es 292 create CONOS it A A dana 292 Create Grdded Datura 298 E LOL Fe BO es IN nn er cn eet cere eo wre Ree ere a re ee ene ee a oe 299 EC iS 308 TOOLS gt A to
3. 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 170 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help ES DataCube wizard Layout Style sheet FieldCaptionSwle Elements GroupT otalStule MainT otalS tile OddRowF acts tyle TableCaption5 tule BackColor M Maroon Content amp lignment MiddleCenter Font Arial Spt style Bold ForeColor C White Gradient None Style Preview GradientBackColor B Black Progres B arColor EA DarkOrange Properties BackColor Determines the cell text background color The Report Elements list contains all the report elements that can be customized The Properties dialog is context sensitive and allows you to change the appearance properties for the selected report element The changes made will then be shown in the Style Preview frame Click Ok to accept the style settings OF Cancel 7 1 3 Auto Format The crosstab component contains a variety of color scheme templates that can be applied to your crosstab report To access the color scheme templates open the Auto Format dialog shown below by clicking on the Auto Format button E located above the Layout tab Here you can select a color scheme template from the Styles list and preview its properties O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Crosstab Queries 171 E Auto format T x Inactive fields sample DataCube Classic 1 y F y Classic 2 Classic 3 aa Classic 4 Mi EEE Gradient mo pt a YGroup t Y2 J111 J1 1ij 2 Gradient 4 Gradient 5
4. Map Project Site map Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help 63 amen AOS xi A AAN RO RAE A E 5 3 a 7 a 7 7 2 A a a Ml 4 HO OLA 3D_plume_testing O wWO_Data contour All Stations CrossSectionLine5 Boreholes Stiff AirPhoto_BW_or bm p AirPhoto_Color_gr b mp Water Courses Airports 1 Major Railroads Urban Areas Trees Grasslands Croplands Layer Informatio Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 26 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N Example of Display Data Chart l lxi dep x uoIas sso1 gt mo Juas E 4 535 523 4 814 418 i 2 055 You can see that sample values that exceed the specified conditions TVOC concentration result value greater than 5000 ug l are shaded red for easy detection 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 307 DEA imere AOA lec AA RA o s 8555883 su 520 iu 200 430 2 0 T z 280 400 When stations are clustered it may be necessary to modify the display location of the callout boxes You have the option to manually move individual callout boxes to a new location to improve presentation This is explained below Edit Layout Setting To edit the position of the callout box Right mouse click on the map window and select Edit Layout from the pop up menu Click once on any callout box to select it the box will become highlighted in a color outl
5. Beiesh f Use connection string Connection string DBG D Program Files HydroGeoBasesSam Build 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password Blank password Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use D Program Files HydroGeoB ase 4nnular fll new firial D Program Hles HydrolieoB ase 4nnular fill new nmult D Program Files HydroGeob ase 4nnular fill new mult o D Program Files HydroGeob ase drilling type D Program Files HydroGeoB ase open list D Program Files HydroGeob ases ample Stations Help Cancel Select the Excel file once more Click OK to complete the procedure The file will then be loaded into the appropriate module in Hydro GeoAnalyst 15 3 Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings The Inverse Distance Squared method is a very fast and efficient weighted average interpolation method The weighting factor applied to the data depends on the distance of the point from the grid cell and is inversely proportional to the distance squared Consequently the greater the distance the data point is from the grid node the smaller the influence it has on the calculated value The Inverse Distance Squared method for interpolation may generate patterns similar to a bull s eye surrounding points of observations Selecting a larger number of nearest neighboring data points may smooth this effect but if the bull s eye pattern is undesirable then other m
6. Settings Av File name ER Frame size Pull window size Compression Full Frames Uncompressed Height 240 Frames per second fi OF Cancel The default AVI File name is the address of the V3D folder for the current project plus the name of the 3D project and a sequential number of the video made for this project followed by the AVI extension The AVI File name can be modified to any path and filename required by clicking the button beside the AVI File name field The Frame size setting has a selection of four options e Full window size 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 372 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help e 640x480 e 320x240 e Custom If the Custom option is chosen the Custom frame size fields Width and Height will be activated and a frame size can be defined The Compression setting lists the various vdeo compression techniques available A higher compression setting will reduce the AVI file size but it will also reduce the quality of the image The Frames per second setting defines the number of frames time steps that will be displayed each second in the AVI file This setting has no effect on the recording speed After specifying the settings click OK and the recording will begin Al To stop the recording click the Stop button NOTE Recording AVI files will require significant system resources both RAM and Hard disk space lt is recommended to close all non essential programs
7. AAA 6 42 535518 5 4814305 79 GB 19 08 29 2000 BTEX 13 ug l arar 7 43 535394 6 481430259 GB 20 10 02 2000 BTEX 9 ug l ot Mn aoe a 8 43 535394 6 4814302 59 GB 20 12 10 2000 BTEX 10 ug l Ey pce exceeds 10 mg per kg and depth exceeds 9 43 5353946 481430259 GB 20 06 25 2000 BTEX 6 ug l Ei Plume_data 10 43 535394 6 4814302 59 GB 20 08 29 2000 BTEX 8 ug l Se qe_lab_analysis 11 50 535866 19 4814655 09 GB 27 10 02 2000 BTEX 23 ug l select_for_deletion 12 50 535966 19 4814655 09 GB 27 12 10 2000 BTEX 25 ug l E soll_chem_exceedences 13 50 535866 19 4814655 09 GB 27 05 15 2000 BTEX 14 ug l PET 14 50 535866 19 4814655 09 GB 27 05 21 2000 BTEX 14 ug l a ohana dats 15 50 535866 19 4814655 09 GB 27 06 25 2000 BTEX 19 ug l apne A 16 50 535866 19 4814655 09 GB 27 08 29 2000 BTEX 22 ug l ii eee 17 51 535782 819 4814528 99 GB 28 10 02 2000 BTEX 46 ua am time_series_chart_data 18 51 535782 819 4814528 99 GB 28 12 10 2000 BTEX 50 ug l Gm tvoc exceeds 1000 ug 19 51 535782 819 4814528 99 GB 28 05 15 2000 BTEX 36 ug l tvoc exceeds 5000 ug per 20 51 535782 819 4814528 99 GB 28 05 21 2000 BTEX 36 ug l 28 vc exceeds 1 mg per kg 21 51 535782 819 4814528 99 GB 28 06 25 2000 BTEX 43 ug l mod had hnair 22 51 535782 819 4814528 99 GB 28 08 29 2000 BTEX 45 ug l y Rats 23 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 10 02 2000 BTEX 30000 ug l ge vater_clevations_months 24 52 535592 63 4814501 79GB 29 10 02 2000 TCE 2000 ug l aa water_levels 25 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 12 10
8. 300 Coarse Gravel Fine Sand Silt aL L HydroGeology Elevation m 280 upper aquifer lower aquifer 00 300 400 600 700 0 100 2 500 600 300 536 195 4 614 914 Distance m 536 211 4 813 946 NOTE In order to see intersecting cross sections in the cross section editor the corresponding Map Manager project must be open 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 319 For more details on managing intersecting layers in the cross section editor please see Intersecting Layers Graticule Provides settings for the graticule also referred to as gridlines on the map The following dialog will appear Graticule Settings ee oe xl Tic Minor Tic Numbers Appearance Foreground Color i Line Color ia Line Style E Font sample Text e Show Thousand Separator Mininum Fisel between Minor Tics 20 Minor Tic Width Major Tic Width Padding Left 50 f Manual le Visible Rotation 0 le Visible Rotation 0 M Visible Rotation 0 ul le Visible Rotation 0 j OF Cancel FJ Help Appearance In the appearance frame you can edit the line color style font Tic Allows defining the number of minor and major tics Paddings Controls the amount of buffer space between the edge of Map Manager window display and the labels on the axis It may be necessary to increase this value when the X and Y co ordinates contain many digits
9. Height Set the default height of the header space Select the Auto checkbox to ensure that the header text remains visible within the header space Alignment Set the default header alignment to Center Near left or Far right Angle Specify the default text angle You may choose from 0 45 and 90 Color Specify the default text color Font Specify the default font style The Column Properties frame allows you to modify the default appearance for all BHLP columns including e Column Width e Column Color 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 217 The Depth frame allows you to set a fixed column depth If you select the Auto checkbox the depth will automatically be adjusted to the depth of the deepest BHLP column The General frame allows you to adjust the default general display settings for all BHLP columns The following settings can be modified Fit width to page Select this option to fit your BHLP columns to the entire width of the BHLP Viewer Window Print Scale Factor The default setting of O will fit the BHLP onto your page However using a whole number for the scale factor no decimal or negative numbers will scale the BHLP in the following manner A Print scale factor of 1 100 would mean that 100 units on the BHLP would correspond to 1 unit on the printout i e if your BHLP units are in Feet then 100 Feet measured on the BHLP would correspond to 1 Foot in the actual printed
10. Map Manager 299 Create Gridded Data E x Mame ElevationG rid Calculating Fiel Choose Field Elevation Min 111 Mas 111 Interpolato Choose Interpolator Natural Neighbours Advanced Settings Create Cancel FJ Help Enter a name for the grid file and select a field containing the source data Click the Create button to create the file The grid file will be created in the HGA project s folder in the Surface sub folder for example D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Surface test grd NOTE As with contours you can select an interpolation method and customize interpolation settings by clicking on the Advanced Settings button 11 2 2 15 Display Data This feature allows you to display data in a plot or tabular format on the map for the current points map layer Fields are based on points data loaded from Station Groups or Data Queries created using the Query Builder You may define conditions for fields and highlight rows in the tables that violate the conditions For plots the templates are selected from available Chart templates To activate this feature first select a layer that contains points data i e a data query ora station group from the Layer Control When you select the Display Data option from the Layer menu the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 00 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Display Data x W Sample Ta
11. Visible Flot Style Line Y Line Style Solid Line Width 4 j Line Color E Symbol Pe pj Symbol Size EM Symbol Color Horizontal scale Primary axis Apply OF Cancel Plot Line and Symbol options can be configured and the Depth Series can be shown hidden using the Visible checkbox You can also set the Horizontal Scale for the plot series choose from Primary or Secondary axis The specific settings for the Interval sub node are shown in the following screenshot 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 228 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help xi E Es BHLP Interval Series M Visible Eileen E Transparency 50 oda T Apply OF Cancel The Interval Series can be shown hidden and the Fill color and Transparency can be set 10 3 4 Well Construction Column 10 3 4 1 Settings The Well Construction column is the most comprehensive data column in the Borehole Log Plot It displays data from various sources in your database including e Drilling details e Lithology e Annular filling e Casing and screens e Water Level e Pump e Scale Information for the above items and in some cases the images for patterns are taken directly from the database To add a Well Construction column click the Add icon and select Well Construction from the combo box provided Some of the entities have been selected for you When the new Well Construction column appears it will display Lit
12. aming Eno ID Description Fini Naame T BHG 35646 83 a BH 536092 9 BHS 53642015 10 BHS 537173 5 11 BH10 535369 6 12 BH11 535914 1 13 BH12 536303 5 14 BH13 536267 7 15 BH14 535772 0 16 BH15 594994 4 17 EH16 536063 1 18 BH1 536174 3 15 BH18 535709 8 0 BH19 5367241 21 BH20 5646 63 a M Error O Warning e Xx Back Import Cancel Help The data is checked against three conditions namely e Proper Station Locations e Specified conditions for each field if any e Data type compatibility NOTE All coordinates in the database are stored in latitude longitude format regardless of the projection system in the source file and project The Preview in this window displays the converted station co ordinates However the station co ordinates may be displayed in HGA in any projection system desired Accepting or Rejecting Errors Warnings The records that fail to satisfy each of the above conditions will be indicated in the Errors O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 139 and Warnings table By default all data marked as erroneous will not be imported However all warnings are ignored by default One or more of these error messages can be selected and the data affected by those errors can either be rejected or accepted Note that only data with a warning message may be accepted Erroneous records will not be accepted for importing unless the errors are fixed The values that ca
13. 186 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Blank Settings Any concentration above the sample detection limit will be highlighted Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color The detection limit for contaminants can be specified in HGA and must be added to your data query Highlighting The options are the same as described in previous section 8 2 4 Check Dilution Factor Settings A dilution factor is calculated by dividing the final volume by the aliquot volume Aliquot volume is the measure of sub volume of original sample Final volume is the total volume This QA QC check will look for exceedances in the dilution factors in your result records You simply need to set the Maximum allowed dilution factor Any reported Dilution Factors above what you have specified as the maximum will fail this check Dilution Settings Maximum dilution factor 1 Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color 8 2 5 Check Detection Limit Settings This QA QC check will compare the Standard Detection Limit in the QA QC reference table with your detection limits reported within your results If your reported detection limits are greater than the Standard Detection Limit in the reference table they will fail this check 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control 187 MOL Settings Any detection limit above the Standard Detection Limit will be highlighted You can configure Standard De
14. 340 Gravel Sandy Gravel Cross Sections amp Interpretations Layers control 320 Coarse Gravel Clay rich 300 Fine sandy gravel Silty Sand Elevation m 280 HydroGeology Cross Section Window 28D o N o N N H o N ite Map 8 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 533 931 4 813 102 Distance m 538 305 4 814 234 1937 18 382 97 X Z coordinate The Cross Section Editor window contains the following items Menu Bar Contains program menu commands Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used features in the Cross Section Editor Layer Control Manages cross sections visibility and editability of interpretation layers Right click a layer to access additional options such as Move up Move down View 3D and Properties Cross Section Window Contains the cross section view for the selected cross section line Site Map Displays the selected cross section line as it appears in the map project The selected stations for the cross section are highlighted in this Map preview window Coordinates Displays the X Z coordinate for the current mouse cursor location Active Window Select between the Map Manager window and the Cross Section window Description of Toolbar Items 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 328 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help The Cross section editor contains a toolbar with short cut buttons to s
15. 370 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Explorer uses interpolation in time for the case where the time step falls on a date where there is no data The Start time value indicates the simulation time when the animation will begin The Finish time value indicates the simulation time when the animation will end The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the specified start and finish time 13 3 4 Plume Browser The Plume Browser tab is the location where you can select from pre defined color maps or isosurfaces for a preliminary assessment of the plume As such there are basic options for color maps and isosurfaces Once you have a better understanding of where the contaminants lie and at what time steps you can use the more advanced options in the Plumes node in the tree including e advanced isoline maps with color fill and line settings e color maps with clip at cut off options e display color maps on cross section lines e isosurface options including color from palette show borders and display volume estimation When Plume Browser tab is selected the following options will appear I Rotate Shit Light Position Time Plume Browser a lala Y Plume result_value i J zp __Uptions y ee Style Colomap on Xv Plane y 1 Position 30 100 iia Visible fw save Colormap When the 3D project was created 3D Explorer will display the plume in the form of an
16. E tee ee ae es Gradient 6 Yeru C P a a Ea Medem 2 TA aaa ea Modern 3 Modern 4 Modern 5 Multicolor Gradient 1 Multicolor Gradient 10 Multicolor Gradient 2 Multicolor Gradient 3 Multicolor Gradient 4 Once you have selected a template click Ok to apply the template to your crosstab report 7 2 Generating the Report Once the layout and style settings have been defined click the OK button in the DataCube Wizard dialog to generate the report A table will be generated with the query results as shown in the following screenshot BA 5 b lt Ala Ze mee BBB AAA TCE_and_BTEx_for_Year2000 5000 6000 400 14 36 12000 14000 600 26659 6 19 43 18000 25000 800 43879 8 22 45 25000 33000 900 58988 g 23 46 30000 38000 950 69042 10 25 50 33000 40000 1000 74100 33 117 256 123000 156000 4650 284127 333 333333333 400 26 6666666666 760 800 933 333333333 40 1200 1666 66666666 53 3333333333 2920 1666 66666666 2200 60 I 2000 2875 63 3333333333 14938133333333 1 12 2200 3200 GE 6666666666 546666666666 8200 11275 310 19785 ag 117 256 131200 167275 4960 Pana y En Close di At the top of the crosstab results table window there is a toolbar with several buttons that 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 172 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help control options for editing printing exporting and modifying the display properties of the query Each button is described below Use the m button to save the cro
17. Monitoring Event Table Parameter Fesult y Table Parametes_Resul Field Analysis Method Field Chemical Mame Cancel Once you have defined the settings for your Template you can create another template by clicking the Add button delete an existing template by clicking the Remove button or O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control 189 accept reject your changes and return to the HGA main program window You are now ready to apply the lab quality template to your data 8 3 Perform Lab Quality Assessment NOTE An example of a Lab Quality Data query is available in the Demo project select the QC_Lab Analysis query in the Queries node and feel free to follow along with the instructions below To apply a Lab Quality Template follow the instructions below e Select and highlight the appropriate Data Query from the Queries node in the HGA Browser e From the main menu click Tools gt Quality Control and select the Perform Lab QC Assessment option the following dialog will appear Select and configure a template for lab quality validation i _ al xj Lab Quality Templates Template Description Relative Percent Difference lt 20 Mapping Field Station Name T e ete A Batch ID Batch ID gt Sample Date Sample Date Chemical Hame Chemical Marne gt ResultWalue Result Value gt Result Units Result Unit Ed Quality Code Qua
18. Sai List a W Allow values only from list XI XI XI XI XI XI XI H H H H E E ae Last Changed on 10 25 2010 11 08 42 AM Close Help The Database Settings section of the interface allows all users to define Field name this name will be used only for identification in the SQL Server database Data type Unit Category applicable for Double data types only Units applicable for Double data types only The following field types are available Long Field must contain an integer value String Text or numbers use for descriptive items Double Real numbers used for storing measured values such as measurements or concentrations Bit Field contains a tick box Image Field can be used to store a raster image Date Field contains date value Time Field contains a time value DateTime Field contains a date and time value The View Settings section of the interface allows all users to define A name for the selected field A Default value Data display format Unit for data entry whenever applicable Validation Depth rules A list of values to be used for the field The name for the field provided in the View Settings is the one that will be displayed in Hydro GeoAnalyst Whenever the field s data type allows a unit for data entry can be set to O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 121 something different from that which is in the database For instance if a well depth
19. a Print preview 42 0088 8 TCE_and_BTEX_for_Year2000 GB 29 5000 6000 12000 14000 18000 25000 25000 33000 30000 38000 33000 40000 156000 4650 333 33333333 400 26 666666666 30 933 33333333 4 1200 1666 6666666 53 333333333 1666 6666666 2200 60 2000 2875 63 333333333 3200 66 666666666 11275 310 The Print Preview window contains a toolbar that allows you to modify the view settings The following buttons are available Use the amp button to print directly from the Print Prevew window Use the H button to zoom in and zoom out of the Print Preview window Use the al button to view just one page Use the DO button to view two pages at once Use the od button to view three pages at once Use the BH button to view four pages at once Use the ay button to view six pages at once You can scroll through the pages using the Page vertical scroll bars located in the top right corner of the print preview window Click Close from the Toolbar to return to the Report window Printing Report To send your report to a printer click on the e Print button 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 180 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 8 Lab Quality Control When collecting analyzing and interpreting envronmental data Quality Control QC can come in many forms and fashions Hydro GeoAnalyst supports a Lab Quality Control component that allows users to verify the accuracy of the analysis results reported by a laboratory As
20. displaying geological hydrogeological and model layer cross sections The n button in the main toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 12 Cross Section Editor 2 2 2 14 3D Explorer Enter topic text here 2 2 2 15 Report Editor Enter topic text here 2 2 2 16 AquiferTest Preferences Bee 0 xi AquiterT est AquaChemi Select the location of the Aquifer Test application exe file C Program Alles 5 quiferTest41 4quiferT est exe a x coo ae In order to use the AquiferTest analysis feature you must first have AquiferTest 4 1 installed on the local machine and specify where the AquiferTest exe is located 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 81 Use this feature to analyze pumping test data in AquiferTest For this feature you must have one or more data queries that contains the required fields for a pumping test analysis namely e Well Name e X Co ordinate for both Pumping Wells and Observation Wells Y Co ordinate for both Pumping Wells and Observation Wells e Pumping Start e Pumping End e Pumping Rate O O Observed time Observed depth to water level Additional fields may also be mapped and the data sent to AquiferTest these include e Well Elevation e Screen Diameter e Borehole Diameter For your convenience these fields are included in the Environmental templates in the Well History tables The following section descr
21. station H E e e e e ony Mame Water Level Exaael ts Last Changed on 104252010 11 08 42 AM Close Help In this example the Water Level table is child to the screen and station tables NOTE The Template Manager does not allow changing the units for a primary key field If this is necessary you must first break the table relationship 43 Modifying Fields For any selected table the Template Manager provides the necessary interface to specify the field properties An interface similar to that shown below is displayed whenever a field is selected in the database browser 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 12 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Template Manager Demo Project Be 3 E AS m x Ernvironmerntal metric y Y Database shructur Database Settings Ff Description Fife Geologic Description Ee Lithology a ze From Field name scil_type Data hype STRING Unit category Description Consistency Structure ASTM Descriptor Color Odor Formation Mame Formation Unit Moisture Comment En fld_201444 M Hydrogeology M Modeling fw Features fw Fractures Well Construction Soil Testing Sol Sampling Monitoring Evert Mining E sploratiorn Geophysics Well History x PxA El kaa Description lt lt 1 lt 1 A lt 1 lt 1 A A lt 1 View Setting Field name sciLtppe Read only Default value L rit H Format Get values from list
22. 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 426 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help le Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 This Wizard assists you in converting your Microsoft Access 2000 Reports to WHIReports 2 0 Format The converted files can be loaded into WHIReports i Il E designer for Further modifications Press the Next button to start I Reports e M Options Convert Finish Clicking on the Next button displays the second dialog requesting the MS Access database name that will be used as a source for the reports to be imported Prowde the database name by clicking on the Open Database button to the right of the text box or alternately type in the name including the full path ES Convert M5Access Reports to WHI Reports Database Source Database lv BlProjectsiDemo_ProjectiReportiSampleRteport mdb Reports Options J J Convert Finish Cancel lt Back Next gt Click on the Next button to display the next dialog listing all reports that are available in the selected database Select the desired report and click on the Next button to proceed 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 427 ES Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports i x l Database Customer Labels A Employee Sales by Country Invoice Products by Category Reports Sales by Category Sales by Category Subreport Sales by Year Sales by Year S
23. Adding a Text Entity will allow you to display text in the column such as descriptions or numeric values An Image Entity will allow you to display a graphical representation such as an image photo or formation pattern in addition to text In the Settings frame select the field that contains the appropriate information for the entity you have chosen DataT able 64 in E log E Depthe ntity Caption Depth Description Depth Texte ntity Caption Test Description Text DataField Value 10 3 6 1 Settings The Depth Point based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Depth node from the BHLP Settings window 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 242 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help BHLP Settings Nx Dept e Visible Column Options Border Line isibilit Outline Appearance Description Genera M Visible widhfio Height 10 6 Image Symbol Image Setting Symbol Setting Draw Mode Tied y Symbol Line Color Symbol Fill Color Help Apply Cancel The Depth frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking on the Options button Use the Outline checkbox to show hide the column border line
24. Apply UE Cancel The Casing Settings frame allows you to define the well casing source color view and order and label settings Under the Appearance frame select how to display the well casing Select the View 2D or 3D Casing Order left to right right to left centered etc Define Label properties NOTE In order to define well casings within another parent casing you must define the parent casing value in the Casing table If you do not have this field it must be added to your data structure If you want well casings drawn individually not within a parent casing define a value of O for the Parent_casing_ID Under the Customization frame define color source for the casing Draw Border Use Draw Border Use Default Color Use Material Image color use this option if your well casing materials were selected from a list defined in the list editor and each list item has a corresponding color Use Material Image will use an image from the database for the well casing if you select this option you must add an Image Entity to the Well Construction Drilling Casing entities as shown below and map to an image field in the database O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 231 E ES Design E ES Well Construction FE Scale A E Drilling H E Lithology e ES WaterLevel H E Pump E Plug E Filling oa Casing ES Screen Se on Interval WH Px Bye DataTable Casing hi E Tope
25. BOrenole LOG Ote rats 80 Map Manage orcas ib tard as 80 CIOS SoCC UON E A e ed al o db Sa 80 ID EX DION Mas sda CN PE TOO O O_O A O 80 Report EGLO keane a a ll 80 AGUEC S Cerea E 00 gt A eecereen aarenseaee ace ees 80 70 fz po o A a A o e ed e a 86 a ASC a cet es ncede va suaccace sea E 86 Manage Databases cai e ee eee ee 86 BackUbimDalabas Suri rd nent sretaedons oveane aeadedaaeuantann Goreme 87 o seanecsuntatesvouverwenvewaceus 88 COMES mane ae Re ee ee CR it li ee ae re ee eee eee ee 88 CIS CIT OR OPAO St ld a e cl al 88 15100914 MMR E A ee re eter ere eer ete 88 MI re en em a 88 3 ADOUL the Interface csn a A a 88 Toolbars ia A A a daa dd 92 Chapter Ill Creating New Projects 96 1 Step 1 Set Database ENVIFON Me tion ad scoedetenctncasasctensdeaccheiecsctensioustnaetecetensdeaxe 96 2 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables oocoococcccccccccnccococancnnacancnnacancnnnnannnrnnannnnananes 101 3 Step 3 Set Project Properties and LOCAtiON oocococcccccccncccccconcncanannonanannnnnnnnnnrnnanannnnanes 102 4 Modifying Project Propeller dodo cidos 106 5 Spatiale PO os ies ocios dais 106 Chapter IV Template Manager 110 1 interta COn ai el 110 2 MOGITYING Table Sanar ana ca 115 3 MOGITY ENG CAS iach sotsccacvandeandotieien atsuiisatacsarVouinundesuuelarsatdeet guides vouinuacuduuesabwenacutynetau 119 4 Managing Template SS ianicnicinias isaac 122 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Contents 5 Chapter V
26. End 43 404907547 9692 SY Nodes AD Use Log Interpolation E Restrict Min Value E Restrict Max Value E Walue Min 0 Walue Max O Real Min 0 Real Mas 0 Mag ox Mag Y Mag 2 No Value 9399 0 Allow Extrapolation m Sdip E Tautness 1 1 5 Tauthness 2 f Use Gradient E l OF Cancel Least easting You may modify the interpolation settings then click OK to return to the main window For more details see Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings Use Only Selected Stations When selected the contour component will use only those stations that are selected on the layer as the data source for the contouring The option is only enabled when one or more stations are selected If not selected all stations on the layer will be used Restrict Within Domain This option allows you to clip contours lines to a selected polygon layer Select Domain x Please choose 4 polygon layer as the clipping domain domain Cancel FJ Help You may select any polygon shapefile from the combo box Then click OK to continue The calculated contours will then be clipped at the edges of the polygon O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NOTE If the polygon is greater in extents than the selected station layer the contouring will end at the furthest point Currently extrapolation to the edge of the polygon is not possible When you are satisfied w
27. Polish Rumanian Serbo Croatian Slovak Slovene 8859 3 ISO Latin 3 Southeastern European Afrikaans Catalan Dutch English Esperanto German Italian Maltese Spanish Turkish 8859 4 ISO Latin 4 North European 8859 5 ISO English amp Cyrillic Based Bulgarian Byelorussian English Macedonian Russian Serbo Croatian Ukrainian 8859 6 ISO Arabic 8859 7 ISO English amp Greek 8859 8 ISO Hebrew 8859 9 ISO Latin 5 Western European amp Turkish 8859 13 ISO Latin 6 Lativan and Lithuanian ANSI Uses the system code page OEM Uses the OEM equivalent of the system code page ISO Uses the ISO equivalent of the system code page BIG5 Uses the ANSI 950 code page also known as Big5 Chinese Taiwan HongKong SAR PRC SJIS Uses the ANSI 932 code page also known as Shift JIS Japanese EUC Uses the EUC ISO equivalent of the system code page 15 5 Appendix E Online GIS Data Resources U S Bureau of the Census http www esri com data download census2000 tigerline Data Census 2000 TIGER Line Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage United States Puerto Rico U S Virgin Islands American Samoa Guam The Commonweath of Northern Mariana Islands and the Midway Islands Datum NAD 83 Layer Roads Railroads Rivers Lakes Legal boundaries Census Statistical Boundaries etc NASA ftp eOsrp01u ecs nasa gowsrtm Data Shuffle Radar Topography Mission SRTM Format Raster SRTM Geographic Coverage Glo
28. UTM State Planar etc These options are available in the Template Editor Stations can be added modified or deleted through the Station List tab The Station List tab displays a limited number of fields for viewing and editing for a more detailed view of each station the Station Data tab must be used the information displayed in the Stations Table can be found in the Description Data Category within this tab in the Location table as shown below Hyi Geadnalyst Beta Demo Prajret E i i fs Project Gt Modules Ej Database 19 Help Bi Tea at et RO A Project Tree tation Chat ata Query Data Fiter Well Profile el Collapse Expand ld 41 fl P bl hel Ep Uf el la Q Gimon Groups atom 4 GR 01 ES Staton Dala Hame a g Daia Category EN Deserpiiorn E E E E EN da Derinin t a oe 65 00 S LOCROOT diemcription edda Gb a Gration Hime wim Yim Flesatienien TOC Total Fist m Son Typelm 66 05 ale CJ let fell fe m EE GOT Salze 401403000 132150 27 00 Gorabede GB z 2 1 3 Station Groups Most operations in HGA require the selection of one or more stations in the Station List tab An example of such an operation is data entry One or more stations for which you would like to add view and or modify data need to be selected so that the Station Data tab is accessible activated The complete list of stations that comprise a project can be viewed in the Station List tab by selecting
29. access privileges for setting up project data structures checking out data to working sub projects and submitting new or modified data Typical applications for HGA include Regional water well management Contaminant site inventory Regulatory compliance Geologic cross sections Public access to information Environmental site assessment Monitored natural attenuation Regional aquifer characterization and management Cross boundary data sharing O O O O O O O O O e Aquifer vulnerability mapping 1 1 What s New in Hydro GeoAnalyst The main interface for Hydro GeoAnalyst has been given a bit of a face lift in an effort to make things easier to find and access Additionally there have been some significant new features and functionalities added these are described below e EDD Workflow a new workflow to help you get validated data into HGA more quickly and easily Define and export your EDD template to provide it to a data provider for example your lab the data providers can use the HGA Quicker Checker an Excel Plug in to populate and validate their data against your template specifications before submitting them back to you Lastly you can quickly and easily import EDD s into HGA with the EDD Import routine 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst e Better Link with ArcGIS when running an HGA project on SQL Server 2008 R2 we have taken advantage of the new option for a geospa
30. and supporting files will be saved to the sub directory Map Selection e for Data Queries the shapefiles and supporting files will be saved to the sub directory Map Data Setting Field Precision If the selected station group or query contains numeric data fields you will be prompted with the following dialog Set Field Precision x Please specify the precision for the numeric telda Field Name Elevation Toc The Set Field Precision dialog box lists all the numeric fields in the selected station group or query For each numeric field you can specify the number of decimal places to include when generating the layer s shapefile Enter the desired number of decimal places under the Decimals column for each numeric field and then click the OK button Please note that all contouring of numeric values is performed using the precision specified in 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 274 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 11 2 2 4 Import this dialog Moreover the label renderer will display all numeric values on the map using the specified precision If you wish to change the precision after the layer has been created you must reload the HGA data into the map project This menu item provides options for importing basemap layers to the current Map Project Basemap images may be Raster Images bmp jpg tif sid and others or AutoCAD files dxf Each format is explained below Raster Image A critical element of an
31. e From a Data Query create a report using the results of a query Creating Reports from a Data Grid Follow the directions below to create a report containing a data grid Select the desired grid in HGA for example select the Stations List grid or select the desired table Press the Print button EJ from the toolbar The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the B Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The fields in the selected grid will be added to the report designer and the ADO data control is automatically created An example is shown below for the Lithology table New Report lex PERF kao a l a o a aala aNg d je Es H NE E A OO E B MainReport H PageHeader H Detail DA PageFooter A A Denasees a a A E E Custom Rey PRA PA A A rr ra AA A AR Pra nas i A PIES Name deRptData form desc soil type Command 30 Connectio Provider SQL Connectio 15 CursorLoc 2 ddADOLI CursorTyg 0 ddADOO DataSourc DefaultDa IsolationLe 1 left 3827 LockType 1 MaxRows 0 Password Provider Source SELECT FROI Tag top 354 UserID formation_name formation_unit moisture comment The layout of the report can then be modified and unwanted fields can be removed from the design If the fields do not immediately show up in the Design window press the Refresh button in the
32. k Select In Ellipse button allows for selecting all stations within an ellipse that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select Along Line button allows for selecting all stations within a buffer distance of a line that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager EN Select All button selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Ea Select None button de selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager and at least one station has been selected adi Cross Section Line button allows the location and buffer distance for cross section lines to be defined This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager aL Show Create Cross Section button allows a cross section corresponding to a selected cross section line on the map to be created or viewed This feature is active only after a cross section line has been selected or drawn in the map window i BHLP button loads a Borehole Log Plot BHLP for the selected sta
33. right mouse click and select the Add to Station Group option from the pop up menu Dynamic Using the query builder define a more advanced search criteria and build a station group with those stations that satisfy the query criteria All Station Groups created for a project are listed in the Project Tree under the Station Groups branch Clicking on any of the sub branches corresponding to a Station Group will load the Station List tab and display the appropriate stations belonging to that group An example is shown below Hydro Gen malyst Beta Dema Project la Project gp Modules E Database Help La ue AF TI arms DA Prajert Tree La Stata Let Sratien Data Cata Que Data Filter varl Profile lo j j a Query 5 WB Cp Expand 1 fur EL F RES a w Taon Groups Sabon Nama imi Tim Elema mi TOE Staton ypa ha Al Jaion CH li ir pada e Gea HH 13 270 vale wih a ae wee tie te oan MESS 35155 6 20600 327 00 Baraha Moriioring Wela GEH 5665365 a 32200 323 00 Borehole OC_Montonng_ Wels GEM sema a 32400 125 00 Eseehole Sol Eoria GbE 5357063 421407000 33050 133150 UBorehole vernm GB OT Saenz es aman sac 332 00 Beeehale rh tH Batan Dan A A AA E A or NO God ssa a 12550 EZE Berehala Clay Fike fran am per manman am jigg Sa B
34. site ID river ID coordinates elevation type of observations type of equipment water chemistry flow rates etc Weather Station This station may be an observation point equipped to measure weather characteristics Station attributes include Station ID site ID coordinates elevation construction date type of measurements observations start observations end temperatures precipitation solar radiation air quality etc 2 1 2 Stations Table The Stations Table stores all the station location information for all projects residing in the database All additional tables you create in your database are directly or indirectly linked to the Stations Table The Station Table may contain an unlimited number of fields Though as a minimum the Station Table must contain the following fields Station ID ID Station Name Name Station Coordinate X Station Coordinate Y Station ground surface elevation Elevation If plotting stations on a map or cross section is desired then the following fields are required Station X co ordinate Station Y co ordinate 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Station ground surface elevation Elevation Station coordinates are stored in the Stations Table in latitude longitude format by default However each project may contain its own projection and coordinate system settings so that station locations may be entered and displayed in an alternate format e g
35. specify the color for the line As you define the series options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series will appear using the selected settings If you have selected Bar as the series type he following dialog will appear A neg s ar WW General Bar Series Settings ee x Label E visible Fort Bar Color Preview In this dialog you can modify the following settings Font Specify the label font style size and effects Visible Show Hide labels 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 205 Font Color Specify the color of the label text Bar Color Specify the color of the bars 9 3 1 Style and Display Settings Settings such as Axis Line and Legend can be modified in the Settings tab as shown below W aX eaa Settings Data Source Mame Sample Size 473 446 Location 10 10 Data Filter Title Background Color White Legend Vertical Axis Horizontal Asis Seres Type Line El El El El El The following settings are available Common Name Enter the Plot name and optionally specify a Background color Size Specify the Height and Width for the plot Location Origin Specify the X Y origin for the plot The origin 0 0 is located in the upper left corner of the plot window Data Filter Set a data filter for the plot data this is useful when the plot contains a large number of data points and you
36. 221 09 Bindtosuface None El Surface to bind Map e Live Update Apply To load a site map into the project select File Import Basemap from the main menu In cases where the sitemap is not appearing clearly because of the colors used in the DAF file you can specify a fixed color to apply to all lines and attributes of the DXF file The following settings are available for Site map elements Name sets the image name Visible shows hides the site map image Semitransparent sets the site map image as semi transparent Z Level for bitmap defines an elevation for the site map Bind to surface drapes the map over a surface If there are no surfaces available the only option will be None First load a surface as explained in the following section then select a 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 380 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help surface for the draped map 13 4 6 Surfaces Display Settings The 3D Explorer supports Surfer Grid GRD files to be used as surfaces in the 3D project Common surfaces may be a contour map of ground surface elevations or a water table contour map Once a surface is loaded there is an option to drape a site map to the surface for a truly 3D perspective ei Site maps Ey YEXSD4 El Es Surfaces Elf Cross Sections Data E AA cha BE E E CE af DD tig Name ooo Visible OOo Calar oo o View Semitransparent Color from palette The Surfaces category contai
37. 30 Borehole AN HL Wire Hesel E Reports Borehole 4253 1 Rerehale Sen BU Borehole Eaman 481430760 Feeehole Gi A OT 308 5 Berehala 215200 00 a daan Esechale A OE ETE Borehule RABIES 06 st i 253 Eseehole Bz 536032 DE E 14664 20 1 Eorelule Saa manm Borehole El 366 13 481465510 327 a Borelule 50202 45152500 3540 Borehole j Eorelule Borehole aen Em ma aa aa ee Borehole Berehala Esrehole Borehele Esrelrute 525999 10 Beerhole Taaa a Boreal 515749 08 421473150 Borehole Bane 4379150 3335 Boreal Borehole A E ET Borehole Statlon Groupe All Stations Raw 153 Ready The HGA Graphical User Interface is composed of several controls Menu Bar Contains menu commands with access to most features that are available in the HGA package Module Toolbar Contains several context sensitive short cut buttons for the most frequently used HGA features Project Tree Hosts a tree view listing some of the most common components of your project These include nodes for Station Groups Queries Crosstab Maps Cross Sections Reports 3D Views Station Data Borehole Log Plots and Plots Data Tabs Provides access to the various parts of the project including the Station List Data Query Data Filter and Station Data Well Profile Provides a borehole log plot BHLP view for the selected station Data Grids Contains the grids for data entry and v
38. 535599 700 414301 19 420 Be 007 1 0 640 439 Po J 0 535599 700 4514371 79 4240 bb 007 1 00 9756098 Po E 0 535599 700 414301 19420 E Bx2 007 1 1 097561 Po fi 0 535599 700 41430 194240 bb DO 1 1 25 B 0 535599 700 414301 19 420 EXEXEDOR 1 1432027 Po 3 0 535599 700 41430 19 4240 EXBX2 DO 1 1 564678 Po 10 0 535599 700 414301 19420 brbr2007 1 1 615654 E 11 0 535599 700 4143701 19 4240 EXBELEDO 2 1 737005 Po 12 0 535599 700 414301 19 420 EXBEXEDO 2 1 659756 El 13 20 535599 700 414301 194240 brbra00r 2 1 920732 Po 14 0 535599 700 414301 19420 EXBXEDO 2 2042683 Po 15 0 535599 700 414301 194240 EXEXZDO 3 2 591463 Po 16 0 535599 700 414301 19420 EXEXEDOF 9 3 32317 required information Analyze Cancel Help In the Pumping Wells tab select the data query that contains the required fields for this module for your pumping test analysis Then in the grid below map the appropriate field to each required field If the unit for the field is defined in the database template then the unit will be automatically populated Otherwise this will be left blank If needed you can manually enter a conversion factor to convert the data from the HGA source to the AquiferTest project target units NOTE For station X Y co ordinates the AquiferTest project units must be the same as the unit system used for the HGA project for example if your HGA project is using UTM set the AquiferTest units as me
39. 7 State Planar Non Earth Projection Unit C Others NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N meters 7 OF Cancel FJ Help In this dialog there are options for editing the Projection System units and description In the Name field a new name may be defined for the map project In the Projection Type frame there will be a list of Projection Systems supported by Map Manager and stored in the Database For each Projection Type a Projection must be defined along with a corresponding Unit The default unit for each projection will be displayed If your HGA project uses a local coordinate system all map projects must also use the local coordinate system In this case this setting cannot be modified and will be disabled IMPORTANT Currently cross sections cannot be displayed in the 3D Explorer if they have been created in a map project that uses a geographic coordinate system latitude longitude If you wish to display your cross section s in the 3D Explorer please be sure to create your map project using a projected coordinate system e g UTM In the Description text box you may define a brief description of the project NOTE Projects in the Map Manager can use co ordinate systems that differ from those used for displaying stations in the main HGA window NOTE Changing the projection of a map will affect any existing georeferenced raster image layers in the map project If the projection of a map is changed all georeferenced raster
40. BB are selected The X Y location for each vertex corresponds to the X Y location on the cross section line the Cross Section editor also provides the option to save the well contacts using the station s XY co ordinates and retrieve this info from the database For more details on this feature please see Interpretation and see Querying Cross Section Interpretations 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 331 Export Image Provides options for exporting the current cross section to a Raster Image file Supported file types include bitmaps BMP Joint Photographic Experts Group jpg and enhanced Meta Files EMP Enter a filename and choose the desired export format and click OK An Export dialog will appear with settings for the image file Quality ee a TA a 85 100 Resolution Vertical Scale 3 1150 11476 Scale 5umbology Export Depth f Ho Symbology Scaled f f Line Symbology Not Scaled All Sumbology Scaled OF Cancel Help There are several options for the modifying the image provided in this dialog Scale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be A scale factor of 1 will keep the original size while a scale factor of 2 will be twice the size both in height and width Resolution Instead of a scale factor you can choose a specific resolu
41. Data Settings l x Display Fields Condition Choose Data Select one or more stations for which data will be displayed M m m m m m Get Selection from Map Cancel Help Simply place a check box beside the stations that should display the data summary table If you click on the Get Selection Map button then the Map Manager will get only those stations that are selected on the map layer on the map project and use only those for the Display Data This button is enabled only if you have at least one station selected in the map layer Once you are finished click OK to return to the layout window From the Layout Setting dialog click on the Display Settings button in the Callout Box column and the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Callout Box Settings OS Box Callout Box Settings OS x Settings Fill Color Outline Color Transparent False Bos Shape Round Rectan Tip Style Triangle hi Fadding hs Shadow False Shadow Color Difset x pa Offset er eS OF Cancel Help In the Callout Box Settings dialog you can modify several display properties for the callout box The callout box is the box oval or bubble that contains the data for the selected station A preview is shown on the right side of the window in the image above The following display settings are available Fill Color set the fill color for the callout box Outline Col
42. Dilution results Y MDL results 2 Holding Time results name Sample ID Sample Date mle Batch ID Chemical Name Result value Rezsull_4 4 01 WOT 12 1996 3 1421996 12 00 00 2 Benzene fall wat waar rane nono boas wor war arrerteas_ aieriaete000 2____ Bereene 100 war war wars s erariaas 200002 ___ Benwene o war oa 7871995120002 Etere 100 war waa oaiaae re0co0 2 ___ ybeneone 10 war was area Tomene 10 war warrrarise s irerreasre0n00 2 v reo Write Flags to Database View Log File Export Results Close Help Indicates that all records have passed this check Y x Indicates that one or more record s has failed this check If any records failed the check you will also find the record is highlighted as per your settings from your template You will also find an option to write flags to the database indicating the results of the Validation You must select which field in the database to write the Results Flag should be in the results table The name of each check that was failed will be appended to the field you select You must also select which field in the database to write the Sample Flag should be in the sample table The name of the Template that was run on the sample will be appended to the field you select 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control NOS gt Writing OC Flags fue these the fields to wich pou wich to vaite OC flags e Res
43. Driver do Microsoft dBase dbt Driver do Microsoft Excel xls Driver do Microsoft Paradox db Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft 4ccess T reiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Mieres A see WER irnar ARE 4 4 4 4 E 4 4 4 E e Advanced j Back Cancel Select the ODBC driver format In this example select Microsoft Excel Driver as shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 436 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Create New Data Source pol Select a driver for which pon want to set up a data source Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft 4ccess T reber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dbase YFP Onver db Microsoft dB ase Treiber dbf Microsoft Excel Treiber le Microsoft FoxPro Oriver dbf Microsoft FoxPro FP Driver dbF Mieres OME Far Oracle Microsoft Excel Driver sls Advanced AA 4 j Back Cancel Click Next to proceed and the following dialog will appear Create Hew Data Source E Type the name of the file data source you want to save this connection to Or find the location to save to by clicking Browse Datas ourcelamel Browse Back Lancel In this dialog enter a name for the new Data Source in the Name field Click Next to proceed O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices Create New Data Source When
44. Ea S 2 ore sen ee OS F p A 505 j ant t de y A s95 th E eno 4 A l i Ses I 1 AA RA a eo Bekti Dodd di 4 0 l ll a A 275 4 Jr ang A ji i B5 Y j Ho A A 200 i 4 i Seinge Daa Sarel oe HE Sina L la ae SES 111 ik El Chata Flim PPT 1 Tits Enguera A We a E Legend r El Mriksa Buccs Sl E bor zontal shoe EH Sens Typ Lina 2 10111995 11111998 heer 10111998 111908 112000 LA 11 2002 LAAs Sampa Date Size Ve ue ol le pil ri eve pe if a tt Pint Ok Heb To zoom out to the original extents right mouse click on the plot area and select Zoom Out from the menu Viewer Window Settings Under the Settings tab you can define the settings for the plot page design 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 197 settings Data Source Mame watenguality multipleplot Number of Columna 2 Number of Rows 2 Spacing Width 10 Spacing Height 10 Name controls the name of the selected plot series this is read only and cannot be modified The plotting component supports display and manipulation of multiple plot windows in the viewer window Number of columns controls how many columns will be displayed in the viewing window for displaying plots Number of rows controls how many rows will be displayed in the
45. Edit button The Custom Label Renderer dialog box will appear on your screen 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 289 Custom Label Renderer x Name My Point Labels e Show secondary label Primary Labe Secondary Labe Field Elevation Y Frepend For Rotatio i Font Angle o Primary Label Placemen Alignment Top Center Field Prepend Append secondary Label T Offset i J25 e 4 E Cancel The label renderer settings are described below Name Specify the name of the renderer configuration Show Secondary Label This control allows you to show hide a secondary label Field Allows you to specify which layer attribute to show as the object label Prepend Allows you to prepend text to the chosen layer attribute Append Allows you to append text to the chosen layer attribute Font Loads the generic font settings e g font style size color etc Rotation Allows you to rotate the label Alignment Allows you to set the default label alignment Offset Allows you to offset the label from the default alignment by specifying Xand Y values Once you have defined the renderer settings click the OK button 11 2 2 11 Create Thematic Map This menu item allows the user to create a thematic map for any of the active Map Layers containing numeric data A thematic map shows the spatial distribution of one or more specific data values in the
46. Enter description here LIE Cancel For each cross section line specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section stations which lie within the buffer distance will all be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance is projected out perpendicular to the cross section line Click OK to accept the Line attributes If necessary selected stations can be deselected by clicking on each of them while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key If necessary extra stations may be added to the selection by clicking on one or more stations while holding down lt Ctrl gt key NOTE Once a cross section line has been created stations can still be added to or removed from the line by selecting the line then right clicking and choosing the Add Remove Stations option Stations can then be added removed by clicking on the desired stations In order to use this feature the station layers on which the cross section are based e g Boreholes must be set to Visible in the Layer Control The cross section can then be created as follows Select Tools gt Create Cross Section from the Main Menu or click on the Cross Section 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 322 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help button ll on the toolbar Click Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to th
47. Few ward ET a E T dle Additionally you will find some helpful filter options on the top of the columns in all of the data grids The first row on any data grid is your filter row Gestion Lind Des Qeery Cate Peter al el F oe ee Sor himor Mura Mri Tiri Cir Ti Teed Tam Dei Stet Tope z pei e s E j E he SHEGE JA UNA O sa CA l Danette Sana IO 19600 m im E Tamal 8 ansias ao ime Fara ip CEI amidan e CEE EE ERT Eoraboia a E Ci E ELL JU O e GB 07 ae AA A EL Bae EEJ EEL CERE 555 EE Borebc n abot ESC NE LE ELE borsbcia orm ee du mo oras on EC E ms E o ae Tara ES proa 059 EE Borehole 565 as aA ua 138 Mi ES arg lt Less than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 92 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Additionally if you select the drop down list in the filter row you will find a list of all the unique values in that column Fepasa Pani Water Level M D Cheraical hare Aj bal rs Ta e E HF AN HonBlarks Om BTETEX mo We moo BTEx 2000 TCE w TEX 500 E 2000 ETE 200 TCE 200 BTEX Grouping Folders for Queries on Navigation tree When working on a project it does not take long for your list of queries to get quite long N
48. Fields frame as circled above To see the ADO Data control for the report click on the button El ADO button in the Detail section of the Report body design also circled above Then right click and select Properties A dialog similar to the one shown below will appear O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor NN Properties ae E xl Provider Fs DataSourceName fs UselD FO Password FO ConnechonString Provider SGLOLEDE 1 Integrated Security sspi Build Source SOL SELECT FROM lithology HERE Station 2 ORDER EY Station Lancel Apply In the ADO properties under Source SQL you can see that the SQL string has been automatically created for you based on the table selected in HGA In this example the SQL string basically states Select all fields from the Lithology table where the Station ID is 27 and order by Station If you are familiar with the format you may modify the SQL string here and update the report design After the report is saved a node will be created in the Project Browser under the Reports node with the appropriate report file name Currently HGA requires that all reports be saved under the Reports folder which in turn is created within the project folder Although the Report Manager allows you to open reports from any folder only those saved under the Reports folder of your project will be displayed in the project browser Creating Reports based on a Data Query Fo
49. Height makes all selected controls the same height as the last selected control ii Size to Same makes all selected controls the same height and width as the last selected control w Lock Controls Locks all controls on the designer so that they will not be resized or moved from their original location 14 2 2 Toolbox options for General Tools 14 2 2 1 Label This section is designed to help familiarize you with the different options available in the toolbox for various tools The Toolbox is dynamic and changes depending on the object currently active in the Report Designer The vital options of select tools are described in this section however if you require further information please refer to the ActiveReport help file included with the installation in the Reports folder Angle Allows you to change the angle at which the text appears in the label ClassName Sets the overall text style of the label caption e g Heading1 Hyperlink Allows you to change the label into a hyperlink To do so enter an internet address inside the Hyperlink field Left 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 407 Determines how far in pixels from the left edge of the report the object is located You can either enter the pixel value manually or elect the object and drag it to the desired location Multiline Allows you to set whether you want the text to move to the next line when it reaches the right border of the object Mu
50. Label options you can click on the Symbol tab to modify the symbol options as shown in the screenshot below Series Settings l x Labels Symbol p Within guidelin Marker Symbol Tiange o Exceedencez Marker Size Proportional Height ja width j Min alue fo Mininun Height jo Width jo Max Value E Maximum Height E Width j Apply Close The following settings are available Symbol marker select the symbol marker type from the combo box Marker Size Height specify the symbol height Width specify the symbol width Proportional use this option to create proportionally sized symbols dependent upon the result value Min value specify the min value for the smallest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value Max value specify the max value for the largest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value As you define the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series symbols will appear using the selected settings 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 209 9 4 Adding Lines to a Plot Best fit lines or lines calculated with user defined formulas can be displayed on any plot to do so right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Add Line from the pop up menu The following Add Lin
51. Layer Contour line layer Station Layers A group layer containing several component layers Boreholes and Monitoring Wells Station group layers vc_exceeds 1 mg per A data query CrossSectionLine2 Cross section line layer Color Shade A color shade layer Airport_color bmp Georeferenced raster image 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 263 WQ Stations A station group layer with graduated rendering DEM_UTM17 A surface DEM layer 11 1 1 Grouping Layers Group Layers help organize map layers that share similar characteristics in a map project For example if your map contains a railroad layer and a highway layer you may choose to group these layers into a single group layer called Transportation Network Group Layers behave similarly to other layers within the Layer Manager panel If you turn off the visibility for a group layer the component layers will also turn off You can also mowe a group layer up or down the layer list change its draw order and ungroup layers as needed Creating a Group Layer To create a Layer Group follow the steps below Right click anywhere within the Layer Manager panel From the pop up menu select Create Layer Group Mew Layer Group x Flease enter the name for new layer group Lancel Enter a name for the layer group Click Ok The new layer group will now appear in the Layer Manager panel Adding Layers to a Group To add a layer to a layer group
52. MON ASCII Standard File M0N Cancel re The selected MON file s will now appear under the Select data source frame shown below Select MON files _ ci J Notes Select one or more MON files for importing into the project database PLEASE NOTE If you select the Water column above Diver or Water Level with respect to Vertical Datum the Water Level table will not be available for mapping in Step See on line help for further information This utility supports the import of MON files created by LoggerD ata anager Diver Pocket Diver Office DiverVisiIhE and e SENSE Select data source MON Files C Program Files HG4nalyst E xamples Diver Data MON MON File Information r la sind d PA Denni 4 F Below the Select data source frame is the MON file Information table This table contains the datalogger information of the selected MON file 2012 Schlumberger Water Services s Hydro GeoAnalyst Help To remove a MON file from the list select the file and click the Delete button K Click Next gt to proceed to Step 2 Data Mapping Make Mapping MN aj xj Data mapping Notes Select Section Field Select table field A Mapping oe Turbidity H Logger settings H Senes_ settings Data Data_DateTime l 1 Left tree wiew lists i of contents of the MOM file as mele Level While that on the right p screen_ID side displays tables and 3 Map fields in your datab
53. Meteorology p Divers E Diver Channels 6 Result Value Diver Data i Result Unit E Field Measurements Qualifier A E Mining Exploration i Reporting Detection Limit A FA E Geophysics are es Well History Condtions 5 Required AE fF En E Numeric A Unique Use List de E The list of available fields on the left are provided as you would be used to seeing them in the Template Manager or the Query Builder First branch are the Data Categories next branch are the Tables and the final branches are the fields As you drag and drop fields into the Template Format section you will notice that other fields may show up there automatically these are also bolded These are fields that are required to be able to import the data into the select table O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst If you select fields from the Single Sheets tab the Template will create a new worksheet for each table where fields were selected from In the example above fields were selected from both the Parameter Sample and the Parameter Result tables and therefore when you open this template in Excel you will find both a worksheet was created for each table If however you select the Grouped Sheets tab you will notice that the fields are presented in another way Here you will find the tables that are related to each other by database foreign ke
54. Min size fields A prevew window in the lower right corner displays a preview of the true size and color of the thematic map as it will appear in the Map Manager OK to create the map The thematic map is an entity of the selected layer when this layer is hidden the corresponding thematic map will also be hidden The Bar Chart is created in much the similar way Choose Bar Chart from the Layer Create Thematic Map menu and choose which fields you wish to map The following dialogue will allow you to choose colors for the bars representing different fields as well as the max height and width of the bars 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 292 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Bar Chart ELEVATION 30 Poni TOL i 2d Paints Preview Back OF Cancel 11 2 2 12 Modify Thematic Map Provides options for modifying the properties of an existing Pie or Bar chart Thematic Map ES e Bar Chart Cancel Select the map you wish to edit by clicking on the check box beside the name you entered for that map and click Modify The same Bar Chart dialogue will appear allowing you to go through the procedure again and change various aspects of the chart 11 2 2 13 Create Contours With HGA Provides options for creating contours with data from a selected field from the selected points layer Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 29
55. Point Utility Line Utility Site Water Edge Water Structure Waterboy Segment Wooded Area GeoCommunity http data geocomm com catalog Data GIS Data Depot Format e00 format coverage Geographic Coverage Each Country USA each State and County Layer DEM NWI DLG LU LC and TIGER are available for free United States Geological Survey http seamless usgs gow Data GIS Data Warehouse Format Geographic Coverage World each country USA any scale and seamless Datum NAD83 Layer US National Elevation Dataset up to 10 M National Land Cover Dataset High Resolution Orthoimagery Layer extent Transportation Boundaries Hydrography Florida Department of Environment Protection ftp ftp dep state fl us pub gis data Data GIS Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Florida 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appe ndices 449 Datum FDEP custom Albers projection in the HPGN datum Layer Envronmental Data Basemap Data Global Forest Watch Canada Warehouse http www globalforestwatch ca datawarehouse datawarehouse htm Data GIS Format Shapefile GRID XLS Geographic Coverage Canada Datum North American Datum of 1927 Layer Forest related data basemap data GeoPlan Center University of Florida http www fgdl org Data Florida Geographic Data Library FGDL Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Floridawide and County Datum FDEP custom Albers projection in the HPGN datum L
56. Select Directory i El x Directory Mame D Program Files HG Analyst Directories Files gt DA ACT whi P Fil CustLine w Level dll n ee eee ce CustPoly_ Shift dl Ey bhip CustRend dll data DBFOLL dll z a dbwhi cl xl Ey Projects Drives E d new volume Cancel Help Select a new directory then click OK to continue 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 104 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help In the next line enter your Project Location and specify the Material Specifications The material specifications will be used to represent soil materials in the cross sections and borehole plots in the program One of the existing material specifications may be selected or a new one may be easily created The available soil settings include e USCS Unified Soil Classification System USDA United States Department of Agriculture DIN 4023 Deutsches Institut f r Normung e V IAH International Association of Hydrogeologists Compton Shell Standard Dunham Classification Simply choose the desired soil settings from the combo box To customize or create a soil classification press the button to load the Material Specification Editor For more details on customizing the soil settings please refer to Chapter 2 Material Specifications Editor You may also enter a Description of the project in the field below the Soil Specifications optional Finally under the Projection Type frame you must specify
57. Settings Interpolate log values This option will interpolate the log values of the data points and then invert the log value distribution This option is useful when interpolating data with a high degree of variance Add Data Source Define the various properties relating to the data source Data Source select a field from the data query that contains the data to be interpolated e g concentration or result value Name define a name for the parameter Date Field select the field that contains the sampling date if available Date Granularity This option controls how to accumulate the data items of various date stamps For example assume you have data for the following sample dates 5 stations sampled on 03 05 99 6 stations sampled on 03 14 99 could be from the same or other stations 4 stations sampled on 03 19 99 5 stations sampled on 03 27 99 6 stations sampled on 04 04 99 5 stations sampled on 04 15 99 4 stations sampled on 04 25 99 If you select Day for date granularity you will obtain 7 data sets to interpolate and If you select Month for date granularity you will obtain 2 data sets to interpolate 20 stations sampled on 03 01 99 and 15 stations sampled on 04 01 99 In this case the first observation from a well will be selected If you select Year for date granularity you will obtain only one data set that will essentially be a static plume In this case the first 1 data set When you have defined the s
58. Some stations may be crossed by a layer but may not be involved in the interpretation e g bad wells or data in those wells did not make sense etc and as such the following options are available Consider all intersection points as valid contacts this is the option Save All Contacts Only store contacts where there are vertices within the well e g user Snapped to intervals or 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 34 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help clicked within a well and created a vertex To do this disable the option Save All Contacts Model Layers Before drawing model layers the model layer attributes must first be defined in the dialog shown below Model layers can be added deleted or edited in this see Model Layer Topoflayerd Topography Topography Layer Bottom of Laver 1 Overburden Aquifer Oyverburden Aquifer Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer et ob Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquiter Bottom of Aquiter A P x Gave Cancel FJ Help SS In the Model Layers dialog there are four columns Order Layer order from top to bottom read only Name Defines the layer name Description Defines layer description Pattern Defines line properties for the model layer In this dialog specify the total number of model layers and the properties for each layer Layers will be ordered from top to bottom the first layer will always be Top of Layer 1 i e Ground surface followed by Bottom of Layer 1 Bottom of Layer 2 and so
59. Specify a Group Field the group field must be selected from one of the fields specified in the Group By List Select an Operator and a corresponding Value Repeat for additional conditions Multiple conditions must be linked by selecting an appropriate Operator AND OR Press the E Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string Ifthe query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning Press the 2 Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query Click Close to exit the Query Builder and click Yes when prompted to save changes NOTE For Data Queries if aggregation options are selected then the same fields in the Display Fields must also appear in the Group By options 64 Station Group Query Example A Station Group query is used to segregate stations that meet specified criteria into a separate station group The stations groups that are generated using a query are called Dynamic because the station compliment of these groups may change as new data is entered for the stations The stations groups that are user defined are referred to as Static because they do not change unless the user makes the changes manually Follow the steps below to create a Station Group query If the Query Builder is not yet loaded select the Query B
60. The interpolated value at any location is a linear combination of all Natural Neighbors of that location and the resulting surface is continuous with a slope that is also continuous Combining the gradients or slopes with the linear interpolation provides results that are more smooth and may anticipate the peaks and valleys between data Singularities and other undesirable effects may be lessened by incorporating the gradient factor The gradient influence on the results can be manipulated by two tautness parameters that the user can enter These parameters allow the interpolated surface to vary from purely linear interpolation to one which is well rounded and has the gradient factor In all cases the slope discontinuities are removed and the resulting surface has slope continuity everywhere The advanced settings parameters for the Natural Neighbor method are described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X_Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Xdirection Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices 443 Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting is useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the ot
61. The mapped fields will now display in the table at the bottom of the Data Mapping Configuration dialog Repeat this process for additional fields To remove mapping F Select the appropriate row in the preview grid F Click the Delete button X Select the Save mapping to database checkbox to retain the mapping for future MON file import operations Click Next gt to proceed to Step 3 Importing Data into the Database 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 2101 Import data Notes m Select Channel 1 Select one or more i enabled channels Iv Level Temperature T Conductivity T Flowman selected by default 2 Select the source MON file by checking on Import File Name Logger Type Location Serial Number Station Name Station the checkbox in the CTD_070503132 CTD Diver 13 CTD NO01 61667 312 import column see Remarks below 3 Click on the Import button when ready Remarks o Rows highlighted in white have correct station name mapping and can be selected o Rows highlighted in red indicate that the station name in MON file can no be found in the database Click on the corresponding blue arrow to specify the destination F station 4 gt o Rows highlighted in yellow indicate that there ha lt Back Import Cancel B Help Step 3 Importing Data into the Database From the Select Channel frame select a par
62. X E Es BHLP Well Constructio oes ES Scale rm e Visible Column Options ac ES Well Construction General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc 4 E ES Plot 7 Show width 6 Color Line Style Straight bi Straight e Show f Use Image C Use Color Help Apply OF Cancel The Drilling tab allows you to define the appearance settings for the annular filling Use the Border frame to set the Visibility border Width and border Color The Line Style dropdown box allows you to select between a Rough irregular border to a Straight flush border 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NN Hydro GeoAnalyst Help The Filling frame includes a Show checkbox which allows you to set the visibility of the annular filling You can display the annular filling in one of two ways Use Image or Use Color The use image option will use the images defined in the List Editor to display the filling Otherwise select use color and specify a color from the color box Casing BHLP Settings Y xj E Es BHLP Well Construction ES Well Construction Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduci Customization i Show Border Color f Use Default Color Use Material Image Color Use Material Ima e Tiled T Visible Font J Position Use Casing Color for Cap E Right Justify W Use Casing Color for Mount Help
63. able to create the project until you have selected an area For more details on defining geotransformation settings please refer to Appendix G Configuring Geotransformation Settings Once you have specified the required settings you will see that the Finish button at the bottom of the window will become active This indicates that you have entered the necessary input fields for a new project and you can finish the Project Wizard and create your new project Finish to create the project and close the Project Wizard A new project will be created with the necessary tables fields and settings Please be patient during this process The new project should then appear in the main HGA window You may return to the Project Manager settings window at any time if you need to modify any of the project settings defined above To do so select Project Properties from the main menu of HGA This is explained in the following section 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 106 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 3 4 Modifying Project Properties This menu item will load a window displaying the properties for the current project Project Properties Coordinate Type Coordinate Geographic i NAD 1983 UTM Zone 1 N UTM a Unit C State Plane PEA Others Project Location Material Specification DIN 4023 Database Server MGAERTNERZ WATSSWS Database Name aS Once a project is created there are options to modify s
64. acaricia 184 Gheck Blanks Seting S enema oi diva darian 185 Check Dilution Factor Se NINGS siii dida 186 Gheck Detection Limit SetihgS ir a a da dai ces 186 Check Holding Time Se rns ud ducado a odiada 187 3 Perform Lab Quality ASSeSSMe Dt oooccccccccnccccococococococananannnrorarernnnrarnnnnrnrarnrnrnrarananrnrnnnnnnns 189 Chapter IX Time Series Plotting 194 1 Abo t the INtertace iia iia cian 194 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 6 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 2 Adding Plot inca 197 PGGIPIO iniciar Ada did 198 Field M app no Sui tota 198 3 PIOULDCUINGS tardara lid 203 Style and DIS Dlay Se ting S is 205 Data Series SENOS mt A A aci 207 4 AGING LINCS to a Plot ona 209 Saving Exporting and Printing sssini d 210 Managing PIOt Template sS rasina A KAEA 211 Chapter X Borehole Log Plotter 214 ADOUL Me NOT ACC nia 214 BHLP Default S Ct Sida ed a a a unl aaa a uted 216 BHCP COMAS it o dae uth eile eae ats 218 Scale COM Murrieta 219 A A A tee 220 LITRO OO Y COMIMTA iia a eaa i a 221 A A A a cn rr ee ee ee eee eee ee eee 221 e A o O 222 O O A hee hat eae 225 Well Construction COMA Aisa ias 228 A O e eee eee 228 Interval Col Mr ad illa 237 A Nee eh Ee caste ahd coats a Neale is ahaa ea tee 239 Beth COU Nilda 240 A A ee co ge CR Oe Cree ee Seer Tee ee eee a ae ee Tere 241 PIGUGRG COIN cares aa a a a aai ae a aa aE 243 SEUNG S err aa a aara a aaa a a 244 4 Create a New Borehole Log Plot Example
65. also be changed by right clicking anywhere in the 3D Display window and selecting one of the following options e The Shift option allows translation of the map region in the plane of the screen by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer in the desired direction e The Rotate Screen X and Y rotates the display around the fixed axes of the Display Window by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer along the X or Y direction e The Rotate Model X and Y rotates the display around the 3D image axes by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer in the desired rotation direction 13 3 2 Animation Controls The tools located on the right hand side ofthe Navigation frame may be used to continuously rotate the image around the X Y and Z axes and animate plume objects ZN Options e Browser e Time ja Simply select the desired axis and click the Play button to start rotation B You can record the rotation as an AVI file by pressing the Record button For more details see Recording Animation to AVI file below Bl The rotation can be stopped by clicking the Stop button The Browser check box when selected will activate the player controls for static animation of the selected color map or Isosurface For color maps the map position will span in a loop along the specified plane through the project extents Isosurface values will be animated similarly in a loop however as the scroll bar moves the isosurface value will change The Time
66. and slope at each grid node This can be used to augment the elevation information The aspect is measured in degrees or radians clockwise from north and the slope is measured positively below the horizontal plane in degrees or radians Tautness 1 Controls the influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Tautness 2 Controls the influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Use_ Gradient Blends the gradient calculation and the linear interpolation calculation to produce a smoother surface 15 3 3 Kriging Kriging is a geostatistical method that produces visually appealing maps from irregularly spaced data Anisotropy and underlying trends suggested in raw data can be incorporated in an efficient manner through Kriging The program used called kt3d is available in the public domain from the Geostatistical Software Library GSLIB distributed by Stanford University and is well documented by Deustch and Journel 1998 The program kt3d from GSLIB performs simple Kriging ordinary Kriging or Kriging with a polynomial trend and uses the standard parameter file used by GSLIB If the semi variogram components have already been modeled by the user they can be incorporated into the program by choosing the appropriate set of parameters in the parameter file The semi variograms available include Spherical Exponential Gaussian Power and the Hole effect mo
67. and units defined in the HGA project A detailed description of the coordinate and projection systems available in HGA is provided in Chapter 3 see Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location NOTE It is important to know and select the correct projection system during the import to prevent erroneous station co ordinates The LAS file allows to specify a place holder for NULL values common examples are 999 0000 Wherever this value is detected in the source HGA will insert NULL in the destination according to the field setting specified in the Template Manager When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 52 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Import LAS File Mote This step provides a preview of i the mapped fields and an Ero amings indication of any eroneous records Records with emors wil not be imported you may r luen lo previous steps lo make any corechone ba the mapping Al Ihe bap of the window each Data Preview tab represents a different O A A ___ _EE_ gt _5z gt E E E AI a database lable containing one resistivity or more mapped fields The last step in the import involves previewing the data to be imported and taking appropriate actions with regards to erroneous data The Data Validation window as shown below displays all data ready to be imported Errors or warnings if any will be listed along with
68. as shown in the following figure The Select create slices window displays a list of the available slices which have been previously defined The Select create slices window also has options to create additional slices or to modify delete existing slices 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 395 ss Select create slices O xj Slices CroseSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal alice no 1 13 7 1 Creating a Vertical Slice To create a vertical slice through the project domain click the Vertical button to open the Slice Properties window as shown in the following figure A yellow outline of the vertical slice will appear in the Display Screen Yertical Slice Properties x Y1 481 4493 0 YE ast 4493 0 both sliders synchronized The Slice type options define the planar orientation of the slice e Vertical XZ refers to the plane along the X axis extending through the entire depth of the site e Vertical YZ refers to the plane along the Y axis extending through the entire depth of the site For a Vertical XZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the Y axis and the Y axis values are displayed in the fields labelled Y1 and Y2 Alternately a Y axis value can be typed directly into this field 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 39 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help For a Vertical YZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the X axis and the X
69. be opened using the report editor directly by selecting the Open button ti from the Designer window s toolbar and setting the file filter to WTP Once a report template is opened it can be edited and saved Deleting a Report Template In HGA right click on a report template in the project browser and select the Delete option from the menu to delete the template The selected template will be deleted both from the project browser as well as from storage Setting a Report Template as Default Template To set a selected template as the default template right click on the template and select the Set as default option from the pop up menu in HGA The selected template will be set as the default template Every time a new report is created the default template will be used to furnish the header and footer sections 14 8 Import Reports from MS Access The Report Editor allows you to import reports that are created in an MS Access 2000 database environment This may be useful in cases where you migrate existing data from MS Access into HGA and want to import existing reports as well The MS Access Importing wizard can be activated by clicking on the r Import Access Report button on the Designer s toolbar The wizard guides you through a number of steps to import the desired report These steps are explained in the following sections The following figure depicts the first screen of the wizard that presents some introductory text
70. below Design SOL View Preview Display Fields Function Expression es Order by station id id station E station y station name name chem test_samplel date_ date chem test results0 chemical name chemical narne chem _test_results0 result value Concentration chem test results result unit result unit gt station elevation Elevation chem test sample screen_from_ Screen fram gt station elevation chem test samplel screen_from_ JE hi The last display field in the screenshot above combines the sample elevation and the screen depth from fields the screen depth is subtracted from the station elevation or station TOC elevation if desired using the Expression below station elevation chem_test_sample0 screen from_ and entering Z for the Alias Executing this query will produce the results shown below Design SOL ViewPreview SELECT station id 45 1d station 45 x station y AS y station name 45 name chem test samplel date AS date chem_testresulteD chemical chemical name chem_test_resulteO result value 45 Concentration chern_testresulteO result unit 45 result unit station elevation AS Elevation chem_test_sample0 screen_FROM_ AS Screen_from station elevwation chem_test_samplell screen_from_ 45 z FROM Station RIGHT JOIN 554 Station ID SStation SID LEFT JOIN chem_test_results0 ON Station id chem_test_resulteO Station LEFT JOIN chem_test_sampleD ON 51 c
71. check box when selected will activate the player controls for time animation Both color maps and isosurfaces may be animated in time Clicking on the Options button displays the Animation Properties window as shown in the following figure 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 369 Animation Properties X Rotate Time Flume Browser AutoR otate Ase C Screen Aves AutoRotate speed Model ez Automatic rotation can be performed around the Screen Axes or the Model Axes The AutoRotate speed may be adjusted by pressing and holding the left mouse button on the Slider Button and setting it to the desired level 13 3 3 Time Animation The Time tab is available when displaying a transient plume When the Time tab is selected the following window appears l Rotate Shift Light Position Time Pume Browser F gt alo Y gt el Options 841 2000 12120001 Browser Time Time Animation Options Clicking the Options button will load the Animation Properties Time window as shown below Animation Properties x Rotate Time Plume Browser Time steps 50 Start Time w 172000 5 1 2000 Finish Time fz 142000 124142000 Animate in selected interval Cancel The Number of time steps for animation value may be increased to smooth the transition from one time to the next or it may be decreased to make the animation proceed faster HGA 3D 2012 Schlumberger Water Services
72. clicking on the Line Style preview Click the OK button to add the surface line to the cross section The surface line will appear in the cross section legend under the Surface category where it can be shown hidden 12 2 4 Tools Options Allows setting line snapping options for lines drawn on the cross section If this feature is selected the dialog shown below will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 340 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Editor Labels Fiulers Vertical Exag Screen wLevel Intersecting Grid Snapping Butte Well Snapping Butter fio Pixels Boundary Snapping Buffer 5 Fiels Vertex Snapping Butter E Pixels Cancel Help Editor Tab In this tab there are options for specifying the snapping buffers for the selected cross section and its elements The Snapping Buffers are specified in pixels The buffer values determine the distance to which lines and vertices will snap i e join to the nearest line or vertex If a low value for the Snapping Buffer is specified the mouse cursor must be very close toa vertex or line in order for snapping to occur If a high value for the Snapping Buffer is specified then snapping will occur at a distance further away from the destination vertex or line Snapping allows for exact placement of vertices and eliminates the need for repetitive use of Zooming in to specific locations If the snapping is used the vertices will be connected but not
73. color Width is the contour line width Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals Value ae Contour map 3 m M C 3 0 0 HLine properties El uto intervals Visible we 40000 500 H ElCuetorm Values Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will be plotted starting from the Lower limit value Custom values The Custom Values setting is used to assign custom contour values in addition to or in replacement of the regular interval contour values Press the browse button to load the Custom contour values window as shown in the figure below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 389 Click to add a value Click E to insert a value Click WA to delete a value This setting is commonly used to set logarithmic contour interval values for concentration data Labels Setting ate a o Name Contour map 3 Visible E o Color fl E Semitransparent mu Mar value 39339 7852 Min value OO Slice properties Glue intervals Custom Wales A lt E Textcolor 20 11375 Decimas 3 Multiple Labels Distance 105 888 Boxlabels Boxdepth 5 028438 Boweolor L q ad The Labels setting is used cust
74. data appear in your data preview one that contains just the qualifier and one that contains the value These columns can then be used for the mapping in Step 2 2012 Schlumberger Water Services eo Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Import Chemical Data Wizard i Fi Ioj x O Choose a Data Source Data Source File CAD ocuments and Settings mgaertnerDezktop chem import files Example Chemical Data le Es Format One Analysed Value per Row Start Importing Data Using Aow i W Use First Row as Header Data Preview Worksheet NonDetects 20 005 Lear Result Field contains Non Detect qualifiers e g lt 0 5 Select Result Field result value Back Next gt gt Cancel Help Step 2 Data Mapping This step requires you to select the category and result table you wish to import the data into Fields highlighted in green are required You also have the option to show the fields from the sample table this allows you to import information other than the Sample ID into the sample table for example the sample date As mentioned in Step 1 here you can map the newly created result value_value and result value qualifier fields All data within your result field that appears as a string i e text will have been separated into the result_value qualifier field While all data that appears as double i e a number will have been separated into he result value _value field O 2012 Schlumberger Water S
75. data currently displayed in a grid can be exported To export selected data from a grid the data must first be selected Data selection can be performed by either selecting desired rows or using the tools provided in HGA These tools include those that are used to filter data such as Filter By Selection and Hide selected rows The selected data can then be exported by either selecting the Export option from the Project menu or by right clicking in the grid and selecting the Export pop up menu item Once the file dialog appears the desired export destination can be selected by choosing one of the file types corresponding to the supported destination listed earlier in this section EDD Template Designer You can find this option by selecting Project Export In this first step of the workflow you can create a template which can be opened in Excel for others to use to validate their data In the EDD Template Designer you select which fields you wish to have in your template by simply dragging and dropping them onto the Template Format EDD Template Designer 18a Single Sheets pS sy www Lab template_version_check com Description H Geologic Description Database Name Well Construction parameter_sample sample_date l Soil Testing po i l Soil Sampling E Data Type Unit l Monitoring Event i IDATESTAMP E Parameter Sample Comment Gy Parameter_Result View Names Water Level i
76. date with the data stored in your database However reports that are saved from the Viewer are static and they may not reflect the exact content of the current data To save the report press the Save button from the Viewer window s toolbar The Report will be saved as a RDF file archive file HGA stores and manages all report designs in your project database All reports that are created for your project will be retrieved from the database and are listed in the Project Browser when your project is loaded into HGA 14 4 Report Settings The Report Settings dialog can be accessed by clicking the Page Report button CL from the Main Toolbar This dialog consists of four sections Page Setup Printer Settings Grid Settings and Styles Each section is described below Report Settings Top Margin 1440 4 Bottom Ma argirr 1440 Lett Marqiri 1440 Right Margin 1440 do Gutter 0 1 F Mirror Margins Cancel The Page Setup section allows you to set the page margins of your report page Set the Top Bottom Left Right and Gutter margins by using the appropriate vertical scroll bars Margin values can be set in quarter increments 1440 1 inch You may also choose to mirror the margins of facing pages by selecting the Mirror Margins check box O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 417 Report Settings Papersize Default Printer width Height Orientation Print
77. directly edited in the SQL View Preview tab Follow the steps listed above to execute the query 6 3 1 Adding a field which contains a Linked List If a field is added to the Conditions which contains a Linked List then the Expression field for the Condition may be chosen from a linked list An example is illustrated below For example it may be necessary to do a chemical exceedance query such as Vinyl Chloride gt 10 ug l The chemical name Vinyl Chloride may be selected from the combo box since this chemical name is part of a linked list See the example shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Queries 153 ue Buiter ee xa A 7 Station Group Quen Data Quer Design SOL View Preview mal Field Select a Query WCE nceeds 0 soil_samples l Soil Chemistry 2 ay sample_code 2 Sample_name pu sample date TE id station station y station name eee lo EA e Map and BHLP Ready e Use current projection system Chemical_name H result_value H result unit conc ppm Conditions A on 0 L perator i soil chemistry chemical name bi fractioncode sail_ chemistry result_value A s Interpreted_qualifiers Tetrachloroethylene raporting_detection_limit Trichloroethane result comment Trichloroethylene TYOC Winyl Chloride Source Conditio Project x Advanced Close H Help Field Name soil chemistry r
78. feature for any envronmental database It provides the ability to easily locate desired information with only a few mouse clicks 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst 15 HGA provides multiple methods of querying data out of your database through the Query Builder The Query Builder combines a set of tools for creating a range of simple to the most advanced queries for your projects All queries created can be saved for later use used to define Station Groups or used to filter data for reporting plotting charts and creating GIS maps 1 24 Lab QA QC When collecting analyzing and interpreting environmental data Quality Control QC can come in many forms and fashions Hydro GeoAnalyst supports a Lab Quality Control component that allows users to verify the accuracy of the analysis results reported by a laboratory As part of a data collection process duplicate samples blank control samples and spiked samples are added to sample sets these samples are sent to a laboratory along with the original field samples to be analyzed in a controlled environment using constant techniques instruments and personnel The objective is to identify any sources of contamination that may originate from the lab analysis and provide some assurance to the client that the data is valid and representative of your site conditions We have also recently added checks for Dilution Factor Detection Limit and Holding
79. form of a Pie or Bar chart Thematic Maps can only be drawn on layers that contain data Such as stations contour maps etc They are not applicable to annotation layers A common example of the applications for a thematic map would be displaying the distributions of multiple chemicals To create a Thematic Pie Chart for Hydro GeoAnalyst station data A Hydro GeoAnalyst Data layer from the Layer Manager to ensure that this layer is active 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 290 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help e g a Station Group or Data Query layer such as Boreholes Monitoring Wells etc Select the menu option Map Create Thematic Map Pie Chart from the Map Manager main menu A Thematic map window will appear as shown below Create Thematic Map Fields in T able Fields for the Theme ao ES ce pe Enter a name for the map in the Name field This name will appear in the thematic map list should you choose to edit it later From the left panel select the fields for map Move fields to the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the gt gt button Next to proceed to the next window O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 291 Pie Chart ELEVATION blas Size 40 Points TOL Hin Size 20 Points Preview In this dialog specify the field color by clicking on the colored rectangles to the right of each field and specify the chart size in the Max size and
80. forth The top most layer represents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer i e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer excluding the top layer Additional model layers may be inserted at any location at any time Press the El Add button to add a new model layer The new layer will be added ABOVE the currently selected layer Press the xl Delete button to remove the selected model layer To edit an existing layer press the Pz Edit button or double click on the row containing O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 347 this layer Each model layer does not need to appear in all cross sections NOTE The Model Layers options are not available when the Model Layer interpretation is set to edit mode in the layer manager Update Cross Section Use this option to update the screen water level and intersecting layer information displayed on the current cross section The corresponding map project should be open in order to update information from intersecting cross sections Cross Section Info Displays summary info for the selected cross section Information for DD A Bl X Cross Section Line Length 1513 1 m Butter 00 0 ra Starting Point Coord 536467 4814544 Ending Point Coord 536595 4813316 Vertical Exaggeratior 3D Well Numbers 2 Display BHLP Use this feature to display a borehole l
81. geologic layer you have just digitized in the current cross section has already been created you may select it from the list instead of typing a new name Click on the blank area beside Pattern to load the pattern options as shown below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 351 Fill Patterns Please choose a pattern w lr wwii M Diolomite OF Cancel e Select a pattern then click OK Repeat the same sequence of operations for other layers within the active cross section The result will be a layered structure of the geological domain The cross section may contain some gaps where polygons do not completely touch adjacent polygons this can be easily fixed by selecting a vertex on a polygon and using the pointer tool to re position the vertex Alternately gaps between polygons can be filled by using the Link Vertex option These options are explained below Once a layer is created in one cross section it will be available for selection in all other cross sections that you might have for your project Altering the properties of a given layer will be reflected in all cross sections Editing Layers Once the interpretation layers are drawn it may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more vertices or fill in the gaps between any two adjacent layers to create a continuous layered structure To move a vertex Select the k pointer tool from the toolbar Click on one of
82. grid size click Ok Otherwise click the Modify button to specify a new grid size The following dialog will be shown x New size Original size Hols Em ME o fi ADO WFiows 308 WNFicws 1400 OR The NCols and NRows fields represent the number of columns and number of rows for the surface file respectively These fields will contain recommended values for the new grid size However you can manually define a new grid size by entering the desired values for these fields Click Ok once the new grid size has been defined The surface layer will then be generated and added to the Layer Manager panel 11 2 2 3 Load HGA Data This menu item provides options for loading Hydro GeoAnalyst data as a new map layer The data source may be a list of stations from a Hydro GeoAnalyst Station Group or those resulting from a Data Query Upon clicking on this menu item the following dialog will appear O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 273 Load HGA Data f Station Group O Wate Mue OF Cancel FJ Help In this dialog select the data source type and choose from the appropriate combo box the desired Station Group or Data Query The data will be used to create a new Map Layer and the layer will be displayed in the Layer Manager as well as in the map window This option is available only if a map project is open The resulting shapefiles will be saved as follows e for Station groups the shapefiles
83. have been specifically designed for optimal flexibility and ease of use The items in the menu bar are context sensitive this means that one or more menu items may be greyed outif a specific feature is not applicable for a particular view The top menu allows access to all of the functionality of the project browser tree view and all of the tabs Project gP Modules 4 Database El Help The following sections describe the items which appear in the menu bar 2 2 1 Project The Project menu contains options for project level actions as described in the following sections 2 2 1 1 New This option start the New Project wizard which is described further in the next section Creating New Projects 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 41 2 2 1 2 Open The Open menu item is used to open existing HGA projects Only projects with the extension VBH may be opened in HGA The VBH file contains basic information for the project including a connection string to the HGA database The a Open button in the Project Tree toolbar performs the same function 2 2 1 3 Open from Backup Use this option to open a back up copy of the HGA project and database This is useful if a remote client or colleague needs to open your HGA project and SQL Server database A back up of the SQL Server database can be made using the BackUp Database option available in the Database menu explained later in this section A copy of the p
84. hides the color map Max value is the calculated maximum value for the plume Min value is the calculated minimum value for the plume Upper limit is the data value above which the color map may be clipped out not displayed Lower limit is the data value below which the color map may be clipped out not displayed Clip at limits indicates whether the color map will clipped above the Upper limit and below the Lower limit Semitransparent sets the color map as semi transparent Slice field contains a link to the Slice options see Creating Slices and Cross Sections for more details 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 13 5 3 3D Explorer 387 Isoline Maps Isoline Contour maps are a set of lines plotted on a surface whereby each line is connected by a set of points having equal values of a given data type Creating Isoline Maps To create a Isoline map click on the desired element in the Model tree and then right click on the element and select the Add Isolines map option from the pop up menu Alternately contour lines may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create contour map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window with a list of the available surfaces slices The contour map for the selected model element can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section lines a Select create slices Ioj x Slices CrossSections List of shoe
85. is set to use the British Imperial system of units e g feet in the database and the new data to be entered is in the metric unit system e g meters the unit in the View Settings section can be set to be in the metric system All data entered in this system will be converted to the appropriate unit system used in the database The Template Manager also allows providing validation rules for the selected field If provided these rules will be used to protect the user from entering erroneous data into the database In Hydro GeoAnalyst all data that does not comply with these rules is highlighted with a yellow background In some cases it may be convenient to pre define a list of values for some fields For example instead of typing chemical names for each record you may want to pick from a pre defined list In order to link to a field s data source to a list Select the General list option from the Get values from list combo box Click on the Edit List button This will display the List Editor The List Editor provides the tools for populating a list of potential values for the selected field For more details please see Chapter 2 List Editor Select the Allow values only from list option to strictly limit the values for the selected field to those in the list If this option is not selected then it will be possible to either pick a value from a list or manually enter a new one for this field NOTE Recall that if a field is
86. jni aa Borehole EX projecte 5 h a P E aad T emplatez E4 station ca File name Jeholes_G eologic_ Description Hydrogeology Save as type Tex csv a Cancel Test csv ML sral MS Access mdb Shape File shp H Select the appropriate file format and enter a file name then press Save 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Queries 163 6 9 Printing Query Results Using the SWS Report Editor you may insert Query results into a report template for fast and easy printing To send the query results to the report editor Select Project Report from the main menu or Click on the print button on the toolbar In the Reporting component the query may be saved or printed For more information please refer to Chapter 14 The Report Editor 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 166 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 7 Crosstab Queries Crosstab queries are special types of queries that allow you to store your data in a normalized manner in your database but generate and display pivoted denormalized outputs from that data In other words crosstab queries let you format existing data queries by rotating rows to columns to see different summaries of the source data for easier analysis and reporting Suppose you want to display a pivoted view of your chemistry results whereby each row represents a different sample at each station and each column represents results for each analyte Anothe
87. maximum pages is reached ActiveReports will stop processing the report This property can be used to limit the number of output pages when running large reports and distributing the results over a slow connection WaterMark Adds a specified image to the report s background The watermark image can be positioned sized aligned and placed on specified pages by using the other watermark properties 14 2 3 Using the Report Designer Report Explorer The Report Explorer as shown in the figure below allows you to browse through the controls of the active report and facilitates selecting controls for further editing The Report Explorer windows can be accessed by clicking on the Explorer icon ES on the toolbar 2012 Schlumberger Water Services ao Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Explorer El MainReport qa ReportHeader Labell vee Labelz sen Labels ven Label4 labels seen Labelo ae Label EN Labels EL StationGroupHeader se de txtid e StationID Detail dcRptData d Fldid ve Fldresult value Fldresult_unit a Fldname La GroupFooter 1 e Chart2D1 E PageFooter The explorer provides quick access for selection of controls on the report Selecting a control in the Report Explorer activates the corresponding control on the report This makes the control ready to be formatted or moved to another location The explorer lists at least three nodes under the Main
88. mode then click the corresponding button from the toolbar You can then user your mouse to select the location to add your annotation After adding an annotation you will need to click on the corresponding button again to add another annotation of the same type NOTE If you are adding editing deleting one annotation type you must right click on the selected layer and either switch between annotation types or de select the current annotation type otherwise you will remain in Edit mode for the selected annotation type Upon deselecting switching annotation types you will be prompted to save your changes Add Text To add text Select the Edit Text option from the pop up menu Click on the A Text button on the toolbar Click on the desired text location in the cross section window Enter the text in the Input text window that appears Once a text box has been created it can be moved by clicking and dragging or edited by double clicking on the existing text Text can be deleted by right clicking on a text box and selecting the Delete option All text added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Lines To add Lines Select the Edit Lines option from the pop up menu Click on the N Draw Line button on the toolbar Click once on the desired line location in the cross section window and simply drag and click to create a line with several vertices A vertex can be added to an existing line by r
89. on the Transform button This will launch the Map Georeference window as shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NN Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Georeference CAD Georeferr e f A 10 xl aaa gt Georeference Point 1 0 000 m 1 0 000 m 211000000 m a 1000 000 im Distance Between Points 1414 214 rm Map Layer Extent 21 121 637 ml vl es 485 m 21125743 mi 12 159 279 rm X Cancel Transformation is performed using two points on the DXF file with known coordinates The Map Manager does not provide an error trap for invalid transformations Follow the procedure below to import a DXF file and use the coordinate Transformation option To set the georeference point click the Georeference button Click on the first map location where the world coordinates are known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y1 world coordinates of the selected location Georeference point l 1 5351 Ze Y 481 2839 Ap 220 Yp 393 DF Cancel Enter the X1 and Y1 coordinates for this point Click OK Click the Georeference button again Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are Known Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point Click OK The coordinates will be entered into the corresponding Georeference fields on the right hand side of the window Once this is complete click OK to continue and the CAD file
90. out on the map Click this menu item and the map window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is already in full extent mode Zoom to Active Layer Zooms the map window dimensions to the extent of the selected map layer Previous Extent Zooms the map window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms the map window to the next window dimensions Activated only after Previous Extent has been used Custom Extent Allows you to manually set the zoom extents and the center of the Map Window When this menu item is selected the following dialog will appear Change View EJ Window width 2733 mm Map Scale il 17935 Center s 535903 85 m Y 481 3903 23 m UF Cancel 2012 Schlumberger Water Services ES Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Provide the desired viewable width map scale and X Y coordinates of the map that will be repositioned at the center of the map window As the Zoom window width changes the Map Scale changes and vice versa The Zoom window width has equal proportions left and right of center TIP When you save the map project the view extent is saved together with the map project The next time the map project is opened the view extent will be restored Turn on All Layers Makes all layers visible Turn off All Layers Hides all layers View BHLP Allows the you to view the borehole log plot BHLP for any station To vew a BHLP make sure that you ar
91. parts At this point you can specify the color and the label 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 23 Bar Chart Color Settings a de N xj Define Color Settings C Graduated Color Classification Selecta Held that contains the classification pH Min 0 Man 7 96 Humber of Classifications 3 Color Break Value Label fw 2 65333333 0 265333333333333 MA 530666666 2 65333333333333 5 SUBBEEGEEBEEE MN 96 5 B6BBBEBEBBEB 7 96 OF Cancel Upon clicking OK the entire bar chart will be colored with the appropriate color based on where it lies in this criteria 93 Plot Settings Once a plot is selected and visible there are several settings that can be modified These settings are sorted into several groups explained below General Series Settings Some of the most frequently used general plot settings are available when you right mouse click on a plot window that contains a data series and select Edit General Settings The following dialog will appear for line chart 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 204 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help x Line Width i Line Style Solid Bi ebsites al Mevba Wists o w Preview The following settings are available Line Width specify the line width Line Style select the line style Labels Visible show hide the data marker labels Markers Visible show hide the data markers Color
92. previous version you may be prompted to convert your database to the new format A dialog similar to the one shown below will display Confirm For optimal performance one or more system tables need to be upgraded it is strongly recommended that you make a backup of your database before you proceed Would you like to make a backup now Yes Mo Cancel At this time you will have the option to create a back up copy of your database which is highly recommended Click the Yes button to create a back up copy of your database Otherwise click No to continue with the database upgrade without creating a backup Not Recommended Selecting the Cancel button will cancel opening the project In addition it is recommended that you create a backup of the Projects directory before you open projects in the new version of HGA This can be done using the options in My Computer or Windows Explorer NOTE Schlumberger Water Services is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages however caused if project data has not been securely and independently backed up You are strongly encouraged to frequently back up your HGA project folder and the SQL Server database 1 7 Learning to use Hydro GeoAnalyst There are several ways of getting acquainted with HGA including using the Demo Guide included with the HGA Demo Project as well as the In Program and On Line Help 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Introduction
93. project Ifa NEW database was created in Step 1 the projects picklist will be inactive Next to create the project tables and proceed to the next step in the wizard The database settings may be modified AFTER the project has been created using the Template Manager The next step is to define the Project Properties and Location settings 3 3 Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location The Set Project Properties and Location window as shown below contains general project information such as project name folder location and Material Specification 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Creating New Projects 103 Project Wizard A E 10 x Provide Project Location Settings Project Marne x Sample Project Froject Folder JC A Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Sample Projects Ex Project Location E OSOE Maternal Specification di Required Field Projection Typ Projection C Geographic C UTM State Planar Others Cf Local Finish Cancel Help A Eee In the first line enter a project name This may be any combination of numbers and letters but should not contain spaces use _ or to substitute for spaces The project name will be used to define the project folder As the name is entered an identical folder name will be created and will appear in the Project Folder field You may modify the project directory by clicking the folder button a and the following dialog will appear
94. project settings The coordinate type and the coordinate can be adjusted after the project has been created Additionally you can adjust the Material Specification can be adjusted The Database Server and Database name can been seen here but these cannot be adjusted 2 2 1 9 Default Project Settings The default project settings allows you to set the Database Server and Project folder locations to be used when New projects are created 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Default Project Settings Server Mame mqaetnen Wwat sis Refresh Instance Aarne TWE Project Folder D Documentst HGA Projects Test Connection Lancel After entering the Server Name and Instance Name you can use the Test Connection button to ensure that the settings connect to an active SQL Server 2 2 1 10 Exit This menu item will close HGA and all related windows if any are open 2 2 2 Modules Enter topic text here 2 2 2 1 Template Manager The Template Manager provides the tools to modify the HGA database structure and define user level views The Template Manager captures the schema of the database and displays database and view settings The following features are available e Adding and deleting tables fields e Altering the properties of each table and field defining primary keys defining relationships between tables Grouping tables under logical data categories Defining vi
95. results in the database e A given layer may not be allowed to intersect a given station more than twice When this rule is violated HGA will consider the two top most intersection points as defining the layer e All layers in a cross section must be uniquely identified by the layer name HGA may pick the top most layer and ignore all other layers with the same name If a station is removed from a cross section related saved interpretations contacts are removed as long as this station is not involved in any other cross sections e lf a layer is deleted from a cross section all related interpretations contacts are removed from all stations that are involved in the cross section as long as this layer does not appear in another cross section for any of the stations involved in the current cross section e lfa given well appears in more than one cross section interpretation results are updated with interpretations from the cross section that is last updated O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 364 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 13 3D Explorer The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer is an advanced three dimensional visualization and animation component for displaying and presenting cross sections created with the mapping component included with Hydro GeoAnalyst Specifically this can be used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats In addition basemaps may be displayed fo
96. s You must fix the issue s before continue with the import 2 2 Question s Select one of the available actions for each question in order to continue with the import Action Data None Append Click Here to View Data Click Here to Continue Cancel Hep Now can continue with the import Now the Import dialog is updated and can see how O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 65 many records will be imported EDD Import EDD File C Users mgaertner Desktop QuickCheckerDataPackage_01 12 12_10 08 19 zip_hga y Y Result Validation Validation Logs ak E e a Pe Y EDD File Content e EDD File Version Y EDD File Signing Check Sum Y Project Information and Connection Y Sheet parameter_sample 16 new records and O updates validated and ready to be import Y Sheet parameter_result 24 new records and O updates validated and ready to be import PEA 0a EDD Import EDD File C Users mgaertner Desktop QuickCheckerDataPackage_01 12 12_10 08 19 zip_hga Result Validation Validation Logs gt Y EDD File Type Selected Y EDD File Content EDD File Version EDD File Signing Check Sum Project Information and Connection Sheet parameter_sample 16 new records and O updates validated and ready to be import Sheet parameter_result 24 new records and O updates validated and ready to be imp
97. screen on the BHLP you must select a field from the screen that is type string and contains the descriptive information on the screen type material ParentlD use this option to define what casing each screen belongs to You must select a field from the screen table that is field type double and contains values for casing ID in most cases select the Casing ID Lithology O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 233 BHLP Settings E x E Es BHLP Well Construction e Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Litholagy Water level Reduc_A Appearanc Position hi Borde e Show width fi Color Help Apply DF Cancel The Appearance frame allows you to change the position of the lithology images layers within the cell construction column Choose from Right Left Both on each side of the well drilling The Border frame allows you to define the lithology border settings You can set the visibility using the Show checkbox change the width of the border using the Width vertical scroll boxes 0 10 and change the color of the border using the color box Water Level BHLP Settings ry xi Well Constructo E ES BHLP 3 Well Construction I Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc 4 symbols Data Labels Appearance Water level position hor multicasing Inside i Use Marker i
98. selected None All stations that are selected on the current Map Layer will be deselected NOTE Once selected you cannot deselect individual stations Add to Station Group Provides an option to add the selected stations to a Hydro GeoAnalyst station group Using one of the Selection tools mentioned above select one or more stations then choose this menu item from the Select menu and the following dialog will appear Select Station Group X Please select Station Group UF Lancel Help Stations can only be added to an existing station group Delete from Station Group Remove the selected stations from a Hydro GeoAnalyst station group The stations will be removed from the station group map layer currently selected and active in the layer manager 11 2 7 Settings Cross Section This dialog allows modifying the display properties of features that intersect with cross 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 317 section lines when viewing a cross section in the Cross Section Editor Selecting this option launches a dialog similar to that shown in the following figure The dialog makes a list of all line type layers available for selection Intersections With Cross Section Lines z Arvers Sample A e Highway IL Sample w 0 Contour Mas TCE MAS CONC Sample D 0 MW CrossSectionLine2 name Sample m so OF Cancel A cross section line may intersect with one or more cross secti
99. selected and set to be editable m Draw Rectangle button allows a rectangle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is visible and set to be editable Draw Circle button allows a circle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable N Draw Line button allows a line to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a line shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable Draw a Point button allows a point to be inserted in the selected layer This feature is active only when a point shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable A Insert Text button allows for text to be inserted on the selected layer This feature is active only when a text file layer is selected and set to be editable O Information button allows the information for the selected station or any other object such as contour lines to be viewed P ___ Measure button allows the distance between two points on the map to be measured X Delete Selected Object button allows the selected object polygon rectangle circle line point or text to be deleted from the active layer This feature is active only when an object is selected h Add Vertex button allows a vertex to be added to the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature is active only when an applicable object type is select
100. the Station List or Station Data tab or the results of a query The final reports can be printed or saved in a number of formats including PDF HTML RIF XLS TIF or TXT as well as in a binary format 1 2 14 Interface to other SWS Software ESRI GIS SHP files and databases have become two of the main sources of data for groundwater models and HGA makes it easier to incorporate these data formats directly into your model In addition HGA through the use of the Cross Section Editor enables you to create and export layers created from Model interpretations of your geological data in the database 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst 19 You can also link your HGA project with AquaChem and push data from queries to AquiferTest for in depth water quality analysis and pumping test analysis respectively 1 3 Installing Hydro GeoAnalyst Please refer to the Hydro GeoAnalyst Getting Started Guide for details on the system requirements and detailed instructions for installing HGA and SQL Server Express If you have any problems with your particular system configuration please make sure that you followed the installation instructions precisely If the problem is still unresolved contact your hardware experts Finally if you are still having trouble you may consider contacting the SWS Technical Support team sws support slb com 1 4 Uninstalling Hydro GeoAnalyst There may be instances where you wi
101. the available range of values into that number of equal intervals The Ramp option loads the following dialog Color Ramps Start Color End Color EA Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box Click OK to return to the renderer screen Alternatively you may set the color for each value simply click on the Color box under the Color column and the Windows Color palette will display Select the desired color and click OK to continue Repeat this for other values as desired Adjust the Transparency option to make it possible to see layers under the color shading zones The higher the value the more transparent the layer will be The value must be within the range 0 100 The remaining options are similar to those for Graduated Renderers Add Value Delete 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 297 Value Ascend Descent Change Color see Graduated Renderer for more details When you are finished click OK to return to the Contours screen With Isatis Allows you to send point data from the selected point layer to the Isatis software package for performing in depth geostatistical analysis and advanced data i
102. the control that displays all report elements placed on each section of the report Fields Displays hides the control that displays a list of fields available for the report EN Properties Displays hides the properties control for the report E Toolbox Displays hides the toolbar hosting the toolbox icons H Grid Displays hides grid lines on the Designer 5 Script Editor Launches the VBScript editor that may be used to enhance report automation Formatting Tools Normal El Text Style Selects a format style Ara ES Font Selects a font for the selected object 10 E Font Size Sets the font size for the selected object Bold Sets the bold status of the selected text kmj Lf Underline Sets the underline status for the selected text Detailed Font Launches a dialog that allows setting font details Left Align Aligns selected text on the left margin 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 405 Center Align Centers selected text Right Align Aligns selected text on the right margin Bulleted List Formats the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list Outdent Outdents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list uti ul Indent Indents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list ye i Background color Sets the background color of the selected control Ph Text Color Sets the forecolor of the selected text Fid Line Color Sets
103. the cross section the name assigned to the cross section line will be used as the cross section name If surface layers are present in your Map Project you will be prompted to select a surface layer 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor NS Please see Loading Surface Layers for further information The cross section editor opens the selected cross section and displays the stations and related information The cross section shows projections of the borehole lithology columns on the cross section plane By default the topography top of model layer 1 will be drawn in for you The starting point of the cross section line will appear on the left side of the cross section window the end point of the line will appear on the right side of the window Locations for layers must be interpreted and drawn manually using lines or polygons layer types may be Geologic Hydrogeologic or Model The process of drawing layers is described in the next section NOTE Each cross section has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 4 Template Manager Profile Settings Drawing Cross Section Interpretations Interpretation of the cross section is a considerably creative process however the cross section editor makes it easy for you Once the selected stations have been loaded into the cross section editor the appropriate layers must b
104. the data fails to meet the conditions then the cell will be highlighted red as well as the tab 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 39 Bora Merr ie In this example you can see that the only errors are found on the Parameter Sample worksheet When you view this worksheet you will find the cells where there are errors have been highlighted red TH i umar 1 mE bi ba j P kai j Bee rE i al k i i i a i This is because of the condition set in the EDD Template the Sample Date field was set to be required As you enter appropriate data into these fields the Quick Checker will automatically validate the data and remove the red highlighting if the data is appropriate 2012 Schlumberger Water Services ao Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 1 indies Maree hergin ib hands Late jemari ETL 4 A patria EFE a Fora ia ee i en Es ll qe ae j m i Once you have corrected all the data you can select the Validate and Submit button again If the Quick Checker does not find any problems with your data it will automatically open an email in Outlook with the email address specified in the EDD template and attach a zip_hga file which contains your excel spreadsheet and the validation information This file can then be imported with the EDD import routine described in a later section 2 2 Hydro GeoAnalyst Menu Bar The HGA menu items
105. the selected field using one of two methods By Value or By Condition Each method is described below Filter By Value When this filter option is selected you can manually specify which field values to show hide by selecting unselecting the desired value checkboxes The following buttons are available of Ww Select all field values oO Unselect all field values CUA Invert selected field values Filter by Condition When this filter option is selected the Filter by Condition frame will become active Here you can access the Expression Editor by clicking on the El button Within the Expression Editor define a filter condition For example this method would be useful for a Date field when you would like to only show the dates that fall within a particular time period e g between Jan 1 and June 1 Once the filter settings have been defined click Ok to apply them to your crosstab report 7 2 2 Data Marker Settings Use the 2 button to load the Data Markers Editor where you can highlight data in the crosstab report O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Crosstab Queries 175 Data Markers Editor i Ed Edit Marker Fact Field HCOS r Data Field Minimum Maximum Maximum 240 Minimum J22 Cell Style BackColor MA Red Content ligament MiddleCenter Font Arial 10pt ForeColor MN Black Gradient Hone GradientBackColor BY Black ProgressBarColor B Blue BackColor Determines the cell test backgr
106. this button launches a separate dialog similar to the one given below Set Foreign Key In the above dialog a matching field must be provided for each field in the primary key of the current table The selected matching fields will form a foreign key in the child table When entering data into child tables Hydro GeoAnalyst limits the values for the fields in the foreign key to only those that are present in the primary key of the parent table This is done by using the distinct list of values in the primary key as a pick list 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 119 All parent tables to the current table if any are listed along with the primary and corresponding foreign keys in the read only grid Table is CHILD to located towards the bottom of the main window An example is shown below Template Manager Demo Project 2 IOl xj Environmental metric ig FR Database structure Database Settings Description a m Geologic Description ategory name Y Well Construction Description Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event e Parameter Sample W Parameter Result a Screen_ID w date tine D H x ooo a a lt 1 lt 1 Table relationship Table i parent to Sri Primar Key Table Foreign key gt e Dry Indicator Comment W Meteorology W Divers W Diver Channels e Diver Data MiningExploration Geophysics Well History User Category station ecreen_id station screen id
107. to Vertical Datum the Water Level table will not be available for mapping in Step 2 See on line help for further information Select data source MON Files MON File Information Step 1 Select Data Type and Data Source Select Data Type a Lol xi Notes Select one or more MON files for importing into the project database This utility supports the import of MON files created by LoggerD ataM anager Diver Pocket Diver Office Diver VisiINE and e SENSE Diver data applications e g Diver Office allow you reference the water level data in various ways i e with respect to the top of casing with respect to a vertical datum or with respect to the Diver itself The first step is to specify how the water level data is referenced in the MON file Note If you wish to show water level data on cross sections and borehole log plots the water level data must be reference to the top of casing or ground surface and the data must be imported into the Water Level table Select Data Source Next specify the MON data source Click the Open Folder button E Locate and select a MON file s and click Open O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 55 Look ri E Desktop O 5 i gt HF Fe My Computer biy Recent My Network Places SM CTD_o70503132027_61667 Deskto p My Documents sr My Computer My Documents bly al File name z Places Files of type
108. want to filter out repetitive or unnecessary data or values where this is no significant change Active Use this option to enable disable the filter Value Set the filter value Any consecutive plotted data points with a value less than this specified filter value will be hidden from the plots when the filter is active Title Enter a Title for the plot Legend The following Legend settings are available Visible Show hide the legend Alignment Set the Legend position choose from the following options Top Bottom Left Right Style Controls what data elements or series appear in the Legend choose from the following options Automatic Series Names 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 206 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Series Values Last Values Palette Vertical space Controls the amount of vertical space between each data element in the legend higher values will result in more space between each item in the legend Inverted Legend Use this property to reverse the order of items in the legend For example items in the order A B C will be inverted to the order C B A when this property is selected Check boxes visible Use this property to display a check box beside each item in the legend when active you can then use the Legend check boxes to show hide which data series are visible on the plot Font series color visible Controls the font color for the text in the legend Vertical Y Axis Pen width Contro
109. will appear in a new window After specifying the required settings in each step click the Next gt button in the bottom corner to proceed The Next gt button is activated only after the required information has been defined in the current window The following few sections present a detailed description of each window of the DTS 5 1 Importing Data using the DTS The DTS allows importing data from various sources into any HGA database table The DTS allows importing data only for selected fields in the selected destination table however some tables have required fields such as ID from to etc which must be mapped in order for each record to be imported To load the DTS for importing data F Project Import Data from the main menu The first window of the DTS will be displayed as shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 128 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 9 1 1 Data Transfer System Import E E Of xj 0 Choose a Data Source Specii 4 data transter packag Package name Description e Save changes to this DTS package x Select data sourc f Specify import file name Build a connection string Hents Cancel IE The figure shown above depicts the interface that is provided to specify the data source for importing Step 1 Choose Data The first step in the DTS Import process is to select a data package and the data source file A Data Transfer
110. y1 x2 y2 Specify the coordinates in pixels of the start and end of the line 14 2 2 6 Shape Shape Specify which shape you wish to display rectangle ellipse or rounded rectangle 14 2 2 7 Rich Text MaxLength Specifies the maximum number of characters a user can enter in the control The default for MaxLength is O indicating that the text is limited only by available system resources Any number greater than 0 indicates the maximum number of characters 14 2 2 8 Frame Close Border Specify whether or not the bottom border line will be displayed if the frame spans across multiple pages 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor a 14 2 2 9 Sub Report ReportName Sets gets name for the sub report 14 2 2 10 Page Break Enabled Allows you to enable or disable the page break 14 2 2 11 OLE PictureAlignment Set the alignment of the contents within the frame 14 2 2 12 Barcode BarWidth Set the width of the thinnest line in the code Caption In barcode the caption is the set of symbols alphanumeric you want to code Direction Set the direction in which the code will be written EnableCheckSum Set whether the checksum is used when the code is rendered 14 2 2 13 Active Re port DocumentName The document name appears in the print spooler and can be used to easily identify the report MaxPages Sets or returns the maximum number of pages ActiveReports will process Once the number of
111. 0 47 uo TRE ee i AAA EH a TETERA MANERA AAA AAA ee ee ed a Conditions Advanced Grouping Options NOTE The Query Builder window is context sensitive The window will contain different settings depending on the selected Query type The Query Builder window contains the following items Display Fields Select the display fields for the query Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to most of the functions in the Query Builder Query Type Choose from a Station Group Query or a Data Query Query List Select an existing query from the list Available Fields Select fields for the query from the tables in the database Conditions Displays the Query conditions Source Conditions Select the source options for the query Advanced Grouping Options Specify grouping and sorting options NOTE These options are available for Data Queries only Description of Toolbar Items The toolbar provides access to most functions of the Query Builder Toolbar buttons are context sensitive if there are no options available the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance New button creates a new query x Delete button deletes the selected query lind Save Query button saves the query 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 146 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 6 2 6 3 H Save As button saves the query under a new name p g Execute SQL Statement button executes the selected query string Generate SQ
112. 2000 BTEX 33000 ug l mm Wal data 26 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 12 10 2000 TCE 2200 ug l Crosstab 27 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 05 15 2000 BTEX 5000 ug l Maps 28 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 05 15 2000 TCE 1343505859 ug l Cross Sections 29 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 05 21 2000 BTEX 12000 ug l h E Reports 30 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 05 21 2000 TCE 800 ug l a 2DView 31 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 06 25 2000 BTEX 18000 ug l HA 32 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 06 25 2000 TCE 1200 ug l Pp Pornos Logs 33 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 08 29 2000 BTEX 25000 ug l Plots 34 52 535592 63 4814501 79 GB 29 08 29 2000 TCE 662597656 ug l 35 53 535504 780 4814554 39 GB 30 10 02 2000 BTEX 38000 ug l 36 53 535504 780 4814554 39 GB 30 10 02 2000 TCE 2875 ug l 4 gt 37 53 535504 780 4814554 39 GB 30 12 10 2000 BTEX 40000 ug l iE ESSE 38 53 535504 780 4814554 39 GB 30 12 10 2000 TCE 3200 ug l 39 53 535504 780 4814554 39 GB 30 05 15 2000 BTEX 6000 ug l Load All 40 53 535504 780 4814554 39 GB 30 05 15 2000 TCE 400 ug l 41 53 535504 780 4814554 39 GB 30 05 21 2000 BTEX 14000 ug l enana 42 53 535504 780 4814554 39 GB 30 05 21 2000 TCE 1312989281 ug l 43 53 535504 780 4814554 39 GB 30 06 25 2000 BTEX 25000 ug l i 000 IE zi Rows 58 Time 0 0 0 218 x aquifertest _pumpingrates I In the Data Query window the following options are available To execute an existing query Select the desired query from the Queries nod
113. 22007 FAW SVL 232042007 be 36 22401 2007 3h 3b_ 42042007 404 40121204 2007 404 401 1804 2007 At 414118012007 dp 41 41_242042007 46 1 C4641_ 139012001 46 11 46 1_ 20042001 H of records 94 Step 3 Data Validation In the last step you will see a preview of the data to be imported into the sample table as well as into the results table By selecting Finish the data will be imported Any errors or warning will also be displayed Import Chemical Data Wizard A i 10 x D E Data Validation Errors arnings Preview parameter result parameter sample Station sample_id sample_date al 291 18 04 2001 4182001 12 00 00 AM E 29424201 2001 1 24 2001 12 00 00 AM 39 1_07 2022001 27172001 12 00 00 AM 42232001 12 00 00 4M 1422 2007 12 00 00 4M S61 24 04 2001 4724 2007 12 00 00 4M 4042172012001 171772001 12 00 00 At 401 1820422001 4 78 2007 12 00 00 AM 41 41 11 180142001 11182001 12 00 00 AM 41 11 24 04 2001 4 24 2001 12 00 00 AM are ATA lt lt Back Finish Cancel Help O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 63 Import Chemical Data Wizard D HAY Data Validation Errors arnings Preview parameter result parameter _sample chemical name resulto value result unit qualifier 29 1 18 04 2001 Al ALK mg L CaCO3 au oa a Lea 294_18 04 2001 Ba a ewa lee 29421804200 2941 18 04 2001 Cd H of records
114. 3 Data to be Contoure Choose Field Interpolator Settings Interpolation Method Natural Neighbours Advanced Settings Min Value Data Min 321 09 Max Value Data bMax 340 49 Contour Type e Contour Line Name Settings Color Shade Hame Settings Zebra Hame Settings F Use Only Selected Stations Restrain within Domain Choose Domain Create Cancel EJ Help ZE EEE OO O UK The gridded data can be represented as the following Contour Types e Contour lines e Color shaded map e Zebra Select the desired Contour type and enter a name for the layer For each type there are additional settings that can be accessed by clicking on the Settings button See the sections below for more details on these settings Data to be contoured Select a Field that contains the data you want to contour Define the Min and Max values or accept the defaults Interpolation Settings Under Interpolator Settings select the interpolation method choose from Natural Neighbor Inverse Distance or Kriging To use the advanced interpolation settings click the Advanced Settings button and advanced options will be displayed as shown below for Natural Neighbor 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 294 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help interpolator Options o Settings ales l Po Stat 20 5713902570462 End 20 54004651 40056 Nodes AD Start 4346741103231 48 0
115. 3 5 1 Settings Moisture Content Top elevation Bottom elevation The Interval based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Interval node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Settings x Help Intera al Visible Sahm a Border Line Wisibilit Outline W Grid Pattern Symbol Descriptia Font L Use numeric format iy Visible IV Visible Format General E Number of digits width 40 de T Image Draw Mode Tiled Apply DOF Cancel The Interval frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button The Border Line Visibility frame allows you to show hide the column Outline and the Grid by clicking on the appropriate check box The Pattern Symbol frame allows you to show hide the pattern modify the Width and 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 24 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help change the Image Draw Mode The Description frame allows you to show hide the description and modify the Text Font If you choose to display numeric data select the Use numeric format check box 10 3 6 Depth Column The Depth Point based column is designed t
116. 4246 7 48139149 4013436 9 4914600 4 491408 3 4914507 5 one already existing in the database the DTS will present the following interface A A ADEF LORO BH11 BU 56553 43 4720 OF Cancel H Help If the DTS finds one or more stations in destination with same name as in source they will be displayed and managed in this table All Stations in the Source table with conflicting names in destination will be listed in the left grid sorted alphabetically by station names The right grid displays all stations in the Destination in your project database whose names are the same as the station selected on the left Stations will be sorted by ID in ascending order In the right side of the table you can select only one station to match to the station selected on the left side The left grid will contains the column Operations that will display combo boxes for each row The combo boxes contain three options Append Import the station as a new station in the destination table Update Map the correct station ID in the destination table to a Station name in the source table Reject Reject the station The DTS will not import rejected stations By default the operation will be set to Append i e duplicate stations will be imported as new stations If Update is selected for a station on the left grid the right grid will display the first potentially duplicate station Using the right grid you may select the appropriate de
117. 4840015977549 GB15 43 4034671503069 GB16 43 4707 26230141 GE17 45 466065023726 GE15 43 47 70928697195 GB19 45 4026569874623 GB20 43 47 70928697195 GB21 l0 xi SELECT t0 id A5 td Ds as s 10 as y O name as name tO toc as toc FROM Station as tO RIGHT JOIN PStation ON 10 10 Pstation SID WHERE tOtoc gt 320 AND PStation ID 1 Close H Help Rows Go Time 0 0 0 70 Advanced Press Close to return to the main HGA window Click Yes when a prompt to save the query appears The new data query will now appear as a new node under the Queries node in the Project Browser If additional Conditions are required for a more advanced query follow the steps below Create a new Query Under Conditions press the Add button Using the same procedure described above select a field from the tree and drag and drop this into the new Expression field Select an Operator and Expression value for the Condition Repeat this step until all Conditions have been specified The Conditions must now be linked with an additional operator On the right side of the window the Operator column can be expanded and one of the following options may be selected AND OR If it is necessary to enclose one or more conditions double click in the outer fields surrounding the query condition and parentheses will be added to the query condition An example is shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Queries 151
118. 4875 s Back Enn Cancel Help After the records are successfully imported you will receive a message indicating how many records were imported Information i xj 1 4875 out of 4875 records were successfully imported updated Import EDD To launch the EDD Import routine select Modules Import EDD Then specify the location of the zip_hga file that was generated within the HGA Quick Checker Please be aware that you should not attempt to unzip or modify the file in any way as this can invalidate the file and cause difficulties importing the data 2012 Schlumberger Water Services MOS Hydro GeoAnalyst Help I EDO Fe r ar Few Vibio I ED Fie Dype Selecta Oy fT pte Deiene af ELA e AE E ECHI E de er gone a i Fu e Seer J Chek ET i af Prot rra est TA i Min Da A A or Loca Hat Y a ne oe See As soon as the file is validated you will see the Validation Results dialog appear Here you may need to answer a question before continuing For example the Validation found that some of the station names am trying to import do not exist in the database therefore can choose to append the new station names or reject records for stations that do not exist make my choice by selecting the appropriate option in the Action column If wish to see which stations are not currently in the database can select the Click Here to View Data option For this example choose t
119. 5 Po 46 087630755 256520896 GB 23 05 15 2000 ETE 0 ug 223 47 1415 209 32 E 46 087630135 256520896 GB 23 05421 2000 BTE 0 ug 123 47 1415 309 32 E 46 087630135 256520896 GB 43 0642522000 BTE 0 ug J23 47 14 15 309 32 Po 46 087630755 256520896 GB 23 0542322000 BTE 0 gr 223 47 1415 309 32 B 46 087630135 256520896 GB 43 10702 2000 BTE 0 ug 223 47 1415 309 32 E 46 087630139 256540896 GB 23 12710 2000 BTE 0 ug 223 47 1415 309 32 E 4r 502432775 192505109 GB 24 05 15 2000 BTEX 0 ugl 325 26 30 235 26 m 4r 902432775 1192585169 GB 24 05 21 2000 BTEX 0 ug 325 26 30 230 26 E 4r 002432775 1192685169 GB 24 062522000 BTEX O ug 325 26 30 230 26 E 47002432775 0192505109 GB 24 06 29 2000 ETE 0 ug 325 26 30 235 26 E 47002432775 192505109 GB 24 10 02 2000 BTE 0 ug 325 26 30 230 26 471002432775 0192505109 GB 24 12417022000 BTE 0 ug 325 26 30 235 26 The last column displays the calculated sample elevations Z This value should be mapped O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst to Zin the 3D Interpolation to generate your plume NOTE It is recommended that the X Y and Z fields all be displayed with the same length units Interpolation Method Available interpolation methods include e Krigging default and e Inverse distance Advanced Settings Press this button to see advanced settings for the selected interpolation method For more details see Appendix C Advanced Interpolation
120. 74141995 E 09 01 1395 9 1 1995 E 1101 1995 11 1 1995 x 01 01 1396 1 1 1996 i Dn Md ld N Ie IS oF 4 In this dialog you may define the color scheme by selecting the Graduated Color radio button or the Classification radio button These options are most useful when displaying the charts on a map in order to see both the trends in the data over time at a single sample location and the spatial distribution trends of all sample locations Graduated Color This option allows for coloring bars from the same sample date the same color on all bar charts For example if your plot data contains sample data from three seasonal sampling rounds spring summer fall you will see 3 instances in the grid at the bottom A different color can be assigned to each sample date Upon clicking OK each bar in the bar chart will be colored with the specified color and all bar charts in the series will share the same color where the sample date exists Classification This option allows for coloring the entire bar chart a certain color based on where it lies within a specified criteria For this you must provide a query that contains a field that will be used for the criteria identification When you select this option you must map to this field and you will then see the min and max available for this field as shown below You can then define the number of classifications default is 3 and the data range will be separated into equal number of
121. A in several ways Select Tools gt Query Builder from the main menu In the toolbar click on the sl Query Builder OR In the Query branch of the Project Tree right click on an existing query and select New or Edit The Query Builder window is shown below This display shows the options for a Data Query O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Queries 145 Display Fields Toolbar EA zioz Query P Station Group Query Data Query 3 SQL View Preview Selecta Query Q u ery D DC E xceeds_ 320m v rere See choke AI z i E ee station id List E Chemistry Sample EEE RE E station name name sys_sample_code gt station toc gt TOC gt qa Name Es 3 j 76 sample _date Available Broken pe Fields 2 dh e V Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system E AA ena Conditions 3 Conditions A Espressi Operator Expression Operator aries ES Feel station to gt 320 fraction code K chem_test_results0 resulk gt gt 1000 Interpreted_qualifiers start_depth mid_depth ab X end_depth fhe RRB ron result_comment i Having sample_matrix_code e j Function Operator Value Operator e A eS ol dl ee He ii j Project y RR A E me Source Field Mame chem_tesk_resultsO result_value ype DOUBLE Rows 14 Time 0 0
122. Bottom ntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataF eld to hi Using the combo boxes select the table and the fields from which to draw data In the example shown above the Scale column will display a depth scale that goes from the smallest from depth to the largest to depth in the Lithology table The Scale column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Scale node from the BHLP Settings window O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 221 Scale e Visible Column Options Wisibilit Tic Marks e Visible Major Tic Mark Interval fi 0 Display Unit m Color Label Pasition Left na L Minor Tic Mark Font Interval E Color J Background El Help Apply OF Cancel The Scale frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox To access the Column Options dialog click the Options button The Visibility frame allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox modify the Display Unit and change the Label Position Change the font style and background color using the Font color box and Background color box respectively The Tic Marks frame allows you to set the Interval and Color of the column gradation
123. CE DD EE FF GG Select Surface W Select All J relief 1 21 Select Plume W Select All J 3dplume ae C O OO IO e Include site map 20 name HGAaD OF Cancel Help 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 338 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select the Cross sections to display from the dialog by placing a check mark beside each cross section name Or to select all cross sections place a check mark beside the Select All check box at the top of the dialog Select any Surfaces you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the same manner Gridded surfaces can be created in the Map Manager see Chapter 11 Create Gridded Data for more details Select any Plumes you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the same manner Plumes can be created in the HGA main window see Chapter 2 3D Interpolation for more details When you are finished select OK This will load the 3D Explorer wndow For more details on how to use 3D Explorer please refer to Chapter 13 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Information Provides a window containing information on the selected station After selecting this option you may place the mouse cursor on a particular lithologic column within a selected station A small text box appears displaying specific information about the layer layer type top and bottom elevations and thickness If the station in question has screens the Information feature can also highlight the
124. DB provider for MS SQL Server as specified in the Provider tab Use the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box to specify where your data is located and how to connect to it using an OLE DB provider The connection information can be represented using a common string format Note that the fields displayed on this tab depend upon the OLE DB Provider selected For example if you select the OLE DB Provider for Oracle the Connection tab displays fields for the server name and login If you select the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server then the server name type of authentication and database must be entered In the Connection tab there will be options to specify the server and database settings 1 Select or enter a server name Choose a server from the Server list at the top of the dialog The list will display all computers on the LAN that have MS SQL Server 2005 Express support Ifthe current machine is not networked then the list will display the name for the current computer provided the WHI SQL Express instance is installed 2 Enter information to log on to the server Ifthe selected server requires security validation 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 100 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help enter the windows login information user name and password 3 Select the database on the server If it is preferred to create a new database then leave this field blank 4 Press the Test Connection button in the lower corner of thi
125. Data Filter tab allows you to browse through the database tables to see the results of all stations in a particular table You can select to browse the entire project database or a particular Station Group Then select the table you are interested in Select the excute button and you will see all the results 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst yee Gcodnalat Bete ems Pre a Project gA Medules EjDatabase E Help amma ESETET dad ha 7 Project Tree Satian List Station Data Data Query Data Filter Well Profile s S T D A WB Cope Expand TEEF danh HARE Strian Group Dinhas Tables Protect T Montomg Evert Parsmeter_Fesul z Salen s mple_nl recall nara iali vob s icpaling_delechon_ him arp piii Inici eiia Saiyan miha fiddlers pes E MERO o TaN Esrzrre 1 2004 31 Ca EPS S387 Arma ATL o 125 16 06 i EI CI A a i ewe 2862 Tine 0 01 18 2 1 11 Well Profile Tab The Well Profile tab allows you to view a Borehole Log Plot template for the selected station 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NN Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Project gp Modules E Database E Help AE E ad AZ Praject Tree Satan List Statins Gata Data Query Data Filter Well Profile fed Lofapse Expand v Ton Groups Al Stalin Borsholes Bomesbholes_wlli_pirl_da a Lab OC Sabons Madir ie OC Mondenng Wells aA Ear
126. Demo Project A new feature implemented in HGA 2012 1 is the ability to install the Demo Project directly from the program Simply launch HGA and select Project Install Demo Project HGA Demo Project Installation Available Servers MGAERTNERZ WAT SWS Demo Database Name SWS Project Location D Documents Demo Project You need to select the SQL Server you wish to use from the list of Available Servers or type your SQL Server By default it will give the Demo Database Name SWS however you can change this if you wish Then select the location for the project files Lastly select the Install button Please Note this process may take from 2 5 minutes depending on your computer network speed If you encounter difficulties installing the Demo Project as described above you can follow these steps to manually download and install the Demo Project 1 Open your internet browser and navigate to the following website http trials swstechnology com archive Software Hydro_GeoAnalyst Demo_Project HGA_Demo_Project ZIP 2 Select Save in the File Download dialog and in the Save As dialog select a destination folder on your computer and then click the Save button 3 The demo project will begin to download to your computer Depending on your internet connection speed this may take several minutes Once the HGA Demo Project zip file has been downloaded to your computer extract the contents of the HGA_Demo Project 2012 Sc
127. Entity Caption Top elevation Description DataField from E Bottom ntity Caption Bottom elevation Description D ataField ho hi E DiameterE ntity Caption Diameter Descripton Diameter D ataField diameter hi E ImageE ntity Caption Image Description Image DataField img hi E TestEntity Caption Text Description Text DataField material l Define color for the casing cap and mount NOTE In order to see the well casing and screens in the appropriate locations you must add and map the appropriate entities as explained below In the BHLP settings right mouse click and select Add Entity You may add and map any of the following entities Image use this option if you want to display an image of the well casing on the BHLP you must select a field from the casing table that contains an image Text use this option if you want to display a descriptive label of the casing on the BHLP you must select a field from the casing table that is a string and contains the descriptive information on the casing type material IDEntity select the field that contains the Casing ID 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 232 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help ParentlD use this option if you want to display well casings nested within another casing or on their own You must select a field from the casing table that is field type double and contains values for the parent casing ID SortBy use this option if you want well casings to be ord
128. Groups node NOTE Station Group Queries do not have options for modifying the display fields or advanced grouping options Data Query Example Follow the steps below to create a data query If the Query Builder is not yet loaded select the Query Builder option from the Tools menu Select Data Query as the type in the upper left corner of the window In the toolbar click on the New button and the following window will appear O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Queries 147 New Query a xj Name Description OF Cancel Help Enter a Name for the new query e g TOC Exceeds 320m for this example and a Description optional Click OK NOTE Query names should contain alphanumeric characters only Do not use characters such as lt gt etc In the lower left corner of the Query Builder window select the Source Conditions The options are Station Group Project and Database If Station Group is selected then a second combo box will become active From here select the appropriate station group to query If Project is selected then all stations in the current project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database Expand the tree on the left side of the window Locate the desired data category table and field For this example select the Description category then the Location table and locate the TOC field An example is shown below Q
129. HLPs can be opened from the Borehole Logs node in the Project Browser by either double clicking on the desired borehole log plot in the available list or by right clicking and selecting the Open pop up menu option To create a new BHLP template right click on the Borehole Logs node on the Project Browser and select the New pop up menu option NOTE A station group containing at least one borehole needs to be selected in order to launch the BHLP from the HGA main interface The BHLP can also be launched from the Map Manager and Cross Section editors by Clicking on the E View BHLP button in the toolbar or View gt BHLP from the menu and clicking on a station to select it You may also view a BHLP in the HGA main window by selecting View gt Well Profile from the menu and clicking on the desired station in the station list The BHLP will load and display a borehole log plot of the selected station using one of the available BHLP templates A typical BHLP window is shown in the following figure Please note that a BHLP opened through the Map Manager Cross Section editor will not have as many options 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 215 Viewer Available Stations Window Loretole Log Designer NesbDHLF E a 10 xx Select Slaton Xj Yi ae Elevason PJ TOC paf 0 07 50615609 dE 0 7 00 327 Designer gt E Lo ENE ee 5 E Well Conttouch n Tree Designer UERN Toolbar i o Se
130. If desired selected stations can be removed from a static station group or the Station Group can be deleted as a whole To remove stations from a static station group simply select the stations by highlighting the row and then select the delete button this will remove the station from the station group but will not delete the station from the database To delete a station from the database you must first select the All Stations station group and delete the stations from here To delete an entire station group right click on the station group in the Project tree and select delete 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 28 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 2 1 4 Data Categories The tables in an HGA database can be organized into a logical grouping by linking them to any one of the provided data categories HGA provides nine data categories eight of which reflect the most common data categories found for envronmental data A ninth category User Defined Category can be renamed as appropriate and used accordingly The Station Data categories can be accessed from two locations From the Project Tree expand the Station Data branch OR From the main window select the Station Data tab and expand the Data Category combo box ensure that one or more stations are selected in the Station List tab Each of these options is SE in the figure below La Hydra Gen nalyst Beta Demo Project ei Lal en sol
131. If the mouse is clicked on this vertex the vertex will snap to the existing vertex 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 357 The line vertex will change to an orange color to indicate the vertex is linked shared between the two model layer lines You can link to as many vertices as desired by repeating the above step However if snapping to a series of consecutive vertices is desired you may click on the first and the last desired vertices The cross section editor will create the necessary number of vertices on the model layer line being drawn and link them to their respective vertices For instance if there are five vertices on the existing model line layer between the selected first and last vertices six vertices will be created on the current model layer line Linked vertices will move together and can be separated if needed The following figure depicts an example of a model layer pinching out around the middle of the cross section Map Project demo project map En E File Edit View Tools 210 asar NIK AK Sf fA a l 1 mi E Se 5 var gt 08 360 350 Topography AU Overburden 4 quit Aquitard ERS Main Aquifer 340 330 Geology Clay LS Sand Gravel ms Bedrock Ee HydroGeology adsfsadf 23 320 310 Snapping between two vertices 300 Elevation m Snapping to end of cr
132. Intervals Controls the space between the major graticule lines You can accept the system calculated Auto values or enter Manual values Mark Text Controls the axis labels For each axis you can set the visible status rotate the label and 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 32 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 11 2 8 Help control the gap between the label and the axis itself Code Page Use these settings to convert accented characters into a shapefile format that can be recognized by the Map Manager The following options are available Choose Code Page i x Please choose the 150 code page for the shape files ANSI Central Europe Latin 2 LE Cancel From the combo box select the Code Page that should be used for the shapefiles in your map project The Map Manager provides several ISO standards For a complete list of which standard you should select based on your language and regional settings please see Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes Click OK when you are finished NOTE This option is available for new shapes files only existing shapefiles cannot be converted Contains the contents of the Map Manager help 11 3 Defining a Cross Section Line Use the Map Manager to define the locations of cross section lines which can then be interpreted in the Cross Section editor There are two methods for defining cross section lines Digitizing and Use Existing Polyline Additionally you can modify the buffe
133. L Statement button generates the SQL statement and tests the query Query Types Data Queries Data Queries can provide a more detailed look at the data and can be used for quantifying and qualifying any field in the database In addition many of the visualization and data analysis components require data sources as data inputs Using the Query Builder you can generate Data Queries that provide the data sources for Map Layers Cross section interpretation results Quality Control Analysis BHLP columns in Borehole Log Plots Crosstab reports 3D plume projects Time Series Plots Customized Reports To create a Data Query select the Data Query radio button from the upper left section of the Query Builder window Then define the necessary conditions generate the SQL statement and execute the query Once the query has been created and saved the query will appear as a new node in the project browser under the Queries node Station Group Queries Station Group Queries provide the foundations for new Station Groups these queries can be built and executed for the purpose of organizing the stations into specialized groups To create a Station Group Query select this option from the upper left section of the Query Builder window Then define the necessary conditions generate the SQL statement and execute the query Once the query has been created and saved the query will appear as a new node in the project browser under the Station
134. Layout Style sheet Source fields dimension fields name date_ Caption Concentration id Format eer ShowPercent False t ShowProgress False y TotalLabel l l Width 100 E Data Aggregate Sum DisplapEsprezsion Expression Concentration Field T ype Both Y dimension fields Facts fields sort rder Ascending chemical_name date_ Aggregate Determines the object which creates an aggregate function Each property is described below e Caption Change the caption of a field item e Format Assign a field data output format string For example you can use this property to specify the number of decimal places to show e g Type 0 00 to show values to two decimal places e ShowPercent Show field data as percent e ShowProgress Represent field data as a progress bar for each cell In order to set this property the ShowPercent property must be enabled e Total Label Assign a header for a field total e Width Change the cell width of the field e Aggregate Assign a data aggregation type for a field This property only applies to the Fact fields The following aggregation types are available Sum Count Min Max Avg Standard Deviation Estimate of Standard Deviation Variance Estimate of Variance 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Crosstab Queries 169 Median Skewness Kurtosis e DisplayExpression Use the Expression Editor shown below to create an expression property for a field header e Expression Us
135. Log Plot Once the desired BHLP design is obtained there are several saving and exporting options available The BHLP template can be saved to be recalled later on The BHLP image itself may be exported to a Report or an external file The BHLP image may be printed Saving a borehole log plot design template 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 256 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help To save a BHLP template Click on the le Save button on the BHLP designer toolbar To save a copy of a BHLP template with a new name Click on the H Save As button on the BHLP designer toolbar Exporting a borehole log plot design template It is possible to export the design and data composing a borehole log plot This is helpful if the user wants to create an XML file from the database To do so click on the Export button at the bottom of the designer window and select from one of the export options as shown below Close IE Print Export current borehole Export all boreholes You can either Export the Current Borehole or Export all boreholes in your project using the current BHLP template The exported file will be saved in XML format 10 6 Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting A BHLP report may be generated from within the BHLP designer and either printed or saved to an external file With the Borehole Log Designer window open click on the Print button at the bottom of thee window and select from one of the print o
136. NO factor Detection Limit Uncertamnty Standards Multioher Bar Color Schema Query select the data source for the plot from the combo box currently the data must come from data queries Plot Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping plots Series Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping series at least one field must be selected for grouping the plot series Time Axis specify a field to be used for the Time X axis This should be the date field from your query Value Axis specify a field to be used for the Value Y axis This will be observed result value for the parameter s of interest Units loads the following dialog allowing you to make unit conversions SS Unit category Units sec hi Unit conversion C None Constant Conversion Factor Factor Label C From field YarConversionF actor 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 20 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select the unit category then the units from this category If the units categories are not compatible for instance Time and Length then the buttons are disabled You may also select a field to be used for the unit conversion or create constant conversion factor in this case enter the factor and an appropriate field The units conversion component implements full SI units including temperature electric current and luminous intensity Label select a field to be used for the symbol label The next two fields are use
137. Non detect ND factor Method detection limit MDL Uncertainly factor 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 198 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 9 2 1 Add Plot To add a new plot to the design click the Add button in the toolbar or right click on the Plot Page Design node in the tree view and select the Add plot menu option The following Add plot dialog will appear Plot Details i xj Hame Plot Type Time Series ba Template None he Set as Default Template Ok Cancel In the Name field enter the name of the plot The Type combo box contains the supported plot type currently only Time Series scatter plots are supported In the Template combo box select the desired plot template that should be applied to the new plot The plot template contains numerous pre defined settings for axis data series style settings etc If you want to re use the same template again in the future select the Set as the default template check box For details on creating plot templates see Managing Templates Click OK when you are finished to display the new plot in the viewer window The next step is to map the fields 9 2 2 Field Mappings Under the Data Source tab you can define the field mappings for the plot as shown in the screenshot below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 199 Settings Data Source Query Plot Grouping Senes Grouping Time Value Units Label
138. OC m GB 01 53621269 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 Bf Design Af Lithology ES LithologyE ntities Add Group ula Add Golumn Add Plot Series Medium Sand AA A Caption Gravel Fine Sand e Live update Apply A Na F Close Export Y Print Y Help The Add a Plot Series window will open as shown in the following screenshot O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 253 Add a Plot Series l x Plot Seres Typ f Depth CO Interval Description Category Time Unit Mass Length Fumping Rate Conductivity Concentration Recharge Equivalent Concentration Choose the Plot Series Type enter Plot Properties as required then click OK to create the plot column Next the Plot Entities must be defined Click on the Plot Entities sub node to expand the Entities options as shown in the following figure 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 254 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Borehole Log Designer Sample E E IEJ Cours no Crawl Bisin seared rar Vins iarl For a Depth Plot you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select the format you wish to use then select the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the DepthEntity select the field containing depth values from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the
139. Package DTP is designed to store all settings of desired import export operations that may be repeated from time to time For example importing lab analysis results to the database which follow a consistent format The DTP contains information about the data source the selected destination table matching between source and destination tables and fields and a number of other settings All Data Transfer Packages if any are listed for selection at the beginning of all data transfer operations If an existing package is selected the DTS loads all information stored in the package The information can then be revewed and updated as desired before as you move through the data transfer operation Data Transfer System Import y RA ioj xj Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specity a data transter package Fackage name New Package Description stations lithology well construction peat A Water Level f Specify import file name Pa aS Be a Se ES Ta op BSL Se es Ss a ee a SS SSS Bae Besa g 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 129 At the beginning of the import export operation you can select the option which saves the changes you made to the package in each step of the procedure Specify a data transter package Package name Description W Save changes to this DTS package A new data transfer package can also be created in which case all information provided to the DTS during a s
140. Query Builder ie ioj xj 1xXxHhA2 A f Station Group Query e Data Query Design SOL View Preview Display Field Function Expression lls Orr by T station id id station x station y y station name 7 name lithology soil type sol type Select a Query Bedrock 30 H Description EP Geologic Description soll hype Description z Consistency pa Structure dh x W Map and BHLP Ready e Use current projection system Conditions lithology from lithology o1_type lithology from lithology soil_type i formation_name i formation _ urit moisture 2 comment Source Conditio Project Advanced Close EJ Help Field Mame litholagy soil_type Type STRING Rosi 21 Time 0 0 0 15 Enclosing the two or more conditions in parentheses allows you to further refine the query criteria Use AND or OR operators inside and outside the groupings to combine the conditions so as to obtain the best results For the example above the query will return all stations in which at least one lithology interval begins below 30 meters AND contains clay OR if the stations have at least one lithology interval that begins below 50 m AND contains Silt Press the Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning P
141. Report node namely e PageHeader refers to the page header for the current report e Detail refers to the section that hosts the details of the report e PageFooter refers to the page footer for the current report Any item placed on the page header and footer of your report will be displayed on all pages of the report In addition to these sections one or more sections named Group Headers and a corresponding Group Footer sections can be added to the report In the figure depicted above the data on the report is grouped by stations That is the data for each station is displayed together Group Headers can have their own header and footer that will be displayed above and below each group s data respectively Data Fields Explorer For most report types the Report Editor takes data directly from the database based on the design and generates the desired report Access to the data in the database is provided through the connection string and SQL Statement These inputs result in a list of fields that are available for the current report These fields are listed in the Fields Explorer as shown below that can be displayed by clicking on the Fields icon EE on the toolbar 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor EN Retresh the fields Station list Mame o chemical name sample date i resull_value __ Just of available result unit fields One or more fields in the fields explorer can be selected and d
142. Report Containing a Map Project Follow the directions below to create a report containing one or more map layers from the Map Manager Start the Map Manager and open a Map Project Show hide the desired layers in the map project all visible layers will appear in the report Press the Print button from the toolbar or select Project Print from the main menu of the Map Manager The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the e Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The Report Editor allows you to either create a new report for the current map project or add it to an existing one If you choose to add to an existing report the report editor adds the new map to the report As such multiple vews of your map project s can be sent to a report one by one Each view of your map project is created with its associated scale bar The map project can be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime Report Designer Note that resizing a map project on the runtime Report Designer adjusts the scale that is associated with that specific view of your map project The report will appear in the project tree once it is saved 14 5 4 Creating a Report Containing a Cross Section Follow the directions below to create a report containing one cross section created in the Cross Section Editor Start the Cross Section Editor
143. Report Designer Window The Report Designer allows you to design the contents as well as looks of your reports All report designs can be saved and opened for editing and or generating the final report A sample of the designer view is shown below with a report template loaded for demonstration purposes O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor a Nev Don Gey te race EL yA Be ewe sons A mo x SX Jeaemien sei a E lL a ee ee 2 E Thy lad abl t E Shen pas a ee alm aa So e BET E ce TOLE A CS AS SEE A Te OA OO OO OOO a ee El F MainRepart fee SE A mHE PegebHender Detail j j pre mt E seas E PayeFouter Bai AEE a raras ce Er Ar E images 0 dd Transparent intra T Center tes The designer window contains the following items Property Toolbox provides the tools that can be used to edit properties of the report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain Toolbar provides multiple buttons for functions in the designer Explorer allows you to browse through the controls that are placed on the currently opened report It facilitates selecting a control for further editing Layout window provides the interface for designing the report Fields allows you to select one or more data fields for displaying data Simply drag and drop the selected field into the desired section of the report 14 2 1 Report Designer Toolb
144. Results or Soil_Chemistry table e Quality Code Identifiers Used to identify the sample type Typically found with the Sample ID in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table The following fields are not required but are helpful for easily identifying samples in the results page e Station Name located in the Station table e Sample Name this is typically found in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table e Sample Date e Units e Unit conversion factors Define A New Lab Quality Template To create a new lab quality analysis template click Tools gt Quality Control from the Main Menu then select the Manage Lab QC Templates option The Lab Quality window will open as shown in the following figure Lab Quality _ x Lab Quality Templates Template Description Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than 100 Coefficient of variation less than 100 Highlightirg Font Background olor Border Eola onl Appl OF Cancel Help e To create a new template click the Add button and enter a name for the template The newly created template will then appear in the Lab Quality Templates list To configure your template click on the to expand the template tree As shown in the following example screenshot the three Check types Duplicate Spikes and Blanks w
145. Schlumberger WATER SERVICES Users Manual Hydro GeoAnalyst From Data Discovery to Delivery Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 2 NO oo Ah W Chapter II 1 2 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst 12 Whats New in Hydro GeoAnaly Sii 12 ADOUL Hydro Ge OANA Sisi ewan henmsucncea Ot hiAe wana nsnehtawnseeaeeae seas 13 Template Manada oil 14 Data ENMU A A A AR A A A o a A ves 14 Query Bulde ri o pa 14 E A NON 15 PISTEGION urinaria iaa tia 15 Mat rial Sp cification EdItO Fundo dt 15 Cross Pe oes eos casas aie he certs nen ns seen see oe E secure 16 TIME Series PIOS rons a diia iia tada o aida 16 Bore hole Log PIOUS cusco iia tocan 16 MAP M nager na aaae a a E Na 17 Cross Section Edo naaa ataca 18 SD EXPIOLEI uta dia 18 Report Designer caia dd til 18 Interface to other SWS Software usina aca daa 18 Installing Hydro GeoAnNalySt oocococococcccocococococacaconcncocaronnnnrarannnrnrararnrnrarannnrnrarnrnrnranananenes 19 Uninstalling Hydro Geo AnalYS E ccomissoracnir ii ii 19 Opening HGA Demo Proje Cruitisuniinl ua owedimarneumaweNede 19 Updating Old Project oa 20 Learning to use Hydro GEDANA Sia 20 Hydro GeoAnalyst In Program Heli adi 21 Hydro GeoAnalyst On line Help usina rr ac iia 21 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 24 Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts cccececeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneneeaeaeeeeeeenenenenaeaes 24 Station TIPOS ao suicida a a cl o VER esoo 24 Stations Tables cnica dai ciar aida 25 Stati
146. Services Queries 149 NENE Station Group Quem Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query TOC_Exceeds 320m station id id station station gt station name station toc El Description i E Location e Station Marne Map and BHLP Ready 4 Use current projection system z station type total depth E i depth to bedrock E description_addins H Geologic Description H Well Construction FI Soil Testing H Sail Sampling El Go A A E A Source Conditio Project Advanced Cloze El Help Field Mame station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0047 NOTE The Map and BHLP Ready option ensures that the query will contain the required fields enabling it to be plotted on a Map Manager BHLP project The required fields are Station ID Xand Y and Station Name If this option is checked the required fields must be added and cannot be modified NOTE The Query Builder allows you to create map ready queries in the project s projection system When the queries are executed Xand Y coordinates are displayed in the lat long format however when the query is executed through the main HGA window or exported to CSV MS Access or XML the Xand Y coordinates will be displayed in the current projection system m Press the Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string is invalid t
147. Settings Coordinate system in source Projection typ Projection E UTH State planar NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N E Geographic f Others Unit meters Project Morutorirng Wells Boreholes Soll_Bornngz WG Stations QC Monitoring Wells Boreholes with plot data C Current project Existing group CI New group Back Best gt Cancel Help Projection Settings The DTS requires you to define the coordinate system the projection system and the units for the stations in the source file Following successful import the new stations will be converted to the projection system and units defined in the HGA project A detailed description of the coordinate and projection systems available in HGA is provided in Chapter 4 see Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location on page 103 NOTE lt is important to know and select the correct project system during the import to prevent erroneous station co ordinates Coordinate Exclusion Filter The DTS also provides the option to indicate excluded coordinates Excluded coordinates could be coordinates used as place holders in the source file in cases where coordinates are unknown For example the value 9999 may be entered if the X or Y coordinate does not exist or is unknown If this is the case these coordinate values should be entered in the appropriate field In the screen shot shown above the value 9999 is entered for both X and Y coordinates In this case stati
148. TE The analysis assumes that the sample that is being spiked is a blank and does not contain any detectable concentrations of any of the contaminants You may not use a field original sample for a spiked sample analysis Highlighting The options are the same as described in the previous section 8 2 3 Check Blanks Settings A blank is a quality control sample used to detect and identify contaminants introduced to samples during the measurement process A laboratory blank is an analyte free matrix that is carried through all or part of the analytical process for identifying contamination introduced during analysis Types of laboratory blanks include method blanks carried through the entire preparation and analysis sequence calibration blanks matrix matched reagent water used for calibration and storage blanks placed in sample storage areas In the field an analyte free matrix is carried through a portion of the field process to identify contamination introduced during field or transportation operations Types of blanks associated with the field are trip blanks these accompany samples through the transportation process equipment rinsates collected after decontamination and field blanks collected on site during the sampling event Ideally analysis of the blank samples should return no detectable concentrations of any of the analytes i e concentrations are below the method detection limit MDL 2012 Schlumberger Water Services
149. TS HGA supports exporting data to other destinations in two ways e The first and more direct way of exporting data uses a gridded data format This option is available under the Project menu Export Grid The current active grid can be saved in CSV XML MDB SHP or HTM formats e The second method of exporting data allows data transfer from a selected table to practically any OLE DB supported destination These destinations may include MS 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 140 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Access database SQL Server database Oracle databases and many others A dialog similar to that used for importing data into HGA database is launched whenever this feature is requested To export data using the DTS select the menu option Project Export Data and the following window will appear Data transfer system Export 4 E ioj xj Step 1 Data source Package name he Description h Save changes to this DOTS package Select data destinatia fs Specify export file name FO f Builda connection sting AS Data destination details Name Value Het gt Cancel Help Specify Data Source and Package Similar to data importing the first step in the data transfer operation is to provide the desired destination The Destination can be provided either as a file name wherever applicable or as a connection string First a data package must be selected or a new one created from the Packa
150. The Appearance tab allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox You can also select from the available Draw Modes change the Width and Height of the images or modify the appearance of symbols BHLP Settings i x Dept e Visible Column Options Border Line isibilit Outline Appearance Description Appearance Using e Visible ao L Alignmen Horizontal Right z Vertical Center Help Apply Cancel The Description tab consists of two subtabs Appearance and Using The Appearance subtab allows you to show hide the text label change its Font and change the position of the label O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 243 by using the horizontal and vertical Alignment dropdown boxes BHLP Settings X Dept e Visible Column Options Border Line isibilit Outline Appearance Description Appearance Using w Using as Numeric Data pS Help Apply DOF Cancel The Using subtab allows you to specify the display settings for numeric description data If you choose to include numeric data in your water level description select the Using as Numeric Data checkbox and specify the display format of the data using the Format dropdown list box You may choose from the following formats General use this format to display numeric data as whole numbers e g 1 Fixed use this format to display num
151. The Data Transfer System 126 1 Importing Data sing the DTS sorna cia 127 SLED T GCHOGOS Dala iia iia 128 Step 2 Data Mapping casado 132 Step 3 Station Related Settings anida A cs 135 Step 4 Data Valida OM ica lis 138 2 Exporting Data using the DS unieran A ete a eine 139 Chapter VI Queries 144 Aboutthe Interfaces dsd 144 QUE TV DOS iaa 146 3 Data Query Example ad 146 Adding afield which contains a Linked Listin ai ii 152 Advanced Data Query Option asin sia 154 4 Station Group Query ExaMple ocococcccccccococococococacacanoncononanncananannnrnrnrnrnrnrananenrnnnanennnnana 156 5 Using SQL Commands Example codicia islands 158 6 Managing QUES sur E E a a 160 7 View QUEME 161 8 EXporting Query Results caia seeds a E E A a 162 9 Printing Query Resucitado erste umesuauwcxente 163 Chapter VII Crosstab Queries 166 1 Creating a CrOSStab QUEYERE ANE 166 Layou 9 rn E Rin 167 A A 169 AUO OE A OS 170 2 Generatinda Me Re DOF ii a 171 Crosstab Table Display Settings unan aid 173 Data Marker Settings anwsin a aa a ea A de 174 3 Printing Crosstab IRE DO Siria ii is 175 Chapter VIII Lab Quality Control 180 Preparing Your Data for QC ANalySiS oocococccococococococococonononcacacanananananannrarnrnrarararararananns 180 2 Define A New Lab Quality Template ooooocococococccccococoncncocococananannnnnrarararnrnrarannnrnrarananns 182 Gheck DupliGates Se tin Sid A a id cias 183 Check Spike G Se Ulin GS
152. The desired size of the image may be selected or customized by entering new Width and Height values The image can be saved to three graphics formats e GIF e Bitmaps bmp e JPEG Image File jpg Any of these graphics formats can be imported into most word processing software packages Alternately the image may be copied to the Windows clipboard by selecting Edit Copy from the menu This image can be pasted into most word processing and graphics editing programs NOTE The resolution of the graphics file image will depend on your screen resolution and on the size of the Display Window In order to maximize the image quality you should maximize the Display Window to full screen 13 10 Printing the 3D Image The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer is an advanced three dimensional visualization and animation component for displaying and presenting cross sections created with the mapping component included with Hydro GeoAnalyst Specifically this can be used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats In addition basemaps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for vewing geology and hydrogeology data The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results using a complete selection of gr
153. Time 1 2 5 List Editor HGA comes with a List Editor tool that allows users to create and customize lists for almost any field in the database allowing for rapid manual data entry Common examples of lists include List of common chemical names Lab analysis test methods Well drilling methods construction and casing materials County and State Codes Applicable standards for various purposes regions and agencies A List in HGA is equivalent to either a physical or virtual look up table 1 2 6 Material Specification Editor HGA comes with a Material Specification Editor tool that allows users to create and customize Soil Classifications for the soil type field in the Lithology table Including by default with the program are the following soil classifications USCS USDA DIN 4023 IAH Compton Geological Survey of Canada Dunham Carbonate Classification Shell Standard 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 16 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help However it is very likely that you will want to create your own soil classifications to suit your project specific needs HGA allows you to create as many soil classifications as you wish These classifications will be shown in the Borehole Log Plotter and the Cross Section Editor when visualizing the wells 1 2 7 Cross Tab Query Crosstab queries are special types of queries that allow you to store your data in a normalized manner in your database but generate and display pivoted deno
154. Use Font h al Size fio Ghana Style HZH Line Color LJ Fill Color Fort Char Map Help Apply DOF Cancel The Symbols tab allows you to define the symbol to represent one or more water level measurements on the plot Under the Appearance frame you can specify the water level position for multicasing wells 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 234 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help from the dropdown list box You can also select the type of symbol to represent the water level positions Select the Use Marker option and you can select from a list of symbol markers where the size style and line and fill colors can be defined Select the Use Font option and you can select from available fonts size color etc After the Font is selected load the Character Map to see the available characters for the selected font iol xi Font ESAI Environmental amp Icons Selected char Y LE Cancel Simply click on the desired character then click OK to return 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 235 BHLP Settings xj E Es BHLP Well Construction e Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc 4 Symbols DatasLabelz Data to Displa Tall l Hori tal First EJ Mas J Ee Vertical Top Jw Last Aver E Help Apply OF Cancel Under the Data Labels tab the Data to Display f
155. Water Services The Data Transfer System 135 The DTS understands the syntax described in the following table Operation Operator Comments Equal to Not equal I Gresterihan 2 For numeric fields only kesetiaan ps For numeric fields only Greater than or q For numeric fields Equal to only Less than or equal E For numeric fields to only Rules Spaces are allowed before and after the operators For example lt 10 gt 10 10 note that the equal sign is two equal signs together with no spaces in between However spaces between operators is not allowed For example lt 10 is correct 40 lt 10 is not correct 40 is not correct there is a space between the two signs Those records not satisfying the import criterion will be highlighted in yellow under the preview window and a warning message will be shown at the top In order to filter these records select the corresponding warning and click on the Reject button just below the control that lists warnings and errors 5 1 3 Step 3 Station Related Settings lf the data to be imported contains information for new stations some additional information may be required in order to allow proper data transfer The Station Related Settings window as shown below will only be displayed if data is imported to the Stations table 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 136 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Data Transfer System Import E E Oj xj Q Station Related
156. _result WHERE chemical_name Benzene Next click the Execute Query 2 button to display the query results shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 160 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Xa a g Station Group Quen f Data Query Design SQL View Previevs DELETE FROM parameterresult WHERE chemicalname Benzene Select a Query Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining E xploration Geophysics Well History Station sample_id chemical_n result_value result_unit reporting_cl sampling_pi fraction_con a 180 1998474121 2H 1969482422 Ag 19955239652 Alkalinity 399339581 As 15 Ba 1011920929 Ca 125 Cl 125 Cond 1200 Dissolved_ 1980926514 Ethylbenzer 2 Fe 970542320 HCO 125 Ha 10 lonic Strenc 009209394 E i5 Li 1977648258 Ma Ze Mn 1023841858 Source Condition Project k moho l l md mb o ob o ob o ob o ob o ob o lo bo ml o bo o o bob Advanced Close Help Category Event Rows 1775 Time 0 0 0 125 NOTE Once you click the Execute Query button all the data that is specified in the SQL statement will be permanently deleted from the database Because there is no undo function it is recommended that you use the select command before a delete command to ensure that you have the selected the correct records 6 6 Managing Queries After queries have been created they may be easily modified sa
157. a new georeference point is assigned A box will appear in the map window defining the image corners The image region can be modified as explained below To delete a georeference point Click the Ie Delete Point button in the toolbar Select one of the georeference points to delete it NOTE When a georeference point is deleted a new georeference point must be added since two georeference points are required to create a coordinate system 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 277 Once the Georeference points have been defined the map region may be modified In the Select Map Region window the map region is represented by an outline of a box with circular nodes at each corner and with arrows pointing along the Xand Y axes The map region box can be shifted or expanded to any alignment on the site map using the toolbar options described below These options may also be accessed from the Options menu on the Main Menu bar Resize Region Click and drag a corner of the map region box to stretch or shrink the size of the map region The new map coordinates will be updated to display the new map region E Rotate Region Rotate the map region Ez Align Rectangle Align the map region with the x axis El Maximize Enlarge the map region to the full extents of the basemap HINT If it is desirable to use the entire image for the map use the Maximize option to expand the map region to the full extents Adding Control Points Y
158. alyst in the order they are shown in the database browser T The Move Up button moves any selected table or field one level up in the Database Browser tree view Tables and fields will be displayed in Hydro GeoAnalyst in the order they are shown in the Database Browser 4 2 Modifying Tables The Template Manager displays all user tables under their logical categories Information on categories as well as tables and fields can be displayed by clicking on the desired item A description of the interface that is provided to view or edit these items is provided in the following sections Data Categories As mentioned earlier in this document a fixed number of data categories are provided in Hydro GeoAnalyst in order to help group similar information There are nine pre defined categories and one user defined category The categories are created based on those groups that are common in environmental data management systems These categories include e Description information related to site and stations Geologic Description information related to subsurface geology Well Construction information related to drilling methods casing filling etc Soil Testing information related to geological investigations such as penetrometer tests Soil Sampling information related to soil investigations such as soil vapor coring etc Monitoring Events Sampling for chemical information as well as water levels and any other 2012 Schlumberge
159. ameter i e Level Temperature Conductivity Flowman NOTE A selection is not necessary if all the channels are inactive greyed out HGA will read the station name in each MON file and attempt to find an appropriate station match in the current HGA project database lf one is found you may proceed Otherwise the field will display a color and you must specify the appropriate destination station name The color displayed in the information table represents the number of station names that can be matched with the location information in the MON file White indicates that a single station name has been found Red indicates that a matching station name could not be found Yellow indicates that two or more matching station names exist in the database If a row is either red or yellow click the button and manually specify a destination station name from the database 2012 Schlumberger Water Services sa Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Get Station amp Screen i aj xj Please select Station and screen List Matched mene o p sme m e we E 056345443 134814097 META 0050930275 4340351604 Uk Cancel de From the Get Station amp Screen dialog select a destination station and a screen id Click the List Matched button to open the List Matched dialog This dialog will display all the possible station and screen_id combinations that match the MON data After selecting click Ok Click the Import button to f
160. ample i Cancel Provide a Description Line Style Line Color Fill Pattern for the model interpretation layer the Name for the layer cannot be modified as the name is defined in the Model Layer Options dialog Click OK to close the dialog Once this is finished repeat the same sequence of operations for other model layers within the cross section domain Restrictions on Model Layers The following restrictions apply when drawing model interpretation layers e The model layer line must start at the left boundary and end at the right boundary e The line must be drawn from left to right and may not go backwards i e no vertices can be drawn left of a previously drawn vertex e Model layer lines cannot intersect each other e Model layers need to be drawn in the order they are created For instance the bottom of model layer 3 can not be drawn between model layers one and two 12 3 4 3 Snapping Vertices to Other Model Layer Lines While drawing a model layer interpretation line it is possible to snap to part of or all of the vertices of an already drawn model layer line This can be helpful for defining geologic layers that pinch out i e have zero thickness in some parts of the site Snapping between two selected vertices Whenever a model layer line is drawn and the vertex of the line is within the buffer for a vertex of an adjacent model layer line a blue box will appear outlining the vertex on the adjacent line
161. and display properties simply select Layer Display Data from the main menu then modify the settings as explained above 11 2 3 Edit The Edit menu contains standard windows functions such as Cut Copy and Paste objects as well as other options for editing shapefiles NOTE Before editing a layer make sure that the Editable check box is selected After editing deselect the Editable check box on the Layer Manager Cut Cuts the selected object to clipboard only available if an object polygon rectangle circle line or text is selected Copy Copies the selected object only available if an object polygon rectangle circle line or text is selected Paste Pastes the clipboard item onto the current layer 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 309 Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all objects from the current map layer Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to the selected object To add a vertex Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make it editable Select an object on this layer Click on the h Add Vertex button or select the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex This menu item is only available when an object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Delete Vertex Pro
162. and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the Quality Control component The following are required fields for the Lab Quality validation and as such must be fields that are present in your data query e Station ID located in the Station table e Sample ID this is typically found in the Monitoring Event gt Parameter Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table e Batch Identifiers Samples that are prepared and or analyzed together with the same process and personnel using the same lot s of reagents within a specified time period should be assigned the same Batch ID Both the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch number which relates the samples to each other e Detection Limit Method detection limit typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil Chemistry table e Parameter Name contains the parameter being analyzed typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_ Chemistry table with the results e Parameter Identification Information contains meta data about the parameter typically found in the same table as the parameter name e Parameter Values The measured or observed value for the selected chemical or 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 182 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 8 2 parameter Typically found in the Chemistry __
163. and not elevations As such the BHLP and Cross Section editor require that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark The Save as DB Template button allows you to save all changes made to a new user template A separate dialog will be displayed where the name for the template will be provided Tables and Fields Toolbar A second toolbar is provided below the Database Browser Tree View The items on this toolbar allow manipulating the database through the Database Browser A description of each of the items on this toolbar is given below El The Add button allows adding tables and fields to the database depending on which node in the Database Browser is currently selected For example if a data category is active at the time this button is selected a table will be added in that data category Similarly if a table is active when the Add button is selected then another table will be added to the same category A field will be added if this button is pressed while any field in the desired table is active Both tables and fields are added at the end of the list By default the Template Manager names the new table field as type_ fld_ where stands for a number generated for the added item When a new table is created press the Add button again while the table is receiving the focus to add the first field to the table 2 The Add Auto Increment field allows you to add an Aut
164. and open a Cross Section Show hide the desired interpretation layers in the cross section all visible layers will appear in the report Press the Print button from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the A Designer Window press the nh Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The report editor allows you to either create a new report for the current cross section or add it to an existing one If you choose to add the current cross section to an existing report the report editor adds the new cross section to the report As such multiple cross sections can be sent to a report one by one In order to be able to add the current cross section to an existing report you must first open the existing report Each cross section is created with its associated legends and key map indicating the cross section location in plan view The cross section can be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime report designer 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 423 The report will appear in the project tree once it is saved 14 5 5 Creating a Report Containing 3D Images A report for your fence diagrams and 3D views can be created by following the directions below Start the 3D Explorer and open a 3D project file 3XS or load a 3D project from the project browser i
165. any other needs HGA comes with a number of customizable templates implementing various commonly used database structures These structures include Environmental Metric Environmental Imperial Ontario s Ministry of Envronment Water Well Information System MOE WWIS Metric Ontario s Ministry of Envronment Water Well Information System MOE WWIS Imperial US E P A Region 2 Metric US E P A Region 2 Imperial US E P A Region 5 Metric US E P A Region 5 Imperial These templates also include commonly used and customizable data queries and report templates 1 2 2 Data Entry Most environmental data is inherently spatial as observations are taken at specific map coordinates over time In HGA these sampling locations are referred to as Stations HGA comes with standard easy to use data entry grids equipped with drop down combo boxes and many other features to facilitate data entry and validation for virtually any type of Station data The Data Transfer System DTS is designed to assist in the process of importing exporting data to from the database Using the DTS station data can be imported from practically any source including delimited text files MS Excel spreadsheets MS Access Databases SQL Server Databases and more Additionally HGA comes with several specific import routines for Logging files LAS Diver Datalogger files MON and chemical data 1 2 3 Query Builder Data querying is an important
166. ap the pixels of the image to a coordinate system the image must have at least two georeference points with known coordinates These georeference points can be defined using the procedure described below Note The real world georeference points must have coordinates that are in the same projection system as the Map Project Map Manager will not make adjustments or conversions for georeference coordinates that are in a different projection system To set a georeference point Click on the first map location where the X and Y world coordinates are known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y1 world coordinates of the selected location Georeference point 1 5351 Ze Y 481 2839 Ap 220 Yp 393 OF Cancel 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 276 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Enter the X1 and Y 1 coordinates for this point Click OK Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point Click OK A box will appear around the map region similar to the window shown below il Select Map Region File View Edit Options ala co H Mh 40 4 539124 445 m 1 4612838 44 m The Georeference utility will convert the Raster Image to project coordinates in the top right corner of the window the two Georeference Points will be displayed These values cannot be modified unless one of the georeference points is deleted and
167. aphical formats and features These include e 2D and 3D views of the grid Station representation showing lithology Imported Surfer Grid surfaces Display contaminant plumes in the form of isosurfaces or color maps DXF and Bitmap overlays on surfaces Light source position control Semi transparent objects 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 400 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help e Auto rotate tools continuously rotate the image around the X Y Z axis e Record grid rotation to an AVI file This chapter provides a detailed description of the features and functionality of the various options for preparing and customizing a three dimensional presentation of your HG Analyst data 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 14 The Report Editor The SWS Report Editor included with the Hydro GeoAnalyst package is used to create professional reports containing data and 2D and 3D views you have generated for your projects This chapter presents information on how to transfer stations grids query results maps cross sections borehole log plots and 3D views into a printable report format which can be printed or exported for convenient transfer to your colleagues and or clients The Report Editor provides the following features Create and save Report Layout Templates Create and Manage Reports Import Reports Design and Preview Reports Save Export and Print Reports In addition the report editor Provides a
168. ars The figure below shows a closer view of the toolbars used in the Report Designer window o thane foal ba i ja Es 4 aa shel ae a 1 Te A T m m E i ye e iS Pe el cee p RA F min fee 7 The following sections describe the molar buttons of the TE window Main Toolbar 2012 Schlumberger Water Services ao Hydro GeoAnalyst Help E New Report Allows you to create a new report AS Report Wizard Allows you to create a new report using the report wizard ay Import MS Access Reports Allows you to import reports that are created in MS Access Ly Open Report Allows you to open an existing report Save Report Allows you to save the active report H Save Report As Allows you to sawe the active report with another name and or format i e as a report template if desired LU Page Setup Allows you to edit the page setup properties Printer Setup Allows you to configure printer settings Print Report Allows you to generate the report and send it to a printer 5 Preview Report Previews the report before printing 5 Undo Cancels the last operation Cut Cut selected text or object from the report designer E Copy Copies selection to clipboard E Paste Pastes contents of the clipboard to the report designer xl Delete Deletes current selection n Reorder Groups Displays the groups order dialog Display Settings Tools ES Report Explorer Displays hides
169. ase Temperature m Conductivity Flowman 2 Map one or more components of your MOM file with one or more fields in your database by nodes and clicking on the Map button depth to water level Dry_indicator ves No i Comments Source Fields Destination Fields 3 To remove mapping File Table File Field Unit select the mapping in the Logger settings Station Marne table at the bottom and select the delete button E Required Mappings 1 You must map a field In the source with the Station name field in the Station table 4 el 2 ou could hot mapp screen_ld Save mapping to database x lt Back Next gt Cancel EJ Help Step 2 Data Mapping The next step in the MON data import operation is to map the MON file fields source with the appropriate database fields destination To map a source field with a destination field F Select a source field from the MON file in the Select Section Field frame F Select the matching HGA destination field from the Select Table Field frame F Click the Map button Rules for Mapping The Station Name field of the Location table must be mapped All destination tables and fields must already exist in the HGA database All channel tables e g Level Temperature Conductivity Oxygen in the database must include a Screen ID All mapped tables in the database must have primary key s mapped Data type of mapped fields must be compatible
170. ate chemical parameter s result value concentration units e method detection limit Once you have created a data query you are ready to create a Crosstab query This can be done in several ways Select the desired Data Query from the Queries node in the HGA project browser then select Tools Crosstab Report from the main menu or Right mouse click on the Data Query and select Crosstab Report from the pop up menu A dialog will appear prompting you for a name for the Crosstab report enter a name then click OK 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Crosstab Queries 167 New Crosstab Report E X Mame TCE_and_B TE for Year2000 The Crosstab Designer window will then open as shown in the following screenshot ES DataCube wizard Hi E Layout Style sheet DataCube fields chemical_name Inactive fields A dimension fields Concentration date result_ unit x Y Y dimension fields Facts fields Cancel The DataCube Wizard window contains two tabs with options that can be configured Layout Select which fields from your data query should be used in the crosstab report Style Sheet Specify the style settings for the crosstab report Each tab is described in detail below 7 1 1 Layout The layout tab consists of a Source field list which contains all the fields from your data query There are also four DataCube fields Inactive Fields X dimension Fields rows Y dimension fields columns and Facts
171. ate February 9 2012 4 m 5 E 3 E 4 E A I E 4 A AO PA PA e ON rhe te The Report Viewer contains three main components e Report Navigation Toolbar provides a number of toolbar icons that allow you to interact with the report described in detail below e Table of Contents can be displayed by clicking on the TOC icon EE on the toolbar The table of contents allows you to jump to any desired section in the report e Main Body of the Report Preview The main body of the report displays the final report as per the report design and data O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor ats 14 3 1 Report Viewer Toolbars The Report Editor Viewer offers an extensive list of navigation tools the figure below shows the toolbars used in the Viewer window The following describes the toolbar buttons of the viewer window Ly Open Static Report Opens a previously saved static report Save Static Report Saves the current report in the Report Editor s native format T Export Report Exports the current report to the desired format A Report Designer Displays the Report Designer window Print Report Sends the current report to printer El Show TOC Displays the table of contents for the current report sw Show Ruler Displays a ruler ar Search Text Allows you to provide text to search for t Find Text Searches for text provided in the Search Text text box E Copy Page Copies the current page to wind
172. ate match in the current project If one is found you may proceed Otherwise you must include the well section or terminate the import routine and return to HGA and create the appropriate station using the same station name as found in the LAS source If duplicate station names are found in the database there will be a prompt to select the appropriate station The Data Mapping window is divided into two frames The Source well section found on left side of the window and The Destination tables and fields on the right side of the window The Source frame which contains the data to be imported can be expanded on the left side of the window If the field names in the source are identical to those in the destination then the fields will be matched automatically For all others you must map the fields using the procedure below The Destination frame contains the database schema all tables and fields under their appropriate data categories From this frame select a Category then a Table from this category and a list of fields will be displayed in the grid on the right side of the window Mapping Mapping fields from the LAS file to the database is described below F Select one field from the source file in the left frame F Select the appropriate matching field from destination in the right by expanding the appropriate data category and table F Click on the Map button Mapped fields will then be added to the Preview grid at the bottom
173. ater Services Template Manager 123 top of the window A dialog will appear prompting for a template name and description Once a name is provided for the new template all changes will be saved to this template Saving a template as default template Saving a template as the default template makes that user template the default for all users When Hydro GeoAnalyst opens your project it will utilize this default template for view settings To set the template as default select the Use as Project Default option at the top of the window Exporting the current template as a Database template Any user template can also be exported to a database template This feature allows you to modify the database schema and save it for future use To export the selected user template to a database template click on the a Save as a database template button A dialog will appear prompting for a template name and description Once a name is provided for the new template all changes will be saved to this template The template will be saved with the extension XML and the corresponding lists and templates will be saved in an MDB file The Templates are saved in the folder Program Files HGAnalyst Templates In addition to the current database schema the following entities are saved to the database template upon exporting e Report templates BHLP templates Plot templates User defined Soil Classification Systems SCS Lists defined in the L
174. axis value is displayed in the field labelled X1 and X2 Alternately an X axis value can be typed directly into this field When the desired location for the vertical slice has been defined click the Close button to save the vertical slice type and location The new vertical slice will appear in the Surfaces window 13 7 2 Creating a Horizontal Slice To create a horizontal slice through the domain click the Horizontal button to open a Horizontal slice properties window as shown below A yellow outline of the horizontal slice will appear in the Display Screen Horizontal slice properties i xj 2 value 31 0 0 Help The Slider Bar moves the horizontal slice along the vertical Z axis and the corresponding slice elevation is displayed in the field labelled Z value When the desired location for the horizontal slice has been selected click the Close button to save the slice type and location The new horizontal slice will appear in the Surfaces window 13 7 3 Selecting a Cross Sectional Slice When adding a color map or isoline map you may also utilize cross section lines that were defined in the Map Manager provided they have been added to the current 3D project To select a vertical cross section through the site domain click the Cross section tab to open the Cross section window as shown in the following figure This window displays a list of the available cross sections for the current 3D project O 2012 S
175. ayer Various St Johns River Water Management District http sjr state fl us programs data html Data GIS data Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage St Johns River Water Management District Florida Datum NAD83 Layer Basemap Natural Resources and Images United States Geological Survey and USA Environmental Protection Agency http nhd usgs gowindex html Data National Hydrography Dataset Format Geodatabase Geographic Coverage USA Layer Surface water features such as lakes ponds streams rivers springs and wells United States Envronmental Protection Agency http www epa gow OW OW watershed landcover lulcmap html Data Land Cover Digital Data Format Coverage Geographic Coverage USA Statewide Layer Satellite Land Cover National Atlas USA http www atlas usgs gove atlasftp html Data National Atlas Map Warehouse Format Shapefile Geotiff DBF Geographic Coverage USA Datum NAD83 Layer Agriculture Biology Boundaries Climate Envronment Geology History Map Reference People Transportation Water United States Department of Agriculture http datagateway nrcs usda gov Data Natural Resources Data Warehouse 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 450 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage USA Datum NAD83 Layer Orthoimagery Soils Common Land Units Cultural and Demographics Governmental Units and Place names Elevation Hydro
176. bal SRTM1 30m for USA SRTM3 90m World Datum WGS84 NAVD88 Layer DEM Natural Resources Canada http geogratis cgdi gc ca download Data CGDI Warehouse Format Vector and Raster Geographic Coverage Canada Datum Various 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 448 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Layer Landsat RADARSAT Canada Atlas Canadian Geographic Information Systems Land Use National Scale Frameworks Census Data Ontario Land use Cover Canadian Conversation Areas Database State of Canada s Ecosystem CGIAR Consortium for Spatial Information CGIAR CSI http srtm csi cgiar org Data Shuttle radar Topography Mission SRTM Format Geotiff or Arcinfo Geographic Coverage Global 90M Datum WGS84 EGM96 Layer DEM Global Land Cover Facility http glcfapp umiacs umd edu 8080 esdi index jsp Data Land Sat TM Images Format GeoTiff Geographic Coverage Global Up to 30m Datum WGS84 Layer Landover Images Land Information Ontario http lioapp rc gov on ca lids welcome asp Data NRVIS Data Format Coverage Geographic Coverage Ontario Canada Datum NAD83 CNT Layer Airport Annotation Building To Scale Building As Symbol Concession Contour Crown Game Preserve Drainage Line Drainage Point MNR District MNR Region Municipal Park National Wildlife Area OBM DTM Park Zone Reg Pit or Quarry Provincial Park Zone Regulated Railway Segment Spot Height Tank Tower Transport Line Transport
177. ble with YOC exceedences ela x t L Data Settings Display Settings ok Cancel Help A This dialog allows you to manage the various layouts for the map layer In the first column show hide the layout by setting the Visible status Define the Name in the second column In the third you may optionally enter a Description Click on the Add button to add a new layout In the combo box that appears select either Tabular or Plot shown below Display Type i x Please select a display type Tabular O O eee ee eeeeeeereriee ieee en Cancel Click on the x Delete button to delete the selected layout Use the tT button to move the selected layout up Use the button to move the selected layout down Next you must define the settings for the layout Plots For a Plot display click on the Data Settings button and the following dialog will appear O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 301 Data Settings gt x Plot Template Choose Data Please choose the plot template OF Cancel i Help In the list choose from available plot templates that were created using the chart component For details on how to create plot templates please see Chapter 9 Saving Plot as Template In order to display the plot in the map the following requirements in the template must be met e Plot Grouping and Series Grouping must be done by station ID e The plot template must co
178. bol or label properties to this data set only Click on the Add button to add a new range Click on the xI Delete button to delete the selected range When you add a new Range enter the Breaking Value this is the upper limit for the range 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 208 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help For the example shown in the screenshot above there will be two ranges Within guidelines Values 0 100 inclusive will have unique symbol and label properties Exceedences Values greater than 100 to 120 inclusive will have a different set of symbol and label properties so they can easily be distinguished on the plot The Labels provides options for the data series labels Text Select the Font Color and Alignment options for the text Custom There are several options available for defining custom label Use different label source allows you to select a field from the list for the labels from a list Include pre fix provides the option to attach a text string in front of each label Include post fix provides the option to attach a text string at the end of each label NOTE If the Label options are inactive you must set the Labels to Visible load the General Series Settings and enable the Labels Visible option As you define the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series labels will appear using the selected settings When you are finished with the
179. c gt 325 AND PStation ID 1 elevation Close E Help Rows 165 Time 1 0 0 0 60 ln Press the Save button to save the query Press Close to return to the main HGA window The new station group query will now appear as a new node under the Station Group node in the Project Browser The stations group query dynamic station group can be distinguished from a user defined station group static station group by a modified icon aa NOTE There are no options to modify the list of Display Fields for Station Group queries The default display fields are ID Name X Y Elevation and TOC In addition there are no advanced options for Station Group queries Using SQL Commands Example If you are familiar with Structured Query Language syntax commands you can retrieve manage and manipulate your data through the SQL View Preview tab using SQL statements For example two commands that are commonly used include the Select command and the Delete command Both of these commands are described below Select Command The Select Command retrieves data from tables in a database and is usually followed by a where clause For example if you want to create a query to show all chemistry results where the chemical name is benzene you would enter the following SQL statement into the SQL View Preview tab SELECT FROM parameter_result WHERE chemical_name Benzene Next click the Execute Query g button to display the query resu
180. cation of the 4qualhem application exe file C Program Files AqualhenS Agua Chemiz exe a Select the location of the 4qualhem database aqc file C Program Files quaChenS Demo age ae ox c He In order to use the AquaChem Water Quality Analysis feature you must first have AquaChem 5 1 or later installed on the local machine and specify where the AquaChem51 ex is located and where the AquaChem project file AQC resides Use this feature to analyze water quality data in AquaChem Select a few stations or a station group from the station list then select the menu item and AquaChem will launch with the selected stations Note The HGA database must be linked using the Link to External Database option in AquaChem This procedure is described in the AquaChem User s Manual When using AquaChem with HGA keep in mind that AquaChem is intended only for its presentation and calculation features Data entry and maintenance operations should be performed centrally through the HGA interface and not the AquaChem interface The operations that must be performed in HGA include e Creating or modifying parameters e Importing data e Creating new samples or modifying sample information e Creating new stations or modifying station information Also the following operations are unavailable in AquaChem e Creating a new database instead the aqc file can be simply copied and distributed e Compressing the database i
181. ce double click the color box to customize the color Show borders will display a color map of the element values on the borders sides of the model domain when the isosurface intersects the edge of the model domain Color from palette will use the element color palette to automatically color the isosurface according to the specified isosurface value Once the isosurface is created the display settings can be accessed from the tree view These are shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a84 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help P Setting Value l lo Nemes lsosurface 1 o Wisible o o M L I Ellsosurace properties lsosurace value 5000 0 0 38034 625 Color from palette Iw Showborders Iw Yolume estimatation 99153 Visible check box shows hides the isosurface Semitransparent check box sets the isosurface image as semi transparent The Volume Estimation value represents the calculated volume that the isosurface encompasses for lower isosurface values will result in higher Volume Estimations higher isosurface values will result in lower Volumes The volume estimation works in the following manner When you ran the 3D Interpolation to create the plume data set you specify the grid size grid cells in the X Y and Z direction The volume estimation uses the number of grid cells and the X Y and Z extents to calculate the size of each grid cell The interpolated concentration value is calculate
182. ces 176 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help From the report window click the pea Page Setup button to open the page setup dialog shown below Letter Automatically Select bl Margine inches Left f Right f Bottom f Orientation Portrait f Landscape Here you can define the paper size paper source page margins and page orientation Once these settings are defined click the Ok button to return to the report window Print Settings From the Report window toolbar click the E Print Options button to open the Print Settings dialog shown below Es Print settings XA Ignore colors Dimensions on every page Field captions on every page Title on every page Cancel The following options are available Ignore Colors Show Hide report color scheme If selected the report will print in grey scale Dimensions on every page Show Hide row and column headings on all pages after the first page 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Crosstab Queries 177 Field captions on every page Show Hide field captions on all pages after the first page Title on every page Show Hide report title on all pages after the first page Click OK to save the settings and return to the report window Print Preview Finally you can preview the page settings for your crosstab report using Print Preview From the report window click the Print Preview button to the open the preview window shown below
183. ch provides options to set add and or delete items in a list table The button in the toolbar performs the same function The HGA package includes a List Editor tool that provides the ability to create and customize lists for any field allowing for efficient and effective data entry A list in HGA may be considered as a lookup table Linked Lists contain a specific list of values that may be used to supply a list of potential values for one or more fields Linked lists are especially convenient if the number of values for a field is fixed and limited Linked Lists may be created manually generated from existing data in the project or may be imported from an external source text spreadsheet or another database In HGA there are several examples of linked lists One example can be found in the Soil Sampling category in the Soil Chemistry table A combo box populated with a list of chemicals is provided for each cell under the Chemical Name field column Simply click on the combo box in any cell under this column and a list of chemical names is displayed for the selection This field is linked to a list of chemicals This eliminates the step of having to re enter chemical names in this field for each sample and minimizes any error that may occur as a result Below are some examples of using linked lists that you may create for the demonstration project 1 In the Stations table located under the Description category it may be
184. chlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 397 ras Select create slices Ioj x Clices Cross5ections A JJ MM Cancel Help Simply select the cross section from the list then click the Select button 13 7 4 Deleting a Slice If many different slices have been defined during the current session and the list is becoming too long and cumbersome to work with any entry in the Surface list can be deleted by highlighting the slice in the list and clicking the Delete button 13 7 5 Modifying a Slice The location or orientation of any slice can be modified by highlighting the target slice in the list and clicking the Modify button This will open the Slice Properties window where the desired changes can be made 13 8 Scene Configurations When using 3D Explorer to display and animate data it is important to be able to save the various display settings for fast and easy recall during a presentation or for comparing different views 3D Explorer is able to save the display settings by selecting File Save Scene configuration from the top menu bar or by clicking the a Save Scene configuration button in the toolbar This will load the Save Scene Configuration dialog 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 398 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help cy save scene configuration for Configuration Name AA OF Delete Cancel Type the desired name of the scene in the Configuration Name field and click OK Th
185. ck on the plot name in the tree or right mouse click on the plot in the viewer and select Copy to Windows Clipboard from the pop up menu You can O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 211 then insert the plot into a graphics or word processing application for further modifications Printing A plot report may be generated from within the Plot Designer and either printed or saved to an external file With the Plot Designer window open click on the Print button at the bottom of the Plot Designer window and select from one of the print options as shown in the following screen shots Pririt Send current plot to report Send all plots to report NOTE If you select Send all plots to report a report will be generated for each station in the current selection please be aware that this may take some time If you want to print a plot for just the selected station use the Send current plot to report option You will be prompted to Select a Template for generating your report as shown in the following screenshot You can either select from the existing templates or leave the selection blank and create a new report template for yourself Select Template y x Mame Click the OK button to load the plot s in the Report viewer The Report may be printed directly by clicking on the E Print button saved to a report archive file by clicking on the Save button or exported to one of several file forma
186. column select the data source for the plot There are two options available Data Table or Queries If Data Table is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data tables from your database schema for which you may select one table If Queries is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data Queries available in your HGA project for which you may select one table The advantage of using Data Queries is that the fields may originate from one or several tables in your database Duenez tce exceeds 10 mg per kg Datal able LJ erez The Caption corresponds to the text you entered in the Label text box of the Add a Plot Series window You can add several plot series depth and interval to one plot column All lines and shapes will be drawn in the default color and will be semi transparent so that when they overlay each other every plot is visible Be careful however with displaying plots with vastly different scales on the same plot column The plots will be shown on the same scale relative to each other so it may appear that one of the plots is hidden from view O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 225 10 3 3 1 Settings The Plot column settings are shown in the following screenshots As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and se
187. compilation map Format Geodatabase Geographic Coverage Ontario Layer Geology Statistics Canada http www12 statcan ca english census06 geo index cfm Data Road Network file Boundary files for provinces and territories census divisions economic regions census metropolitan areas and census Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Canada Datum NAD83 Layer Road and Administrative Boundary 15 6 Appendix F Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s Schlumberger Water Services maintains an online FAQ at the following internet address http www swstechnology com support_software_faqs php Please consult the FAQ website and the Help User manual as your first resource If you cannot find the answer please contact our technical support and they will be happy to assist you You may contact SWS at 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a52 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Schlumberger Water Services 72 Victoria Street South Suite 202 Kitchener Ontario CANADA N2G 4Y9 Phone 1 519 342 1142 Fax 1 519 885 5262 E mail sws support slb com Web www swstechnology com 15 7 Appendix G Configuring Geotransformation Settings Introduction A Geotransformation is a mathematical operation that takes the coordinates of a point in one geographic coordinate system and returns the same point in coordinates of another geographic coordinate system Hydro GeoAnalyst supports one stage horizontal geotransformations between different g
188. criptor J Color M Odor e Formation Name W Formation Unit Jv Moisture ef Comment IY Hydrogeology W Modeling W Features i Fractures IY Well Construction J Soil Testing W Soil Sampling W Monitoring Event M Mining Exploration W Geophysics e well History View setting User Category ES I N Geologic Description 0 ix A amp B Lt si Last Changed on 10 22 2010 11 54 12 AM Close Help After a table is added as many fields as desired can be added to the table In addition all settings such as defining or refining the primary key and relationship to other tables can be undertaken O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 117 Importing Tables A new table can also be created based on a table structure read from any OLE DB supported database To import a table source structure right click on a data category select the Import table structure option from the pop up menu and the following window will appear 10 x Copying Table Structure to Database Soure Data Source T able Station ID Data Example wf wf Total Records Click on the Open Data Source button to build a connection string to an existing database or file The Data Link properties dialog will be displayed For assistance on using the Data Link Properties please see Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing Once the data source is selected click on the 2 Refresh button Select the Table fr
189. cross section layer from the Layer Manager panel e Select a cross section line e Right click and select Update Buffer from the pop up menu CrossSection Line E Name Ex Butter 200 meters Description Enter description here 0K Cancel From the CrossSection Line dialog specify a new buffer distance Click Ok Map Manager will now regenerate the cross section line using the new buffer distance Note Buffer distances for cross sections generated in past versions of HGA cannot be modified 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 326 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 12 Cross Section Editor The Cross Section Editor is designed with easy to use tools for interpreting geological and hydrogeological data as well as interpreting data for groundwater flow models Generating model layers for use as modeling layer elevations in groundwater modeling packages such as Visual MODFLOW Pro has never been easier In addition the Cross Section Editor is seamlessly integrated with the Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer a tool that combines and displays one or more cross sections in a 3D fence diagram view The Cross Section Editor allows for three types of data interpretations e Geologic containing lithology structure data e Hydrogeologic containing locations of aquifers aquitards etc e Model containing locations of model layer lines which may be used in numerical groundwater modeling The Cross Section Editor provides users w
190. ct Al Export as Sample Mao GR bmp Raster Sample Map GR bmp vw anew bmp Raster anew bmp wt Intro det LAD Intro dst wt contour Line contour lw All Stations Point All Stations wt LroseSechonLineS Line LroseSechonLineS wt Boreholes Point Boreholes i AFhoto_Color_agr bmp Raster ArPhoto_Color_ar bmp lw Water Courses Line Water Courses wt Airports 1 Point Airports 1 Ca Major Railroad Line Major Railroads wt Urban Areas Polygon Urban Areas wt Trees Polygon Trees lw Grasslands Polygon Grasslands we Cropland Polygon Croplands m Destination Folder D Stemp E e Export using current map project s coordinate system Esport Cancel J Help O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 267 In this dialog select the layers you with to export and define names for the layers the same can be done for Surfaces if any are available Finally specify the Destination Folder for the copy of the map files On exporting a map project selected shapefiles will be exported in the current projection system if selected by the user Raster images will use the projection system at the time the image was georeferenced Export Map Provides options for exporting the current map view to a Raster Image file Supported file types include Bitmaps BMP JPEGs jpg and Enhanced Meta Files EMP Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save An Export dialog will appear with settings fo
191. ct Linking and Embedding object such as a picture to the report wl Bar Code Insert a bar code into the report iA ADO Control Click on it to add a ADO ActiveX Data Object datasource control on the report Chart Object Drag it to the designer to add a chart to the report db Well Profile Add a borehole log plot to the report 2 ActiveX Controls Add any ActiveX control that is registered on the current computer to your report 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Alignment Tools Bring To Front Mowe the selected item to the front of the overlay view Send to Back Move the selected item to the back of the overlay IS Align Left Aligns selected controls to the same left coordinate of the last selected control Center Align Aligns selected controls to the same center coordinate of the last selected control al Right Align Aligns selected controls to the same right coordinate of the last selected control ii Align Top Aligns selected controls to the same top coordinate of the last selected control at Align Middle Aligns selected controls to the same middle coordinate of the last selected control J Align Bottom Aligns selected controls to the bottom coordinate of the last selected control H Align to Grid Aligns the selected controls to the closest grid point C Size to Same Width makes all selected controls the same width as the last selected control cll Size to Same
192. ction Conditions i Expression Operator Expression Operator Source Conditio Project hd Advanced Close E Help Field Mame station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 115 Time 0 0 0 15 Click once on the field and drag this field into the blank conditions field under the Expression column The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the El Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually Under the Conditions select an Operator for the field A combo box with several options will appear gt gt lt lt LIKE IS IS NOT etc For this example select gt Enter a value in the second Expression field For this example type 325 Repeat this step for additional conditions Link multiple conditions by specifying an additional Operator choose from AND OR Press the E Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to generate the SQL string Ifthe Query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning Press the Es Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the wndow to execute the query string Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the Query The results of this query are shown in the window below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 158 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Query Builder XH
193. cts 101 Database name 3 q x Mame OF Cancel Help type Name of the new database OK For new databases HGA will create the required tables Please be patient during this process If the server connection and database are valid the next window in the Project Wizard will be displayed Otherwise there will be a warning notification regarding the server or database If this is the case please select another server or database for your project or verify the connection to the selected server The next step is to select or create the Database Template for the project 3 2 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables The next window in the Project wizard contains the Database Structure settings This includes tables fields and relationships In this window choose from one of the existing database templates or create a new one as shown in the figure below Project Wizard ie 5 x Create project dependent tables Selecta Project z Templates Environmental imperal New Template Database Structure Previe T ables Fields Location description addins Geologic Description Lithology Hydrogeology Modeling Features Fractures Well Construction Onilling Protocol Casing Screen Annular Fill Monitoring Points Download and review data model schemas for these templates Copy All Stations to Project lt Back Next gt Cancel Help A 2012 Schlumberger Water S
194. d for each node of the grid cell A grid cell in the plume grid has eight nodes with associated values v1 v2 v3 There are three possibilities 1 all values at the nodes are less than the isosurface value a In this case the cell volume is not added to plume volume estimation 2 all values at the nodes are greater than the isosurface value a In this case the entire cell volume is added to plume volume estimation 3 some values are greater than the isosurface value a and some are less In this case the isosurface crosses the cell green polygon on picture and the linearly interpolated portion of cell volume is added to plume volume estimation only a part of the cell volume is added to the plume estimation The volume estimation value will be in the length units for the X Y co ordinates specified in the database For example if you use UTM and Xand Y are entered in meters then the volume estimation value will be in cubic meters 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 385 13 5 2 Color Maps The Color maps elements allows you to create a color shaded map for the concentration data that will plot distributed colors A color legend for the Color map will also appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen Creating a Color Map To create a color map click on the desired element in the Model tree to highlight it then right click on the element and select the Add color map option from the po
195. d to control non detect results When the query returns null records for the result value the method detection limit if available and if selected can be displayed on the plot Optionally the method detection limit multiplied by the non detect factor ND_Factor can be used instead of the method detection limit For example if an ND_Factor of 0 5 is provided and a column containing method detection limit values is provided then the plot will display the method Detection Limit DL value multiplied by 0 5 the ND_ Factor If ND_Factor is left empty then the DL will be displayed ND_Factor specify a field that contains the factor for non detects Detection Limit select a field that contains the detection limit value Uncertainty select a field that contains a value for the uncertainty for the plotted series This will plot uncertainty bars directly on the plot Standard This option allows you to display water quality standards as a plot series on the plot This is useful for quickly identifying which values exceed the standard When you load the options for standards the following dialog will appear Standards x Click on the Add button to add a standard value and select a field that contains the standard value Click on the Delete button to remove existing list items from the list When you are finished click on the Close button The new standards will appear as a plot series under the Plots node in the tree You can then mo
196. ded in HGA along with some of the data entities that may be linked to each category e Description e g station name location coordinates elevation site etc e Geologic Description e g lithology soil properties hydrogeologic properties etc e Well Construction e g drilling protocol annular filling monitoring points casing materials well dimensions etc e Soil Testing e g SPT pocket penetrometer vane shear test dynamic cone e Soil Sampling e g Rock Coring Soil Chemistry results Soil Vapor Moisture Content Particle Size Distribution Atterberg Standard Proctor Unconfined Compression Direct Shear Odometer Consolidation e Monitoring Events e g weather conditions bailing field properties water quality O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 29 groundwater levels groundwater chemistry e Mining Exploration e g Alteration Mineralization Structure Samples Down Hole Survey Down Hole Geophysics e Geophysics e g Conditions Gamma Neutron 64 in E log 16 in E log Density Well History e g Pumping Rate Pump Screens Top of Casing status e User Defined Category All of the above data categories may be renamed and used differently if desired For example the category named Geology could be renamed to Surface Water and tables such as Catchments Surface Water Monitoring Locations Rivers etc could be organized under it Placing tables under any one of these categorie
197. defined as a foreign key a pick list will automatically be created for it based on values in the primary key in the parent table As such any list created following the steps outlined in this section will be overridden Linked Fields The Properties of linked fields can be modified through an interface provided in the Template Manager Clicking any of the fields in the Linked Fields set activates an interface similar to the one shown in the following figure 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 122 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Template Manager Demo Project 149 E 2 Ioj x Environmental metric Es m Database structur Linked Fields Settings Description E Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soll Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event fw Parameter Sample fw Parameter_ Result l Sample ID Chemical Name gt Result Yalue Result Unit e ven Reporting Detection Limit ves Sampling Precision E eS Fraction Code Be Analysis Method 2 Qualifier Outlier z Comment Database setting Parameter field name Johemical name Value field name resul value 0 Unit field name En Unit category Concentration HA Wiew sethings Parameter held name Chemical Mame e Get names from list E Value field name ResutVaue 00 Unit field name Rest Unit SS Default value oo XI XI XI XI KI Meteorology Divers Diver Channels Diver Data Mining E xploration Geophysics Well History User Categor
198. defined in the Cross Section Editor x Stay on top W Site maps EY HGAZD vee A Surfaces Na Cross Sections Data Elf a ALE Stations EA Interpretations E E BE H E CC ES Setting A Mame Emas A M o Visible wf Ar rent Color NX C Mier 20 60 BoxVisible Iw Box Depth 206 E BoxColor Sets the label attributes e Live Update Apply The entire cross section may be set to Visible or hidden from view The Label Properties allow you to modify the following settings Visible turns cross section labels on off Text Color changes text color Text Size changes text size Box Visible turns the outline box on off Box Depth changes the thickness of the label Box Color changes the label background color O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 393 13 6 2 Stations Display Settings Under the Stations node there will be a list of the Hydro GeoAnalyst stations which are El Stay on top I Ff Stations o Ex oy GBS LY GE 23 A GB 34 Interpretations H E BE a CC He DD Ey Seating Pb Name GB 24 ERES i Cll involved in the selected cross section Individual stations may be selected and set to Visible or hidden Station label properties can be modified in the Station Label Properties options under the Project node 13 6 3 Layer Interpretation Settings Under the Interpretations folder there will be three separate sub folders one fo
199. dels If the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a Special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 The Interpolator Options window for the Kriging method is shown in the following figure while each of the settings parameters is described below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services aa Hydro GeoAnalyst Help k interpolator Options Use Log Iriepolator Restici blin Value C Restict War Vake Value Min Walue Mas Aea Min gq hee Emo limit Ponts per Block along lt Block size along Y in ponts for block kriging has radis Min radus West radius Angel Angle Anales Y Bngmgbips SE Mean dal A Waiable Trend estimate Eslimabe vanable 7 02 mii i Nugget cantant A Us Vanograms Least Bashing Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X_Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Xdirection Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting is useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpo
200. desc soil type 7 GBA 8 6 5 Coarse Gravel Coarse Gravel 7 GBA 6 5 26 Fine to med sand Medium Sand f GBS 26 52 Gravel Gravel 7 GBA 52 69 Fine sand Fine Sand 7 6B07 69 1606 5ilty clay Silt 8 6808 0 4 3 Co0a4rse Gravel Coarse Gravel 38 6B68 4 3 17 Fine to med sand Medium Sand 8 6808 17 48 Gravel Gravel 38 6B68 48 66 Fine sand Fine Sand 38 6868 66 94 511ty clay Silt 38 68508 94 166 511ty to Fine Sand Sand NOTE lt is recommended that you have a header in the first row of your source file to simplify data mapping in Step 2 The method of selecting a data source mainly depends on the type of the data source There are two options Specify Import File Name quick and easy for text files spreadsheet and MS Access Database data sources on a local or network machine OR Build a Connection String to a file using the standard Universal Data Link UDL properties dialog More appropriate for data sources on a server or network computer Specify Import File Name To specify a file directly select the radio button beside the Specify Import File Name option then click on the al Open file button to load the following dialog import File Ei Eg Look ir El My Computer 3k Floppy 4 E Soft Fz J E J D E lt Removable Disk H File name Test Files of type Ms Access mdb a Cancel Test teh cs tab asc Excel ls Select the appropriate f
201. dify the line symbol and label properties as shown below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 201 Settings Mapping Mame test Visible True Width 1 Color MA Red Style Sold El Marker Visible False Font Microsoft Sans Serf 8pt Font color MM Black Symbol Triangle Color B Blue Size 4 4 Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Visible show hide the markers Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify the color Size Set the size of the markers along the line Multiplier select a field that contains a multiplier value use this to apply a multiplier factor to all result values on the plot Bar Color Schema This option allows you to define advanced bar color settings for bar chart plots When this option is loaded the Bar Chart Color Settings dialog will display shown below NOTE This dialog will only be available after you have specified Bar as the Series Type in the Settings tab 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 22 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help EX Bar Chart Color Settings et E ee xj Define Color Settings Graduated Color C Classification Select a field that contains the classification r Min O Max 00 Number of Classifications E z 00195 1 1 1995 H GEER NES 05 01 1995 571 1995 E 070A1935
202. ditable Select the polygon or line whose vertex will be linked with another vertex Click the Link Vertex option from the Edit menu or click the button from the toolbar Click on the desired vertex Source vertex that will be linked with another one the color of the vertex changes to green to indicate it has been selected Move the mouse cursor to the desired destination vertex to which the previously selected vertex will be linked The mouse cursor will change to a red square outline when a vertex is identified Click on this red square and the vertices will be linked 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 333 The Linked Vertex will turn orange to indicate that the vertex is linked and shared by two or more polygons or lines NOTE Link Vertices option is activated only if there are at least two objects on the layer Once two vertices are linked they behave as a single vertex Remove Links The Remove Links option allows for separating previously linked vertices To use this option Select the interpretation layer containing at least two polygons or lines whose one or more vertices are linked Make this layer editable Click the Remove Links option from the Edit menu or click the ye button from the toolbar Click on one of the linked vertices in the selected polygon linked vertices are colored orange Upon clicking on a linked vertex the vertex will change back to blue color to indicate that t
203. do bI 4874030 00 43 Goss Baga ES 4214000 00 4 Viena Sones PRA i D36232 4814281 80 dd HE Cruselabe t 4 3 bry a a 401417970 BAT klap Projects 53606576 481432020 A tal Css Secsons GE 53596034 461425130 324 HI View A ART Se oh R 30 RIBES g5 aa To Station Group all Stations Plows 160 40 Staion Data __ _ aa Hai dwl PATA j 08 05 a Daa Category El Wel Gonsinaion i A 3 Crting Protocol Camng Screen Arruda Fil Montonrg Porte Abandonment Wesbay Ports a j E Fromm Tarmi Filg Type End Das lo a E mje P j Aniar seal Genbonite 3 2700 L000 Backi Cuminga 300 Falles pack Pea Stone E EI EE E A EE E E HAT 0 000 FAAKKI cru geal Bankini 100 000 Bnei Comings 100 4 i m Kows 10 Ready o 2 1 6 Project Tree Tab The project tree lists the following items Station Groups Station Data Queries Time Series Plots Crosstabs Borehole Logs Map Projects Cross Sections 3DView Reports O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 31 Hydro GeaAnalyst Beta Demo Pre se Modules 9 Date Project Tree ah ihi a a Collapse Expand Station Groups Station Data Queries Time Seres Plots A Crosstabs a ae Borehole Logs ER Map Projects x Cross Sections 3D Views Reports These items may be part of any project Each item is organized as a branch in the tree view with one or more items under each branch By selec
204. e f Station Group Quere Data Query Select a Quer Toc Exceeds 325m E Description Location H Station Name Geologic Description Well Construction Soll Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event MiningExploration Geophysics Well History Source Condition Project hal Design SOL View Previevs 1 GEQ 2 GEU2 3 GB03 4 GB04 o GBOS E GEDE 7 GEO 8 GB08 3 GB09 10 GE10 11 6811 12 GB12 13 GB13 14 1614 15 GB15 16 GB16 17 GB17 lo GBS 19 6813 20 GB20 21 GB21 00 507 0906023942 20 565971 6930292 80 5481 372487996 00 5609553663063 20 5996300063504 00 5037073 r 20065 80 5456881 242797 00 5691 857577891 00 557 5320604261 20 5616076993997 40 550964509041 00 561 3306964765 20 5576699978039 20 567 2292095427 20 554 7642005526 20 5574207547192 80 5469026865231 0 Sooo 320 6244 80 561 3609731597 20 559577967353 30 561 360973199 43 4 492002 5613 45 4 74494352 79544 45 47 F041 are eda 43 477 7916710676 45 47030062492 45 40755456 0094 45 4700723460092 45 4751443604377 45 4821142327003 43 4757 1916 76957 45 4624596079935 45 4012773610372 45 470136650624 45 4803200569183 45 4840015977549 45 4054671503069 4347072623014 45 4560650237265 45 4770920697195 45 4026569074025 45 4770920697195 Advanced lO x SELECT t0 1d 0 name Dx tO Melevation toc FROM Station 45 t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON 0 10 PStation SID WHERE tO to
205. e lithology al Soll Description Field soil type w Table description Field description ote Requires a depth interval dependent table with at least two depth field named trom and to with type double one material specification held with type string This window contains several tabs Lithology Drilling Casing Screen Filling Hydrogeology Water Levels Pump For each category provide the table and the field that stores the patterns to be used in all the graphical displays For example in the Lithology tab select a table which contains the Lithology information for your project then select a field from this table which contains the Soil Description information The information provided in this window will be used when displaying profile diagrams in Hydro GeoAnalyst The geological data and the corresponding patterns will also be displayed in the cross section editor and in the 3D Explorer Only tables with the following parameters can be displayed in this dialog Lithology Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING soil_type O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 113 Drilling Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING method Casing Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING ex material If it s desired to
206. e Finish button and the converted report will be displayed in the runtime designer Once all desired modifications are done to the report it can be saved using the procedure discussed earlier The final report can be visualized by clicking on the Report Preview on the toolbar 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 430 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 15 Appendices Appendices 15 1 Appendix A Project Files and Directory Structure An HGA project consists of many different files and folders related to the different components within HGA Please refer to the information below to determine what data is stored in which folder Project Folder Project voh is a text file and contains the information on the connection string to the HGA project such as SQL server name database catalog name etc Project voh bak is a backup of the vbh file Project vox is a text file and contains the geotransformation settings of the project Map Subfolder The map folder contains all of the shapefiles associated with the map project In the root you will find MapProjectName VMP This is an XML file that contains details on the map project such as the projection system renderers settings cross section lines intersections etc Each map project has a unique VMP file Selection When you create a new map layer from an HGA station group or selected stations a new points shapefile is created and saved in this directory i e boreholes shp bor
207. e current supported language is T SQL SQL 92 standard other dialects such as SQL 99 PL SQL Watcom SQL are not supported Option 1 Select Server and Database If the Select Server and Database radio button is selected you will be prompted for a Server name and a Database name You must specify a server in order for a database to be created As mentioned earlier this may be any computer located on your network LAN which has a 2012 Schlumberger Water Services o Hydro GeoAnalyst Help MS SQL Server 2005 Express installation or WHI SQL Express If you do not have a network connection only your computer name will appear in the list of servers e g Computer_Name W Hl Choose a server from the Server list at the top of the dialog After the Server is selected HGA will automatically scan the Server for valid SQL databases These databases will then appear in the combo box beside Database If there is an integrated login for the server check the box beside Windows NT Integrated Authorization If a unique password and ID are required de select this option and enter the Windows User Name and Password for the Server computer This will allow HGA to automatically log on to the Server each time you modify the database residing on the Specified machine Note If you cannot see your local instance of SQL Express when creating a new project or opening an existing project please refer to Appendix F Frequently Asked Quest
208. e 3D Explorer the scene configuration you have at that moment will be automatically saved as Default When HGA 3D Explorer re opens this project it is opened with the Default scene configuration Any other user defined configuration can be loaded by pressing the Sa Load Scene Configuration button and selecting it from the presented list 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 375 E Setting E Background color Title Text color Text size Text color AAA O Elsie EA ES EX Text size PA P Ellegends ES Text color W Live Update Apply Background color sets the image background color By default the Background color of the display window is black Title Text color sets the color of the Project title text Text size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen size Axis Text color sets the color of the Title text Text size sets the size of the Axes labels as a fraction of the total screen size Line color sets the color of the axes lines NOTE For printing it may be helpful to change the background color to white and the axis color to black Legends Text color sets the color of the Legend text 13 4 2 Resetting Options The currently viewed scene position can be reset to the Default Setting by selecting Edit Reset scene position from the top menu bar or by clicking on the Ne Reset Scene Configuration button in the toolbar NOTE The Reset op
209. e cross section line will be used for the cross section name Use Existing Polyline You can create a cross section line from an existing polyline layer To do so follow the steps below Right click the desired line segment and select Convert to Cross Section Line from the pop up menu CrossSection Line E Mame ae Butter 200 meters Description Enter description here LIE Cancel Specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section stations which lie within the buffer distance will all be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance is projected out perpendicular to the cross section line Click Ok to accept the line settings The Select Station Layer dialog will display Select the appropriate station layer from the dropdown list box and click Ok Select Station Layer x Select Statian Layer The following message will display O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 323 x gt L amp Do you want to create cross section ABr Click Yes to open the cross section in the Cross Section editor This will load the cross section editor For more details on creating cross sections you may refer to Chapter 12 Cross Section Editor Modify Buffer Distance To modify the buffer distance of a cross section line e Select the
210. e dialog will appear FormAddPlotLine X Mame Line type Formula BestFit BestFit Type Std Deviation ll Source Series Ca Pernod 2 Ok Cancel Enter a line Name at the top of the dialog this name will appear on the plot The following Line Types are available e Formula e Best Fit Best Fit is the default line type when selected the following settings are available Best Fit type select from Std Deviation Moving Average or Exponential Moving Average Source Series select the data source series to which the line should be applied Period enter a period value When the Formula line type is selected the following settings will be available FormAddPlotLine I x Name Line type Formula C BestFit Formula Type Constant Source Series Ca Constant Walue o Uk Cancel Formula type select from Constant Exponential Logarithmic or Inverse Source Series select the data source series to which the line should be applied Constant Value When a Constant Formula Type is selected enter a constant value for the location of the line This will result in a straight line drawn on the plot Click OK when you are finished to draw the new line on the plot The line series will appear in the tree under the selected plot The line settings can be modified as described below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 210 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Line Settings When a line is selec
211. e et Die Seale j Data hase He elp ITEA a ta Vat Sed BO Mh nList Station Gata Data Query fw Well Profile 208 ca lapse Expand Wd 4 ju ofdd p GE SES T Tabon Groups mna 34 15 cea Sabor Dala Name na Dissenphor AE aj Geologas Descripbon fol ao fa GED ul Wel Consinsci n Sal Testing ite Vel Consinichon ji i pA Er aia Col i Sed Sampling 56 03 sd Testing ype Description Consis lency Ssucture ASTM Descriptor Color ns Ea Crd 1 i j Meorfoing Even GR 05 A pirg IA m lla EN il T Ja Hardin Ever E ee ee _A _ A 2222 A A AAA l i Ming Exploration GE 06 dr Explora el Course Gravel Heuuhyrica B Geia j Ena do mas Weal History A A a Mel History E las E Uee Category Sra e A aia PE 34 Guanes GES 50 38 EaD Fine Sand Fina sand 2 Tone Seiat Fiai GE 10 EIR 7100 00 at a Ev cl la A Crossisba Eei L a L pipro AA Geer Mag Project ET E aj a a Keb E 4011 i E Haale G p ooo m m DO D a 00 aca T p p e p a p a p a p Ber Pal e J De e Ga 6 0 chy oa Gey Pe SP to tul a bl Ba es ES us wh ie ie Be Gab k 1 y T P T aol oo oa caia A AAA A A de Ll dal po 1 pol ao qa a a aj eo ony 4 on a TZ Ready After a Data Category has been selected the appropriate tables and fields belonging to this category will be displayed in the Station Data tab The following is a complete list of the data categories provi
212. e fields that will serve as a Foreign key in each 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a Hydro GeoAnalyst Help table An example is shown below Template Manager Demo Project Be IOl x Ernvironmental metric a FR Database structur Database Settings J Description W Geologic Description a idle A M Well Construction Description e Drilling Protocol W Casing Sic Screen 7 screen_id w from w to wv Diameter v screen_lype T able relationship Slot Number Table iz parent to a Table Foreign key 22 J Monitoring Points Screen id 3 Al screen id Y Abandonment T 7 I Soil Testing W Soil Sampling IY Monitoring Event Table iz child to E Ming ion M Geophysics station station station e Well History J User Category View setting pa Mame Screen BxaQEe lJ A Last Changed on 10252070 11 08 42 4M lose Help The number of fields that need to be selected as a foreign key depends on the number of fields making up the primary key in the current table In tables where the primary key consists of only one field the cell where foreign keys are to be entered displays a combo box with the list of all fields in the selected table that have similar properties to the primary key in the current table Only one field from the list can be selected as a foreign key In cases where the primary key is composed of two or more fields a button is shown in the cell where the foreign key is to be entered and clicking on
213. e in the HGA data layer select this option and click on any station An example taken from the Demo project is provided below Map Project Demo Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help A SELLA A O x 5 hx of y acolle 143x3a20 4 200 F BHLP 67 GB 44 All Stations o BHLP Template ii CrossSectionLine5 Y qe Lilo 2 Boreholes Ja o AirPhoto_BW_ar bm p xl Coarse q AirPhoto_Color_ar b p xl Water Courses xl Contour Lines xl Airports 1 xl Major Railroads xl Urban Areas a x Grasslands Boulder xl Croplands xl Layer Informati Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 44 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N 535 162 4 813 762 11 10 359 f i Trees a q X bo N Pe 4 EN s Ey From the top of the BHLP viewer select the template from the combo box These templates are defined in the main HG Analyst window under the Borehole Logs node For more information see Borehole Log Plotter section O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 315 11 2 6 Select This menu provides options for selecting or de selecting stations on the selected layer in the Map project Typically this involves stations from the Hydro GeoAnalyst project Once the station s data points are se
214. e in the tree 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 162 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Right mouse click on this query and select Execute To see desired data from a selected table Select a Station Group from the combo box and any table from the Database Tables combo box Press the 2 Execute Query button at the bottom of the window and the grid will be populated with all records which satisfy this query For example select the Boreholes station group and view all Lithology data that belong to this group In addition through this interface you may delete all records from a selected table This is useful if you mistakenly import numerous records to the wrong table To delete records from a selected station group and table Select a Station Group from the combo box and any table from the Database Tables combo box Press the Execute Query button at the bottom of the window and the grid will be populated with all records which satisfy this query X Press the __ Delete button Note Use this feature with caution as records will be permanently deleted from your database 6 8 Exporting Query Results Data Query results may also be sent to the Map Manager or to a Report The data displayed in the grid may be exported to an external file or to the Report Manager Right mouse click on the grid and select Export Grid or use the menu command Project Export Grid and the following dialog will appear Save As El ES Save
215. e inserted at any location at any time 12 3 4 2 Drawing Model Interpretation Layers Before starting to draw model interpretation layers please ensure that you have defined the model layer settings explained in the previous section You will see that the top of layer 1 ground surface is drawn in automatically for each new cross section This layer can be modified by moving it through its existing vertices adding new vertices at desired locations or deleting existing vertices To draw model layers follow the directions below Activate the Model Interpretation Layer in the Layer Manager Select the Line draw button N from the toolbar As soon as this option is selected the following Model Layers dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 355 select Model Line y x o o Ode Name Description Pate Topography Topography Topography Laver DO Slice 2 BottLayert O Slice 3 EottLayerz n ua on 2 Slice 4 BottLayers Edit OF Cancel FJ Help In this dialog choose the desired model layer by selecting the radio button from the first column in this grid Each model layer may be selected and assigned only once Interpretation layers that are already drawn in the cross section are colored in orange and are not selectable Click OK to continue Place the mouse cursor at the left boundary at the desired depth of the intended model layer when the mouse cursor becomes cl
216. e manually drawn and interpreted Start the interpretation by selecting the layer type from the layer manager Choose from Geologic Hydrogeologic or Model Each of these is explained below Hydrogeologic interpretations can be copied from geologic interpretations As such it is a better practice to first perform geologic interpretations of the cross section 12 3 1 Loading Surface Layers Surface layers e g DEM Surfer GRD in a Map Project can be used to generate a detailed topography model line for a cross section Note A surface layer can only be defined for a cross section line when the cross section is being created in the Map component of Map Manager Please refer to the Surface section of the Map Manager chapter for information on how to import a surface layer into a Map Project Also please see the Create Cross Section section of this chapter for information on how to create a cross section When a surface layer is present in a map project you will be prompted to select a surface layer when creating your cross section line The following dialog will display Select Surface Ej Select Elevation Surface optional OF Cancel This dialog contains all of the surface layers currently present in your map project Select a 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a50 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help surface from the dropdown list box and click Ok to create the cross section Be sure to select a surface layer that cover
217. e options are shown below Editar Labels Fiulers VerticalExag 2creen W Level Intersecting Grid Screen Symba Water Level Sumbo Gap between tells m H p a and Screen Pixel 3 et size 12 ET Fill Color mz Color Fill Pattern O Haz Outline Yes 4 Y Outline Color O Outline width fi Cancel Help In this dialog there are options for the view settings color style etc for both the screen and the water levels The Gap between Well and Screen controls the distance between the station and where the screen is placed The larger this Gap value the further away the screen will be from its respective station Intersecting Tab During a cross section interpretation knowledge of other interpretations is essential In this dialog you can define display options for intersecting cross sections 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 343 Editor Labels Fiulers Vertical Exag Screen WLevel Intersecting Grid view ntersecting While Editin Intersecting Layer Symbo Outline Color ie Outline Style A width in Pixels E H e Model Layer I Geology Layer e HudroGeclagy Laver Specify the color and line style under the Intersecting Layer Symbol frame In the View Intersecting While Editing frame specify the view options for different interpretation types By default all modules will be active The intersecting cross sections will be vis
218. e selected object To add a vertex Activate the desired cross section interpretation make it editable Select an object that is a polygon or a line depending on the active interpretation type Click on the button or select the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Repeat the last two steps to add more vertices at other locations on the selected object Delete Vertex Provides an option to delete a vertex from the selected object To delete a vertex Activate the desired cross section interpretation Select an object that is a polygon or line Click on the Ex button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be deleted the mouse cursor will change to an X Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object Repeat the last two steps to delete more vertices from the selected object Link Vertex The Link Vertex option allows for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines It is intended to assist in filling in gaps between adjacent polygons or lines thus creating continuous interpretations The end result is that polygons or lines will be able to share a common linked vertex or vertices To Link Vertices on polygons or lines Select the desired interpretation layer and make it e
219. e the Expression Editor to create an expression property for a field Expression Editor Expression editor E Oj xj Operators Functions El Operators ag Arithmetic H Comparisons H Boolean H Strings Hl Other H chemical_name Concentration i result unit OF Cancel Line 1 Column 1 The Expression Editor allows you to construct logical and arithmetic expressions for determining values for both facts fields and dimension fields in your cross tab report The editor provides a list of source fields from the data query and various Operators and mathematical Functions You can define the expression by simply arranging the source fields and operators functions into the space below using the drag and drop with the mouse Once the expression has been defined click Ok The following buttons are available in the Expression editor Check Expression Use this button to Verify that the expression does not contain any syntax errors Open Expression Use this button to Open an existing expression from a text file z Save Expression Use this button to Save an expression in text file format FieldType Assign a field type to a field Choose from Fact Only Dimension only and Both SortOrder Assign a field data sorting order Choose from Ascending or Descending 7 1 2 Style Sheet The Style Sheet tab in the DataCube wizard allows you to define the appearance properties for the crosstab report
220. e upper right corner of the dialog Click on the Refresh button E to refresh the dialog with information from the selected data source A list of tables if any are available will appear in the Tables combo box Select the Table that contains the list to be imported Select the Field column in this table which contains the Values for the list Select the Field column that contains the Description if necessary The list items for this field will appear in the preview frame in the lower half of the window Once satisfied with the content of the list click on the OK button to start importing the list In the List Editor window press the m Save button to sawe the list items Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager in Chapter 13 for more details Editing a List The following editing options are available in the List Editor Delete a list item by selecting it and pressing the xl Delete button 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Move the list item by selecting it and dragging it up or down to a new position in the list Edit the list item by selecting it and making necessary changes a Once the editing is complete click the Save button to save changes Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager The List Editor can also be launched from the Template Manage
221. e window The List Editor extracts all unique entries that have already been entered if any into the current database under the selected field Once this is completed a verification dialog will appear displaying the number of entries returned for this field Click Yes to import these values to the list Edit the list as desired by adding or removing items Click the m button to save the list Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager in Chapter 13 for more details Importing Lists The list items may also be imported from an external data source To do so Using the procedure described above load the List Editor and select the appropriate table and field for which a list is to be imported Click on the a Import from external database button at the bottom of the window The following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Import List from External DB l x Data Source Connection string C Program Pes HG Analyst ProjecteDemo_Projectummport adl raf Table Mame field Description field Total Items fl The Data Link Properties dialog will appear Select the desired data source For help using the Data Link Properties please refer to Appendix C Click OK on the Data Link Properties dialog to close Click the Data source button in th
222. ected station e g time varying concentrations at a single borehole over various depths the BHLP will automatically use the first result value in the query If using another value is desired then the Data Query should be modified with the appropriate conditions 10 4 2 Add Well Construction Column Next add another column type to the BHLP by right clicking on the Design node and selecting Add Column In this example Well Construction has been added to produce the design shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample ioj xj Select Station m r m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 53621269 487 4030 00 323 50 324 50 EES Design FES Lithology E Li gt bo a S miooo S500 a CO 0000 UN J Caption Well Construction Fine Sand e Live update Apply E W Close Export Y Print Y Help 10 4 3 Add Plot Columns To add a plot column to your BHLP right click on the Design node and add a Plot column Once the Plot column has been added the Plot Series options must be defined To add a plot series right click on the Plot column in the Design tree Alternately you can 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 252 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help click on the El Add button on toolbar after having highlighted Plot in the Design tree Select the Add Plot Series option as shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample Select Station m Y m Elevation m T
223. ed Ex Delete Vertex button allows a vertex to be deleted from the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature is active only when an applicable object type is selected Zoom In button allows zooming in on the map window Draw a rectangle in any direction around the area you wish to zoom in to Po Y Lal _ _ Full Extent button restores the map view to the full extent of the map s coordinates Zoom Out button allows zooming out from the map window Pan button allows panning the current map view left right up or down Previous Extent button allows restoring the map view to the previous zoom extent 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 265 p gt Select Single button allows individual objects such as stations to be selected This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Next Extent button advances the map view to the next zoom extent Select In Rectangle button allows selecting all stations within a rectangle that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager mA Select In Polygon button allows selecting all stations within a polygon that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager
224. efly described in the following sections The following modules are for the purposes of Analysis and Visualization e Cross Tab Query e Time Series Plot e Borehole Log Plotter e Map Manager e Cross Section Editor e 3D Explorer Additionally HGA has a Report Designer module which allows you to push your data analysis and visualizations to a Report template A brief description of each module is provided in the following section while detailed discussions are presented in later sections 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 1 2 1 Template Manager If your database needs cannot be satisfied through one of the database templates that are provided with HGA you may use the Template Manager to customize your database structure The Template Manager is provided to handle such tasks as editing and importing database schemas for your project databases It provides a set of categories that allows organizing your database tables Existing database structures can also be imported using the Template Manager HGA supports virtually any database structure including those with multiple levels of relationships among two or more entities This provides an unparalleled flexibility for projects that may have variable needs For example the project database structure may need to satisfy requirements of the United States Environmental Protection Agency US EPA or Ontario s Ministry of the Environment MOE For these and m
225. eful in storing data such as chemistry results e g chemical names result values and result units If such fields are linked you may change the result unit for any record and automatically see the result converted to the new unit This avoids the problem of changing result units without converting the result values to the appropriate unit At times it may be necessary to link only two fields For example when storing depth related data with variable units an additional field to store the unit for each record is required In those circumstances the two fields can be created as linked fields enhancing data integrity C The Set Primary Key button is activated only when a table is active and receiving the focus lt allows defining the primary key for the table If selected a separate dialog as shown below will be displayed where one or more fields can be selected to form the primary key for the table 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 115 Set ae a form desc soll tyoe pattern consistency structure matgec colour odor formation name formation writ moisture camment i 000 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 Delete duplicate records DR Lancel Ed Help Ec The Apply Changes button allows you to save all changes made to the current user template The Move Down button moves any selected table or field one level down in the Database Browser tree view Tables and fields will be displayed in Hydro GeoAn
226. eholes shx boreholes dbf Data When you create a new map layer from an HGA data query or a map project a new points shapefile is created and saved in this directory e g Chem_Exceedences shp Chem_Exceedences shx Chem_Exceedences dbf Plumes Subfolder The plumes folder contains all of the files associated with the plume data once the 3D interpolation has been conducted on a query The created nc files are used when viewing the plumes in the 3D Explorer Surfaces Subfolder The surfaces folder contains all of the gridded surfaces GRD files created in the map project by interpolating the current layer The gridded surfaces can also be used in the 3D Explorer V3D Subfolder The V3D folder contains all of the 3D Explorer project files Any saved scene configurations will also be located in this folder Name 3XS This is the 3D Explorer project file XML file format BMP any map image sent from the map project will be saved in bitmap format bmp BPW any bitmaps tagged with georeference details 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices 431 XSection Subfolder The xsection folder contains all of the cross section information from your project In the xsection folder there is a subfolder for each cross section created in the project i e AA BB etc The subfolders contain all the shapefiles associated with the cross section XInter The XInter subfolder contains the shapefiles from the map project for
227. elect the field for which a list is desired then click the Edit List button to load the List Editor This will allow for creating editing a list for the selected field The following figure depicts an instance of the List Editor 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select a Fiel Tablez geologic description lithology Fields List teme soil type Mame Include Picture 12 E Description colour Color comment consistency Consistency form desc Description formation name formation unit matgsc ASTM Descriptor moisture odor Odor structure Structure to_ to ls ls ls ls Es Es JEs JEJE Es Es Es Es EJES Es ls lis A ERA nil o ni oF x m Total Items 46 Ok Cancel EJ Help The List Editor wndow contains the following parts The Tables combo box Allows you to select the table containing the field for which a list is to be created or modified Fields Allows you to select a field for which a list is to be created or modified List Items Displays the list for the selected field if available Each list item may have a Name Image and Description Adding Lists Manually To create the list for a particular field follow the steps below Select the Table and Field for which a List is to be created Click the El Add button to add a list item In the first column enter a Name for the list item If necessa
228. emplate Designer The MetaData tab stores path to the template file as well as some additional information needed for validation purposes Now you can populate the Parameter Sample and Parameter Result worksheets with the appropriate data You will notice that there are comments on the column headers to help you understand what the appropriate data for that particular column is a a a Home insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View QuickOhecker Acrobat Team Gg 5 x dq EDOTemplate a Ta Ei y Data had not yet been validated valrdate z Bocki Microsoft Excel iE Generate Headers Mo error pm Hei Prericius Citar CD Details nmor Emor Fomatting and Submit Templaie Verdication Submeiiion E zz se gt i Book Microsoft Excel Home insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review view QuickOhecker Acrobat Tear yg 5 x q EDD Template a Ta i a Date has not pet been validated ag Generate Headers Mao errors e Heat Previous Clear Vabdate E Details Enor Error Formatting and Submit Temple Wenfbtabon Submeisbon Oa fu Station Mame E P o c D o F G LH 1 Station Name Sample ID Chemical Name Result Value Ra Each valve must be a number Detection Limit 2 lu ik 5 Once you have populated the worksheets with your data you can select the Validate amp Submit button The Quick Checker will validate all data in all the worksheets If there are any errors where
229. enenes 360 EMI ON Sut 362 3D Explorer 364 ADOUETHS Interact tad tota 364 POSHIONINO ING P ANC ia as 366 Navigation TOM a eerie eee 367 ROtatIna the I AG iaa ao 367 Animation CONTO Sinto nat dad ane Oaaandenvdatenvieutiveaus i A pues 368 PINE ANIM AO Mirta a ai aE rdi s 369 Plume BOWS ET miena rae a Ea a E E a dada 370 Recording Animation to AVE escandalo aa UTA AEE ES 371 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 8 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 4 10 Chapter XIV 3 4 DISplay Se UNOS acia ion eee acia 372 Default S6 UNG Srna a A dios 374 RES ttndg OP GIONS lui o cau eas Ud edna ceccueveaceananiae 375 Project Display Se CLINGS sacs cause cee iaa 375 AXIS Display Seng S sss aoe esas ea sc a ec rend aac eee ceed E readers 377 Sitemap DIS play Settings ici a A A A EEA 378 Surfaces Display SO HIMNOS lt a 380 Plumes Display Seti ii 382 ISOS UE TACOS di 382 COIOE Maps aiciata curate cone diia 385 SONNE MAPS A A A AAA A AE 387 Color Paleta a is 390 Color Legend tina az 391 Cross Section Data Display SettidgQS cocococococcccocococococanacnncororanananarannnnnrararnrnrnranananenes 391 Cross Sec ON SC U N OS a aa O 392 Stations Display Settings A e lot oido 393 Layer Interpretation Settings occcconccncococccncoconcnncononnnncononnnnronnnnnncnnnnn nacen nn nrrnn ana rrnnnnnnrrnnnnnn cerrara rrrnnnnrrrnanannns 393 Creating Slices and Cross SectiO0NS ococococcccccconcocococococncanannnnnrararannraranannnrnrarnrnrnrananan
230. ent of the columns and fields Click on the button to expand the full results Click on the button to collapse the view for an overview of the results Using conventional drag and drop you can shift columns to the left or right or rows up or down or move fields from rows into columns or from columns into rows Right click on a field header to access additional options These options are contextual and affect only the field that was selected Accent Sort results in ascending order Decent Sort results in descending order Collapse All Collapse the view Expand All Expand the view Align Field Width Automatically align a field width to the widest display value within the field Move to facts Move a field into facts Move to rows Move a field into the rows dimension Move to columns Move a field into columns dimension Move to ignore Ungroup a field from pivot table calculation Group settings Open the Groups Editor widow see below Groups Editor O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Crosstab Queries 173 The Groups Editor window shown below allows you to combine multiple field items and display them as a single field item in the cross tab report For example if your crosstab report contains a countries field you may wish to group its field items by continent e g North America Europe South America etc i Groups editor E X Group settings lema El Europe United States France El
231. eographic coordinate systems This is required for the following two reasons Hydro GeoAnalyst stores all spatial data i e station x y coordinates in the GCS WGS 1984 projection system lat and long coordinates When data is imported Hydro GeoAnalyst converts the spatial data into GCS WGS 1984 coordinates Likewise when data is displayed in HGA it converts the data from GCS WGS 1984 to the original projection system defined in the project settings In order for HGA to store and display your data correctly an appropriate geotransformation has to be defined In some cases it may not be possible to obtain certain geographic data in a coordinate system that is consistent with the rest of your project data In this case a geotransformation can be applied to express the data according to your project s coordinate system Note Currently Hydro GeoAnalyst does not support vertical elevation datum shifting Please ensure that your elevation data is consistent before importing into HGA Geotransformations can potentially occur in Hydro GeoAnalyst in any of the following scenarios e When station data is displayed in the main Hydro GeoAnalyst window e When data is imported into Hydro GeoAnalyst e When data is displayed in Map Manager e When data is imported in Map Manager e When a projection system is defined in the new project wizard As such you may be prompted to specify geotransformation settings in any of the aforementioned scenarios Conf
232. er importing large quantities of data points can take a very long time and may cause HGA to become unresponsive As such SWS does not recommend importing more than 20 000 data points at one time Starting the DTS The DTS can be used for both importing and exporting data In HGA the DIS may be launched as follows J F Project Import Data from the main menu or click on the Data Import button on the main toolbar 11 F Project Export Data from the main menu or click on the Data Export button on the main toolbar The DTS Export Process is explained in Exporting Data using the DTS on page 125 The first window in the DTS Import Process is shown in the figure below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 127 Data Transfer System Import al a JOj x Choose a Data Source Specii a data transter packag Package name A DR Description e Save changes to this DTS package Select data soure Specity import tile name 2 Build a connection string Hents Cancel IE In most cases the DTS Import procedure will include four steps Data Source Specify the source file and package options Data Mapping Map source fields to destination fields Station Related Settings Specify projection system and units for the new stations being imported Data Validation Validate the source data and provides an error analysis report Each step
233. er Default C Portrait Landscape Collate Printer Default Duplex PaperB ir Default Printer Cancel The Printer Settings section allows you modify the printing options Here you can select the paper size from the Paper Size dropdown list box You can manually specify the paper size by using the Width and Height vertical scroll bars The Orientation frame allows you to specify the paper orientation You may also choose to set the options for Collate Duplex and PaperBin by using the appropriate dropdown list box Selecting Printer Default for any of the printing options will assign the default setting of the selected printer for that particular print option 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NN Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Report Settings xl M Show Grid M Align Controls to Grid 4k Grid columns o ai 7 Grid rows Ruler Units C Inches 0 Centimeters Cancel The Grid Settings section allows you to modify the grid appearance of the designer window You can set the visibility of the grid by enabling disabling the Show Grid checkbox Selecting the Align Controls to Grid checkbox will automatically snap controls to the nearest grid column Set the number of Grid columns and Grid rows by using the appropriate vertical scroll boxes You can change the units of the ruler that appears above the designer window by clicking on either the Inches or Centimeters radio button Repo
234. er Services Map Manager 287 At the top of the dialog specify a Name for the renderer and select a Field Name for the renderer The Value Renderer dialog allows for detailed symbol and label rendering Use the Frequency for display value vertical scroll box to set the label display frequency You can manually specify value symbols and their corresponding labels by clicking in the desired symbol and label field Alternatively specify a default symbol and select the Default Symbol checkbox to apply the same symbol characteristics to each value Use the Ramp function to specify the color scheme and size for the symbols and click OK first to return to the Value renderer dialog click OK again to accept the settings Then also make sure the Visible box is checked and click OK to apply the renderer Label Renderer This renderer allows you to display various labels for the selected layer stations or contour map for example Label Renderer Mame Field Mame jw Allow Duplicates Fort i Spline Text Sample Text Iw Flip D Cancel Enter the Name for the renderer and choose the Field Name which will be displayed as a label Customize the settings as desired Please note that for numeric fields labels will be displayed using the precision defined in the Set Field Precision dialog box when the HGA data is being loaded into the map project For more information please see Load HGA Data Note Flip option applies o
235. er tree and click O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 223 the Add button again The Add a Plot Series window shown in the following dialog will open Add a Plot Series i X Plot Seres Type f Depth CO Interval Plot Propertie Label Description Category Time al Unit Mass Length Fumping Rate Conductivity Concentration Recharge Equivalent Concentration From this window you can define the Plot Series Type and select a plot Category and Unit to use The categories are based on the unit categories available in the current database template Enter a Label for the plot and click OK Depending on whether you selected Depth or Interval for your plot the Entities displayed in the Settings window will be slightly different 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 22 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Depth Interval A IntervalE ntities ES DepthEntities E ES Plot E ES Interval 25 DepthPlotEntities ES IntervalE ntities FE Plot E ES Plot E LO DepthPlotEntities ah xX 2A DataTable DataTable hi E TopEntit E DepthEntity Caption Top elevation Caption Depth Description Description Depth DataField bi DataField ll E Bottom ritity E ValueEntity Caption Bottom elevation Caption concentration Description Description DataField C ataField ll E YalueEntity Caption pressure Description D ataField hi In the first row of the table under the Name
236. ered in a particular fashion on the BHLP You must select a field from the casing table that is field type double and contains values for the well casing orders Screen BHLP Settings xj E E BHLP Well Construction ES well Construction J Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduci Appearanc Labe i Use Default Color E Bi Eon C Use Material Image Color Position he Draw Border Color E Fight Justify FRI Fa 2er orny Help Apply DF Cancel Under the Appearance frame select how to display the well screen Use Default color Use Material Image color use this option if your well screen materials were selected from a list defined in the list editor and each list item has a corresponding color Draw Border and Fill Full 2D View only use this option to apply a solid color to the well screen Under the Label frame define the text settings for the screen labels NOTE In order to see the well screens in the appropriate locations you must add and map the appropriate entities as explained below In the BHLP settings right mouse click and select Add Entity You may add and map any of the following entities Image use this option if you want to display an image of the well screen on the BHLP you must select a field from the screens table that contains an image Text use this option if you want to display a descriptive label of the
237. erger Water Services 12 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA is the most comprehensive and yet easy to use environmental data management system providing data validation analysis and visualization The HGA package integrates a list of flexible and customizable database structures used around the world complimented by state of the art tools for data interpretation statistical analysis GIS mapping data charting and two and three dimensional visualizations For most envronment related projects whether they are contaminated sites or municipal water supply projects there is often an abundance of data that has been collected over the years How many times have you had to sift through several paper reports for that one piece of information when compiling monthly summaries on a project Can you be sure that you have not misplaced a report or failed to mention an important piece of data The HGA package addresses these and many other needs in the industry The system enables you to create a project specific database or enhance and build upon your existing database It can collect all of your previous data and reports and consolidate them into a powertul relational database system that can be queried and referenced with ease HGA operates as a desktop application based on Microsoft SQL Server technology The package supports multiple user levels for controlled data management with structured
238. eric data with a specified number of decimal places e g 1 000 Scientific use this format to display numeric data in standard scientific notation e g 1 000E 0 For both the fixed and scientific formats you can specify the number of decimal places by using the Decimal places vertical scroll box 10 3 7 Picture Column 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 244 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 10 3 7 1 Settings BHLP Settings xX E ES BHLP Picture E Scale Iv Visible Column Options ae E Depth 2 E Interval E eds Pattern Symbol Description a ai Font L Uze numeric format Format General A Number of digits 7 ae Eal Width 21 100 Image Draw Mode Centerec Help Apply DOF Cancel The Picture column settings are shown in the above screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Picture node from the BHLP Settings window The Picture frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button The Pattern Symbol frame allows you to show hide the image pattern modify the Width and change the Image Draw Mode The Description frame allows you to show hide the description and modify the Text Font If you choose t
239. ernately you may select an index entry and then click the Display button to open the Help topic Search The Search tab is used to search the On Line Help documents for a word or phrase of interest Simply type the search word s or phrase s then press lt Enter gt or click the Display button Favorites You can add frequently accessed Help topics to a personal list of favorites which is displayed in the Favorites tab Once you have added a topic to your list of favorites you can access the topic by double clicking it Click Add to add the currently displayed topic to your favorites list Select a favorite and then click Remove to delete a topic from your favorites list 1 7 2 Hydro GeoAnalyst On line Help You can also find the Hydro GeoAnanlyst help online http www swstechnology com help hga 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 22 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help This online version of the Help can be updated more regularly than the help within the program itself so check it out for the latest updates to the documentation 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 24 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 2 2 1 2 1 1 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst The following topics will be discussed in this chapter Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts Introduction Station Types Stations Table Station Groups Data Categories Data Entry Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help Finally a de
240. ervices 102 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Selecting the Database Template for your project In this window you may select from a pre defined Database structure or create a new database structure for the project For your convenience there are several Database structures included with HGA which include the necessary tables for storing and managing environmental data These include SWS s own Environmental Database Template designed for groundwater data management expands U S EPA Regions 2 amp 5 standards Ontario s Ministry of Environment s MOE Water Well Information System WWIS Template designed for management of water well records and U S EPA Regions 2 amp 5 Envronmental Data Models designed for environmental data management All templates are available in both metric and imperial length units Once you select one of the existing Database structures you will see a list of the tables included with this template and the corresponding fields under the Database Structure Preview Take a few moments to review this database structure Next to create the project tables and proceed to the next step in the wizard Creating Projects in Existing Databases At the top of this window there is a list of Projects in the selected Database This option is only available if an existing database was selected in Step 1 lfso you may choose from the available HGA projects on this database and select a database template from an existing
241. ervices Using Hydro GeoAnalyst et Import Chemical Data Wizard Data Mapping Destination Category Table Map Source Fields to Destination Fields cei Event 7 Parameter Result Parameter Resut Resul Use Mame Type Mame Type Table Iw ne a E fete lire a M a AA E a T An a Required Fields lM Show parameter_sample fields lt 4 Back Newt gt gt Cancel Help After selecting the next button you may receive a message indicating that some station names were not found within the database You will have the option to append the stations to you station table or reject those stations and the data associated with those stations The project database does not include the following Station Marne s i Append this will add the Station Name s to the project database Reject this will ignore all data associated with Station Name s that are nok included i in the project database A E J ME result walue value Result Value DOUBLE aoe result 3 of records 31 And then you will receive a message indicating any sample ID s that are not in your database which will be added 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 62 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Confirmation The project database does not include the following Station sample_id The system will automatically add the Station sample_id 3 to the project database 29 2912162042007 eal eo 44 01 2007 Sa 9501_ 07202
242. ery to display any additional data that is important for your project for example chemical concentration information 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst pas Online Sharing E a Contaminant Queries max_btex_concentration Contaminant Queries PCE_Exceeds_10mg_per_kg_Depth_exceeds_10m Contaminant Queries Soil_chem_exceedences Contaminant Queries Soil_Plume_Data Contaminant Queries TCE_Exceeds_10_mg_per_kg Contaminant Queries TVOC_Exceeds_1000_ug_L Contaminant Queries tvoc_Exceeds_5000_ug_per_L Contaminant Queries VC_exceeds_1_mg_per_kg Water Level Queries avg_waterlevel_per_date Water Level Queries diver_data Water Level Queries max_water_level Water Level Queries wmod_head_observations Water Level Queries water_elevations_months Water Level Queries water_levels aquifertest_pumpingrates aquifertest_pumpingtest_water_levels Cross_Section_Interpretations Cross_section_model_interpretations cross_tab_example lithoelevations qc_lab_analysis select_for_deletion soil_desc_concatenate stations F Time_Series_Chart_Data Launch browser after publishing INGGOO CF 0088 IGE ooo The Maps tab allows you to select layers from any of the maps in your project that you wish to share Additionally any water level information for the points layers you select from the map will be included in the Online Share Y
243. es only from List by placing a check mark in the check box If the list items should be read only in the field then place a check mark in the box beside Read Only If necessary press the a Edit List button to load the List Editor to edit the list Press the Ec Save button to save the changes to the template and close The list items should now show up for the selected field column in HGA Fields that contain 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help a linked list will contain an arrow with a combo box on the right side of the field Simply click on this arrow to see the list items available for the field NOTE If you want to re use these lists in a new project you must save the current database template Then create a new project with this database template and the lists will be included For details on saving database templates see Chapter 13 Exporting the current template as a Database template 2 2 2 8 Time Series Plotter Enter topic text here 2 2 2 9 Crosstab Report This menu item loads the Crosstab query component where you can generate crosstab query reports from your existing data queries Ensure that you have a valid data query selected in the Queries node in the HGA browser before selecting this option For more details please see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries 2 2 2 10 3D Interpolation HGA 3D Explorer is now able to display and animate 3D volumetric plumes of one or more soil or grou
244. es depending on the currently active node Columns may be a scale interval lithology plot well construction or other features xl Delete button deletes the selected group column or plot series 2012 Schlumberger Water Services z6 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help E Refresh button updates the design and displays the preview of the current borehole log plot for the selected borehole Zoom in button allows you to select an interval to zoom in to and display a magnified portion of the BHLP Zoom out button returns to the original BHLP view 10 2 BHLP Default Settings There are several default view settings and properties that can be defined for the BHLP To load the BHLP Settings Right mouse click anywhere in the BHLP Viewer window and select Properties or Right click on Design in the Designer tree and select Show Settings The BHLP Settings window will appear similar to the following figure BHLP Settings J xj Default for All Columns Header Properties Column Properties ight Aut gt width 75 Well Construction Height Auto 41 EN j EES Plot Alignment Center Color E Jl Angle 0 Dept e Auto Color Fired Depth Fit width to page Print scale factor 1 fo 0 fit to report template Help Apply UE Cancel The Header Properties frame allows you to modify the default appearance of the column header for all BHLP columns The following settings can be modified
245. esigner Advanced Controls and Settings Types of Controls The runtime Report Designer allows you to add several types of controls to your reports These controls range from those that are currently shown on the toolbar to all controls that are present on your computer The types of controls that are provided on the toolbar can be grouped as follows Data Access Controls ADO data control Provides access to the database using information provided to it Only one ADO control can be added to a given report This control 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 413 can be added to the report by clicking on the Insert ADO Data control icon fi on the toolbar Data Display Controls Controls that can be used to display information that is either coming from the data source database or provided on the Report Designer The controls that fall into this category include Label Check box RTF Text Graphics Image Line Forms OLE objects Barcodes etc Page break Sub reports Adding Controls Except for ADO data control all controls can be added to the report in the desired section To add a control to a report select the desired control by clicking on the icon on the toolbar position the cursor at the desired location and click and drag to define the size of the control Depending on the selected control specific dialog boxes may be displayed requesting information Once the control is placed on the report its pro
246. esult value Type DOUBLE Rows iS Time 0 0 0 15 Likewise if a date is necessary for one of the Expression fields simply double click on the date field or press the Ban au a mini calendar will appear as shown below ES Query Builder Te E l O x xa ee f Station Group Quem Data Query Design SOL ViewsPreview aut Field Select a Query as id id E Chemistry Sample E Satin waa oe E Chemistry Results E E as y j Name station toc toc gt sie sample_code Cainea ON sample_date Enema e EN May 2004 June 2004 H result value result unit oun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat eoir pT 2 3 4 5 6 7 o 6 7 i i z fee reporting _detection_ltt ae 9 10 11 Be 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 U Operator po poet reads 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 OOOH a E po e 23 24 25 26 7 28 29 2 28 9 30 Interpreted qualifiers a H i start depth e i depth 5 Today 77172004 end_depth E Cancel Help gt resul comment sample_matrix_code fu sample_tbype_ code sampling_reason NE Ea Project Advanced Close H Help Field Mame chem_ Time 00 00 00 Select the appropriate date then click OK and the date will be added to the conditions NOTE To add the date to your query you can scroll through the calendar in increments of 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 154 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help months If the date you desire is too far in the past it ma
247. eters and groundwater characteristics Station attributes for a borehole include Station ID Site ID coordinates elevation depth date of drilling driller name method of drilling number of layers soil and rock classification used types of sampling split spoon soil samples static GW level etc Pumping Wells A pumping well is installed in a borehole and may be used for water supply or aquifer test analysis Station attributes for a pumping well include Well ID site ID coordinates elevation depth date of drilling driller name method of drilling number of casing intervals maximum casing diameter and type minimum casing diameter and type number of screened intervals screen diameter and type type of pump average productivity pumping rate etc Observation Monitoring Wells An observation well may be used to monitor groundwater levels and groundwater chemistry An observation well is installed in a borehole by casing the borehole and developing the well Station attributes for an observation well include Well ID site ID coordinates elevation well depth screen locations casing diameter and type number of screened intervals screen diameter and type water level measurements and groundwater chemistry analysis results Surface Water Observation Point This station type may be a point on a river or a stream equipped to take water samples and measure river discharge and water level Station attributes include Station ID
248. ethods of interpolation like Natural Neighbor and Kriging are recommended The Interpolator Options for the Inverse Distance Squared method is described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X_Nodes Number of grid nodes in the direction Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting is useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation process and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than otherwise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be as
249. ettings press the El Add button to add the mapped fields the values should then be displayed in the table at the bottom of the window To delete an existing 3D Plume simply click on the xI Delete button When you are finished click on the OK button HGA will create a 3D plume file in the Plumes sub directory for your project with the file name provided and the extension nc For example TVOC nc in the directory D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Plumes To display the plume please proceed to the instructions in Chapter 11 View 3D In addition HGA will save the gridded 3D results to a TXT file using the same file name and in the same Plume sub directory NOTE Currently there is no method of opening plume projects in the Interpolation tool to make modifications Therefore it is suggested that you save the data query so the 3D project can be quickly re created 2012 Schlumberger Water Services s Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 2 2 2 11 Borehole Log Plotter Enter topic text here 2 2 2 12 Map Manager This menu item loads the Map Manager The Map Manager can be used for creating and viewing site maps creating thematic and contour maps and defining cross section lines The button in the main toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 11 Map Manager 2 2 2 13 Cross Section Editor This menu item loads the Cross Section Editor This component can be used for defining and
250. f Nodes aMn 525200 0 Aimar 536225 9 40 535200 0 536225 3 H of Nodes iia de 4000 0 lax 401 4365 5 40 481 4000 0 481 4595 5 H of Nodes 2Min 232 83 Max 325 79 Interpolate using HGA Interpolation method Kriging Advanced Settings Interpolate log values OF Lancel Help In the 3D Interpolation window specify the various settings related to the grid size extents and data mappings 3D Plume Project Name Define the plume project name One plume project can contain multiple plumes e g for one or more contaminants Grid Region Define the various properties relating to the grid size X Value select a field to be used for the X axis of nodes define the number of grid nodes in the X direction X min X max define the minimum and maximum X values for the interpolated grid by default these will be read from the data source however you may modify these values if necessary 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Similar parameters exist in the Y and Z directions The Z value should be a field that represents the depth or elevation at which the data value sample was observed If you want to display the plume on the same elevation scale as your cross sections where data is displayed as above mean sea level you may need to convert your sample depths to sample elevations This can be done in the query builder by adding a calculated display field as shown
251. f required this can be done by opening the database in the MS Access environment 2 2 3 Database Enter topic text here 2 2 3 1 Manage Databases Use this option to remove unwanted databases from the local instances of SQL Express This option is available when HGA is first loaded and no projects have been opened The following dialog shows the options that are available 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Database Management Server wayne whi e Windows NT Integrated Authentication User Name sa Password Database whi hal Refresh Projects on database whi In this dialog select the Server and the Database that you would like to delete Once the database is selected a list of projects using the selected database will be listed at the bottom the project list is read only and displayed in order to assist you to decide if the selected database can be safely deleted Click on the bee button to delete the selected database Click on the 3 button to compress the file size of the database to save disk space After the database has been compressed you may continue to work with it Deleting a database does not remove all the files that are related to the projects using the deleted database NOTE Use caution when deleting databases since the data cannot be recovered once deleted and there is no undo option unless you have taken a backup 2 2 3 2 BackUp Database Use this o
252. f the mean value is known and is constant throughout the area Select Ordinary Kriging if the mean is not constant everywhere and needs to be recalculated dependent on the location of the neighborhood Choose Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file if the mean is not constant and has to be read from an external file Select Kriging with an external drift when only the trend component needs to be estimated and not the residual component where the variable is assumed to be the sum of the trend and the residual component This option is also referred to as Universal Kriging For most situations Ordinary Kriging is recommended and is the default option The SK Mean defines the global mean of the data if Stationary simple Kriging is performed The Drift term defines the drift components if Kriging with external drift is performed Nine drift components are possible e X linear drift in x 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Y linear drift in y Z linear drift in z Xq quadratic drift in x Yq quadratic drift in y Zq quadratic drift in z XY cross quadratic drift in xy XZ cross quadratic drift in xz YZ cross quadratic drift in yz The Variable Trend Estimate allows the user to choose between estimating the variable or the trend The default is Estimate variable The Nugget constant quantifies the sampling and assaying errors in the data In a Variogram plot the nugge
253. fer or Aquitard Once this is complete the cross section editor draws the selected hydrogeologic interpretation layers 12 3 4 Model Layer Interpretations This option allows for defining the unique model layers Model Layer 1 Model Layer 2 etc for the displayed stations Model layers can be used for numerical groundwater flow models or for general purposes The layer positions for model layers must be drawn in manually with the mouse using the Line tool 12 3 4 1 Defining Model Layers Before drawing model layers the layer attributes must first be defined To do so Select Tools gt Model Layers from the main menu This will load the Model Layers dialog as shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services asa Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Model Layer T opography Topography Laver Bottom of Laver 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquifer Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquiter Bottom of Aquiter In this dialog you can specify the total number of model layers and set properties for each layer In addition the layers can be numbered in a particular order Layers will be numbered Starting with 1 for the top most layer and increase with depth The top most layer represents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer i e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer Once the layers have been defined additional layers may b
254. field containing the values you want to plot from the pull down menu For an Interval Plot column you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select the format you wish to use then select the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the TopEntity select the from field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the BottomEntity select the to field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the field containing the values you want to plot from the pull down menu O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 255 Once you have entered all required information click the Refresh button to see the data on the plot column An example is shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample j 4 ioj xj Select Station m r m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 53621269 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 E ES Design E ES Lithology ES LithologyEntities BES Well Construction A E Plot 258 158 1 581 415 ES DepthPlotEntities Coarse Gravel Medium Sand marx ey Sy DataTable Gamma E DepthEntity Gravel Caption Depth Description Depth D ataField depth A ValueEntity Caption Sample Description E DataField gamma _m E Fine Sand e Live update 100 Close Export Y Print Y Help 10 5 Saving the Borehole Log Plot Saving the Borehole
255. fields X Dimension Fields are the fields selected from a data source or created by a user for column dimension formation Y Dimension Fields are the fields selected from the source field list or created by the user for row dimension formation Facts fields are those fields that will be used to produce the values in the pivot table cells Fact fields can be selected from the source field list or created by the user Note Only numeric fields can be displayed in the facts fields of the cross tab query Inactive fields will appear as headers in your crosstab report but will not affect pivot table formation Use these headers to apply filters to your crosstab data 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 168 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help You can organize the crosstab report by dragging fields from the Source field list and dropping them into the DataCube fields where they will appear in the view at runtime Multiple source fields can be added to any frame You can modify each field list using the following buttons ai Move a field up one position in the list Move a field down one position in the list Add a field to the list x Delete a field from the list Field Property Editor You can change the properties of each field using the Field Property Editor shown below By default the editor is divided into two sections Appearance and Data You can organize the settings in Alphabetical Order by selecting 24 E DataCube wizard F f X Pass
256. g multiple source files of the same format Package name x Description WM Save change to this DTS package Select the data source Well Information Description Unit Data io eae eo The first step requires selecting the data transfer package and data source A Data Transfer Package DTP is designed to store all settings of desired import operations that may be repeated from time to time For example importing several LAS files containing the same measured parameters The DTP contains information about the data source the selected destination table s matching between source and destination tables and fields source units and a number of other settings You may create an import package or select from existing packages All Data Transfer Packages if any are listed for selection at the beginning of all data transfer operations If an existing package is selected the import routine loads all information stored in the package The information can then be reviewed and updated as desired before as you move through the data transfer operation After selecting the package select the Data Source please note the following limitations HGA currently supports LAS v 2 0 Third dimensional data array handling is currently not supported Multiple log runs is currently not supported When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step The next step is Data Mapp
257. g so you will have access to more advanced options for the colormap or isosurface and this will enable displaying multiple colormaps and or isosurfaces Plume Browser Options 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 371 Clicking the Options button will load the Plume Browser Options window as shown below Animation Properties X Rotate Time Flume Browser Number of steps 20 Start value fo Finish value 327 10D Animate in selected interval Cancel The Number of steps value may be increased to smooth the transition from one time to the next or it may be decreased to make the browsing proceed faster The Start value indicates the value at which the browser will begin must be a value gt 0 The Finish value indicates the value at which the browser will end must be lt 100 The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the specified start and finish values 13 3 5 Recording Animation to AVI file Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer supports recording any animation rotation plume animation over time isosurface or color map spanning to an AVI file for playback during presentations and demonstration using any compatible AVI file player To record the AVI locate the Record button in the lower right corner of the window Click on this button and a Video settings window will appear as shown in the following figure 21xi ras Yideo settings
258. gation results Neutron Resistivity Gamma Chemistry results etc e Interval dependent plots data measured as from to value e g core recovery sample O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 219 technique Well construction casing screen annular filling etc Interval based data e g well screen indicators text etc With text entity e g comments on well drilling observations With image entity e g photos of soil or split spoon samples Depth based data e g symbols for water level indicator etc With text entity text label showing water level values With image entity Picture e g any image that should be applied to the entire BHLP column The column type may be selected from a pick list as shown below Choose Column Type X Pleaze Choose a Column Type Scale Lithology Plot Well Construction One or more instances of these column types can be displayed on a borehole log plot in any sequence Each column can have its own header If you have added several columns to your borehole log plot and you would like to change the order in which they appear you can simply click on one of the sub nodes under the Design node in the tree to highlight it then click and drag the folder to a new position in the folder list The BHLP will be re organized to reflect the order of the sub nodes under the Design node 10 3 1 Scale Column The Scale column displays the vertical scale on
259. ge Name field in the first line Then select a folder a file format and enter a filename Once this has been defined Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS Select Tables to Export The second window as shown below requires you to select the tables to export In addition to selecting the source and destination tables this interface also allows selecting the desired destination fields to which data from the selected table will be exported O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System NN lx Step 2 Data mapping Sure Destinatio Category Source table Destination table Description station ki station Select the fields for data exporting LONG LONG STRING DOUBLE degree DOUBLE degree DOUBLE mi DOUBLE mi DOUBLE m STRING DOUBLE degree y DOUBLE degree elevation DOUBLE mi toc DOUBLE m depth DOUBLE m sth_ type STRING kakka lca ica ica ica ica ica ica STRING Total of records 151 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Unit Conversion By default the data from those fields with units will be exported in the same units as the source However any unit from the same unit category can be selected and the appropriate conversions will be made by the DTS For instance a ground surface elevation that is stored in metres in the database can be exported in feet in the destination table Once the mapping is complete Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS Stati
260. gn Plot Designer ail rl a xi fey Waterquality multipleplots aa Calcium Time Series Plot Sodium Time Series Plot odium Chloride 120 01 6 Sulfate 110 55 m 100 T ni n 5 Ly i 90 i q El 80 iia H i A A 1 70 2414 pd AA 5 60 Hi 14 i so wes E 35 H A L i let 50 HD ash bo gl A id 1 sla tyi 1 0 sl 1 3 tt aot is yi VA 40 l 1 fhe i ay Cao 30 25 Pad i Fo pi A A rs 20 2 i eee ec j 10 1271995 121611997 121611999 12 5 2001 cart Us SERAN i SampllNg_Date 1271995 12 6997 12161999 12 5 2001 oolbar Settings Data Source SampllNg_Date _ Name waterquality_multipleplots Number of Columns 2 Number of Rows 2 Chloride Time Series Plot Sulfate Time Series Plot Spacing Width 10 o Spacing Height 10 240 miaa 20 220 18 200 16 Plot mn 14 Settings o 3 140 i 10 and Data 120 8 100 6 Source s0 4 60 2 20 1271995 12 61 997 12 6 1999 12 5 2001 SampliNg_Date 12 7 1995 12 6997 12 6M999 12 5 2001 Name E VV 01 The name of the plot page As Es Print Ok Help The plot window contains the following items Plot Page Design Tree A list of all available plot page designs plots and series such as Lines and Standards Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the plot design Plot Settings and Data Source Contains the settings for the selected entity and data mappings Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the plot page design Description of Designer Toolbar Items The pl
261. graphy Cadastral Transportation Roads Digital Raster Graphic DRG Scanned USGS quads Land Cover Vegetation Plants Watershed boundaries 10 12 digit hydrologic units Wetlands and Floodplain Easements Climate Precipitation and Temperature Flood hazards USDA Office Information Profile OIP Applied Conservation Practices Water Control Infrastructure National Inventory of Dams Grand River Conservation Authority http www grandriver ca index document cfm Sec 63 amp Sub1 16 amp sub2 0 Data GRCA data Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage Grand River Watershed Datum NAD83 Layer Airphoto Topographic and Thematic Data Ministry of Energy Mines and Petroleum Resources BC http www em gov bc ca Mining GeolsurvMapPlace geoData htm Data Geology Geochemistry Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage British Columbia Datum NAD83 and either BC Albers or Geographic Decimal Degrees Layer Geology Geochemistry Canadian Council on Geomatics http www geobase ca geobase en index html Data Geobase Format Shapefile and raster Geographic Coverage Canada Datum NAD83 Layer Administrative Boundaries DEM Geodetic Network Landsat National Road Network Ministry of Sustainable Resource Management BC http srmwww gov bc ca gis arcftp html Data Warehouse Format Coverage Raster Geographic Coverage British Columbia Layer Administrative Boundaries Hydrology Forest and more Alberta Geological S
262. gy 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Silt 254 499999970673 30 999999984121 Geology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 upper aquifer 323 500000072527 6 50000016369393 Hydrogeology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 lower aquifer 271 500000057407 17 0000000867341 Hydrogeology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Topography 325 999999922118 47 9999998859363 Model 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 BottLayerl 278 000000036182 46 0000000062631 Model 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 BottLayer2 278 0000000361 82 D Model 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 BottLayer3 232 000000029919 10 0000000299187 Model 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Medium Sand 321 99999997 7853 12 9999999575503 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Gravel 309 000000020303 30 999999984121 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Coarse Gravel 325 999999922118 3 99999994426497 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Fine Sand 278 000000036182 18 0000000265706 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Silt 260 000000009611 27 9999999796925 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Sand 232 000000029919 6 00000000885686 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 upper aquifer 325 999999922118 3 99999994426497 Hydrogeology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 lower aquifer 278 000000036182 18 0000000265706 Hydrogeology 26 1871233061 1774674142 GB 03 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 Topography 321 99999997 7853 24 0000000354275 Model 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 BottL ayer 297 399999942426 9 00000001328527 Model 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 B
263. h formation Description of the geologic formation The depth and or elevation of each layer Well construction details casing screens annular fill Charts that display one or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc In a typical borehole log report BHLP there may be one or more instances of the items listed above The number of columns and their order of display is flexible and can be set at the time of designing the borehole log plot and edited at any point thereafter Borehole log plots can be created for one or more boreholes at once based on a desired borehole log plot design Once the design is acceptable a borehole log report can be generated for any or all boreholes in the selection through the use of the Report Editor Borehole log reports once generated can be exported to various formats including HTML RTF PDF that are supported by the Report Editor The borehole log plotter can also be used as a data entry assistant in HGA by displaying well construction details as data is entered in tables that are related to the Borehole log plot Moreover the borehole log plotter is an invaluable tool in the process of making geologic and hydrogeologic interpretations of your data under the Cross Section Editor 10 1 About the Interface The BHLP may be launched from HGA in several ways Existing B
264. h the type Text must first be created using the Layer 2012 Schlumberger Water Services sto Hydro GeoAnalyst Help New menu option The following annotation options are available Polygon Provides the option to draw a polygon This option is available only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Shifting and Scaling Digitized Polylines Polygons Map Manager allows you to shift and scale digitized polygons and polylines These options are NOT accessible through the main menu However they can be accessed by double clicking on a digitized polyline or polygon while you are in edit mode When double clicked a blue box will appear around the vertical and horizontal extents of the digitized shape indicating that the whole shape is selected as shown in the image below i Map Project testmap Ce Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help Layer Information Station Laye Coord Datum Unit D Feat 1 GCS WGS 1984 DWGs 1984 egree ure Counts 147 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N 535 619 4 814 887 1 2 849 You can scale the polyline polygon by clicking on one of the vertices located on the blue box and moving it to a new position holding the left mouse button You can shift a polyline polygon up down left or right by placing your mouse cursor inside the blue box mouse cursor symbol will change and then clicking and dragging the entire shape to a new position No
265. hat define the hydrogeologic layers Aquifer1 Aquitard1 Upper Unconfined Aquifer etc based on relevant data in the stations that are displayed in a cross section The hydrogelogic layers must be drawn using the polygon tool The procedure for drawing and editing these layers is identical to drawing geologic layers as explained above The position of the hydrogeologic interpretation layers may be defined based on the position of any Geological interpretations that may already be available Translating Geology Interpretations into Hydrogeology Interpretations A hydrostratigraphic unit will generally include one or several geologic layers and the boundaries of a hydrostratigraphic unit will usually conform with the boundaries of the geologic layers As such you can copy one or more of your geologic interpretation layers and use them as a startup for hydrogeologic interpretation layers To do so Select the Hydrogeology option from the Layer Manager to make this layer visible Right mouse click on this interpretation layer and select Copy from Geologic Layers and the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 353 Select the Layers to Copy xi Bedrock ok Cancel Help In this dialog select one or more geologic interpretation layers to copy For each layer to be copied provide the name pattern and description of the corresponding hydrogeologic interpretation layer Aqui
266. have multiple well casings or nested piezometers you must also define two additional fields Casing ID field type LONG used to distinguish different well casings Parent ID field type LONG required only if a well casing exists within a parent casing if so for the selected well casing set the ParentID equal to the CasingID of the parent casing Screen Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING ex material If you have multiple well casings you must add an additional field CasingID field type LONG used to distinguish different well casings This allows to assign multiple screens to multiple well casings Filling Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING ex material Hydrogeology Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING ex formation name Water Level Tables must have one fields with type DOUBLE depth_ and one field with type STRING ex comments In the Water Level tab you may also select the reference datum for measuring depth to water levels select Ground Surface Elevation or Top of Casing Pump Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ two time fields named sstart_ and end_ with type DATE TIME stamp one description field with type STRING ex comments NOTE The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths
267. he link has been successfully removed Click on the pointer button k in the toolbar Place the mouse cursor on this vertex which has been separated Click once on this vertex and drag the mouse away from its position and place the polygon vertex in the new position if desired Set Features The Set Features option allows for modifying the display properties of most layers in your map project and other cross sections that intersect with the current cross section If this option is selected from the Edit menu a dialog similar to that shown below will be displayed Set Features Bee E X sible River ED Highway Wo NAME T k well Wo ID E OF Cancel A cross section line may intersect with one or more features that are displayed in one or more layers in your map project For instance one or more rivers from the Rivers layer may 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 334 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help intersect with a given cross section at one or more points Other features of importance may include roads railway lines lakes etc Features from selected map layers that intersect with a cross section may be displayed as a symbol and or label on the cross section line NOTE The intersecting items display options can be defined only at the time when the cross section is created currently it is not possible to set these features later on once the cross section has been created Also intersecting items must be selected
268. he browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB color Width is the contour line width Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals View shows hides the automatic lines Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will be plotted starting from the Lower limit value Labels The Labels setting is used customize the appearance of the contour labels Visible shows or hides the labels Text color controls the color of the label Text size controls the size of the labels Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 382 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 13 5 Plumes Display Settings HGA 3D Explorer is capable of displaying and animating 3D Isosurfaces volumetric plumes of soil or groundwater chemistry data The 3D Plume must be generated from a data query in the main HGA window before displaying it in 3D Explorer For details on how to generate the plume please see 3D Interpolation The plume can be added to the 3D Project when working in the cross section editor for more details see View 3D of the Cross Section Editor You may also import a plume into an exist
269. he button does 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 3 3 1 Creating New Projects Step 1 Project Management Project Management is an essential component of any environmental project Hydro GeoAnalyst provides the tools you need to manage user access to your projects selecting database schemas and geographical details This section presents information on how to create new projects and modify the properties of existing projects HGA is designed to manage databases storing data for multiple projects A project in HGA refers to a set of data with common elements Some of these common elements may be location nature of the data or the purpose for which the data is collected and stored A project can be created in an existing HGA database in which case it will be able to share some of the available existing data For instance if the new project is created in an existing database containing all groundwater monitoring locations in a Province State where the project is located the project may share all or part of the information stored in this database A project can also be created in a completely new database in this case HGA provides a step by step Project Wizard that assists with the project creation process Starting the New Project Wizard The Project Wizard can be launched in two ways Select Project New from the Main Menu OR a Click on the L New button on the toolbar found on the Pr
270. he violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning Press the 2 Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the window below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 150 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Query Builder Xa B Ss i Station Group Quere e Data Query Select a Query Toc Exceeds 320m Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soll Sampling Monitoring Evert Mining Esploratori Geophysics Well History Source Condition Project Design SOL View Previews 20 007 0906023342 20 5659715330232 00 5461 372407396 20 56095538563083 20 5936300063504 20 553787325565 20 54396881 242797 20 5691857577091 20 5S 320604261 20 56160769393397 20 550964509041 20 561 3306964768 00 557 669697009 00 56727 92095427 00 5547 642005826 20 5574207847192 20 54590268565231 00 5599520 76244 00 561 360973189 00 559957 7967353 50 561 3609731897 43 47 49200273619 GEOI 45 4744943279344 GB02 434r r04 3 77749 GB03 43 47 779167156678 GB04 434r Dar 00962494 GBUS 435 401654667e084 GBUB 435 4700 29460892 GEO 43 4751 443684377 GBOS 43 492114232 7003 GB09 43 4751191676957 GB10 45 48245396079935 GB11 43 461277 9610374 GB12 45 47013566506241 GB13 43 4503200569183 GB14 45
271. hem_test_sampleD Station AND cherm_test_results0 sys_sample_code chem_test_sampleD sp3 sample_code WHERE chem_test_resulteD che BTE AND SStation ID 2 E ely name date __ chemical_n Concentrati result_unit Elevation Screen_from z P 4530270725147 1045504114 GB 20 0642522000 BTE B ug 330 76 16 63 214 13 4520270725147 1045504114 GB 20 08729 2000 BTE o ug l 330 76 16 63 214 13 Ml 4520127025147 1045504114 GB 20 100222000 BTE J ug 330 76 16 63 314 13 O 4540127020147 1045504114 GB 20 1241022000 BTE 10 ug l 330 76 16 63 314 13 m 44 9622305 4 510250390 GB 21 05 15 2000 BETEK 0 ugl 335 95 16 53 319 42 Po 441362230074 5102568398 GB 21 05 21 2000 ETE 0 ugl 335 95 16 53 319 42 m 44 362230074 510256390 GB 21 062522000 BTEX O ug 335 95 16 53 319 42 44 13b2230074 510258398 GB 21 06 29 2000 ETE 0 ug 335 95 16 53 319 42 P 44 62230074 510258390 GB 21 10 02 2000 BTE 0 ug 335 95 16 53 319 42 m 44 10b2230074 50250398 GB 21 12710 2000 BTE 0 ug 335 35 16 53 319 42 E 45 339369634 299975092 GB 22 05715 2000 BTE 0 ug 337 59 14 64 322 95 El 45 339569034 2959 5853 GB 22 05421 2000 ETE 0 ug ddr 59 14 64 322 55 E 45 339369034 2999 0092 GB 22 06725 2000 BTE 0 ug ddr 59 14 64 dz2 95 E 45 339569934 299970099 GB 22 06 29 2000 BTEX 0 ugl 337 59 14 64 322 95 F 45 339369634 299970099 GB 22 10 02 2000 BETES 0 ug 337 59 1464 322 95 F 45 339369634 2999759833 GB 22 1217042000 BTEX 0 gel 337 59 14 64 322 9
272. hentication Enter SQL Server Account Uzer Name sa Password Database New Database Build Connection String Nest gt Cancel Help TAT Tg HGA requires a MS SQL server to host the project database A server can be any computer on your network which has MS SQL Server 2005 Express installed or an installation of WHI SQL Express installed The WHI SQL Express can be installed on your hard drive as part of the installation process If the WHI SQL Express is installed it will be setup as the default database server This will allow your local computer to act as a server for new projects The MS SQL Server 2005 Express is a data engine built and based on core MS SQL Server technology If you are working on a stand alone computer then the MS SQL server would be your computer and the server name would be the name of your computer as it appears in your General System Properties followed by the abbreviation WHI For example if your computers name is John the MS SQL Server name would be John WHI Once the server is selected select from an existing database on this server or create a new database HGA allows you to 1 Select from a list of Known servers and create select a database OR 2 Build a Connection String to an existing SQL Server NOTE The current version of HGA supports MS SQL Server 2005 Express MSDE and later other SQL Servers such as Oracle DB2 Sybase Terradata etc are not supported Th
273. her values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation process and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than otherwise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Mag_X X co ordinate magnification factor Mag_Y Y co ordinate magnification factor Mag_2 Z co ordinate magnification factor No_Value Value assigned to nodes located outside the convex hull of the data points where interpolation is not performed Allow_Extrapolation Is a flag to use extrapolation for nodes outside the convex hull of the polygon formed by the data points In this case linear regression is used to fit a plane through the data set and calculate the interpolated value This should be used with caution since extrapolation is less reliable than interpolation Sdip Calculate the aspect
274. his may take several minutes Opening the Demo Project in Hydro GeoAnalyst e Once the demo project has been downloaded to your computer extract the contents of the HGA Demo Project zip file to a location on your computer 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help e Launch Hydro GeoAnalyst by double clicking on the desktop short cut icon e Select Project gt Open from backup from the HGA main menu e In the Restore Database As dialog box specify your local SQL Server Please note you cannot restore a database onto a network SQL Server in this way e Beside the Project field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navigate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Select the Project voh file e Beside the Backup File field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navigate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Select the SWS_Demo DB bak file e Finally click the Ok button to open the demo project e The above steps only need to be done the first time you want to restore the Demo Project When you want to open the Demo Project the next time simply select Project Open and browse to the place where you extracted the zip file or select Project Reopen and you should see the Demo Project listed there 1 6 Updating Old Projects HGA is fully compatible with projects created in earlier versions of HGA The first time you open a project from a
275. hlumberger Water Services 46 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 9 zip file to a location on your computer Ensure that your software is licensed and launch Hydro GeoAnalyst by double clicking on the desktop short cut icon Select Project Open from backup from the HGA main menu In the Restore Database As dialog box specify the SQL Server you wish to use Beside the Project field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navigate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Select the Project vbh file Beside the Backup File field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navigate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Select the SWS_Demo_DB bak file Finally click the OK button to open the demo project Note The above nine steps are only required when opening the downloaded Demo Project for the first time Next time you wish to open the Demo Project you can select Project Open and then select the Project vbh file for the Demo Project 2 2 1 8 Properties This menu item will load a wndow displaying the properties for the current project Project Properties Coordinate Type Coordinate C Geographic E NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N Unit y State Plane ages Ci Others Project Location Material Specification DIN 4023 Database Server MGAERTNERZ WATSSWS Database Name aS Once a project is created there are options to modify some of the
276. holding time for more details see Check Holding Time Settings e Execute a Quality analysis on a selected dataset e Display and retrieve assessment results records not meeting assessment criteria will be highlighted e Save assessment results to a MS Excel spreadsheet 8 1 Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis Your QC Blank duplicate and spiked samples should be entered in the same table and fields as your original samples lf a Duplicate sample was collected at an existing station then create a new sample ID and assign the appropriate Quality Code D You must also define a common batch ID for duplicates to indicate that they belong together lf you want to compare the duplicate to its original sample you must add the appropriate Original Sample Quality Code O to each original sample lf a Blank sample was collected it can be added as a new station and sample or as a new sample to an existing station Create a new sample ID and assign the appropriate Quality Code B For Spiked samples you must add two types of samples codes and results The first will be a sample that contains the known spiked concentration for each parameter Create a new sample ID and assign the appropriate Quality Code ST for Theoretical Spiked concentration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the amount of 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control NOS constituent that has been added for every spiked paramete
277. hology Drilling Casing Screen Annular Filling and Scale data for the selected station if it has been entered into your database Other entities such as pump locations have to be entered manually To specify the desired entity expand the Well Construction node and locate the specific sub node Use the combo boxes provided to set the data table and fields The Well Construction column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 229 then selecting the Well Construction node from the BHLP Settings window The Well Construction frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by selecting the Options button General BHLP Settings g xj EHLP Well Constructio Ae bane Well Construction Jv Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduci Wisibilit e Drilling details e Water Levels jw Casings details e Scale e Screen details e Pumps e Litholoqy Reducer Flush Mount Help Apply OK Lancel The Visibility frame allows you to show hide the various components of the Well Construction column Drilling BHLP Settings l
278. ibes these settings 2012 Schlumberger Water Services ez Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Pumping Test Analysis A oO xj settings Pumping Wells Pumping Rate Observation Wells Units Site Map meters Dimensions meters Time Sec Discharge m 3 se0 Transmissiity m 2 sec Pressure Pa Project informatio Project Name Project Mo Client Location Category Mappin Pumping rate wel History screen Diam well Construction Water Level well History X Borehole Diam wel Construction ad Elevation Description a required information Analyze Cancel Hep In the first tab define the project units you would like to use for AquiferTest and populate the Pumping Test information 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 83 210 x Pumping Test Analysis Settings Pumping ells Pumping Rate Observation Wells Data Source Select a data query that contains the required fields for Wells Location and Construction aquifertest pumpingtest water levels bi Field al ESOO Ha II Name co ordinate l CUY co ordinate 1 i Screen Diameter Fowl Borehole Diameter id Elevation l name Data Preview date and_time Rend Ti seo te ter Tae ad sph o 7 1874 6 6 2007 1 091 46341 2 on 535599 a 4014377 79 7 T brbrap0r 1 002134146 Po J 0 535599 700 4814371 194240 be 007 1 00 3963415 4 0
279. ible when you set one of the interpretation types to visible and editable In the example screen shot below you can see that cross sections EE and BB along with their interval locations are visible while interpreting cross section ZZ 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NS Hydro GeoAnalyst Help gt map project sitemap aleixi rrvYaese ON File Edit View Tools Help rar ZM N AXA amp gt k o wo Oo deja 350 O O o 34 LOD3S 5801 330 mn mn og o 320 E E E EE F a HE M CO Model N 310 Topography 300 0M C HydroGeology Elevation m 250 260 270 280 290 240 230 220 150 200 250 300 450 500 550 600 350 400 650 700 Distance m 535 872 4 814 505 29 91 226 30 0 50 100 535 137 4 814 510 Grid Tab Set the display properties for grid lines in the 2D cross section view Editar Labels Fiulers Vertical Exag Screen WLevel Intersecting Grid Grid Line Color Line Style q A Width in Pixels fi e Visible for Vertical Lines e Visible for Horizontal Lines Show on Load In the Grid Lines frame set the line style color and width and also set visibility settings for the horizontal and vertical grid lines The Show on Load option will result in the grid being 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 345 displayed each time the cross section is loaded Inte
280. ices 188 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help results will be calculated by comparing the difference between the Sample Date and the Analysis date Any results that have a holding time greater than what is specified in the QAQC Reference table will fail this check Holding Time Settings Any holding time above the Standard Holding Time will be highlighted ou can configure Standard Holding Time from the Project Properties QAQC References menu Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color You can enter your QAQC references Standards by selecting Project Properties QAQC References DADC References Chemical Mame E a TCE 31 5 E PCE 5 EFA 524 2 Rev 4 1 ce DCE 5 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 DEC 5 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 1 1 DCE 1 5 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 BIEX 3 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 Benzene 3 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 Toluene 1 3 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 7 xylene 1 3 EPA 544 2 Rev 4 1 Ethplbenzene 3 US EPA 8270 TCE 001 4 US EPA 8010 TCE 1 Here you can manually enter or import the reference values used for running the associated checks You will notice that the Method Name and Chemical Name have drop down lists you can pick from this is based on your selections from the Settings gt QAQ0C References Settings 3 0 x Location of Analyse Method Field Local of Chemical Parameter List Field m Category Monitoring Event Category
281. idlines and defining the color Finally you can define the axis range for each scale accept the default Auto option in which case the data min and max will be read and used as the min and max for the axis Or de select this option and enter user defined Min Max and Interval values BHLP Settings X E O EHLP Plot Are General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend Appearano C Show Grid Lines Color Left Right e Show Color E W Show Labels Font E Label Direction Horizontal Apply OF Cancel In the Vertical Axis tab shown above you can modify the appearance settings of the vertical axis For both the Left and Right axis axis labels can be enabled disabled by selecting the Show Labels checkbox You can also change the label color by clicking on the Color box and change the font by clicking on the Font box Label Direction can be modified by making a selection from the combo box choose from horizontal or vertical direction O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 227 BHLP Settings i x Flot Area General Horizontal Anis Vertical Axis Legend e Background e Outline Shadow Apply UE Cancel Under the Legend tab there are settings that control the Visibility and the Background and Outline visibility and color The specific settings for the Depth sub node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings x Depth Serie W
282. ight clicking on a line and selecting the Add vertex option A line can be deleted by right clicking on a line and selecting the Delete option All lines added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Polygons To add polygons or rectangles Select the Edit Polygons option from the pop up menu 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 362 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Click on the N Draw Polygon or Rectangle buttons on the toolbar Insert the mouse cursor at the desired location Click and drag the mouse to create the desired shape double click in the case of a polygon to finalize the shape Settings The Settings dialog for Annotations is displayed below Annotation Settings X Please set annotations for Model layer For each Annotation type you may show hide using the Visible check box or edit the display properties by clicking on the preview in the Symbol column You can modify the standard properties for Text Line and Polygons To save the annotation changes you have made you can either deselect switch annotation types or click the Save button from the button bar 12 6 Limitations Although the cross section component currently allows creating complex overlapping Zig Zagging interpretations these types of interpretations are not suitable for the purpose of saving and later querying in the database As such the following rules limitations are enforced to avoid saving such
283. iguring a geotransformation is very simple and is described in the following section Configuring Geotransformations When Hydro GeoAnalyst detects that a geotransformation is required it will check the internal geotransformation settings to determine if the geotransformation has already been defined If not it will prompt you with the following dialog 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appe ndices 453 Please select area T lo A EN AU Qeotranetonncdior will asad Fs iws sr the talla yira aariat ayes rns NAD THA UTM Aone 17N Cat Wus THA Plaza al e ares Weed his tan e ba ecient Canard nrn hariti Trarless lesleariclss Alberta Tritis cosh arriba Marito Ontario Nesrerornridkaricd Now Sieti Quiche Micra Arurisicde From the Please Select Area dialog choose the geographic area which best describes the data extent Click Ok to save the settings In subsequent scenarios when this geotransformation is required Hydro GeoAnalyst will automatically perform the geotransformation on the fly In other words geotransformations only need to be specified once for the Hydro GeoAnalyst project In some cases such as importing data into HGA or loading a shapefile in Map Manager if the geotranformation has already been defined you may be prompted to confirm the default geotranformation shown below ae othe detail Geo lranstornnation tor inanstormation between coordinate system NAD JSA UIM Zone AN a
284. ile type Browse to the folder containing the file Highlight the desired file Click Open 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 131 Click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step Build a Connection String To build a connection string select the radio button beside the Build Connection String option then click on the a Build Connection String button to load the following dialog B5 Data Link Properties 3 A x Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Providers ESAI GeoDatabaze OLE DB Provider Microsoft SAM 1 1 OLE OB Provider Microsoft Jet 3 51 OLE DE Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DE Provider Microgott OLE DB Provider for DTS Packages Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service ulate OLE He itil a te msEulie Microsoft OLE DE a for OLAP mess Microsoft OLE DE Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DE Simple Provider Microsoft Project 9 0 OLE OB Provider MSD ataS hape OLE DE Provider for Microsoft Director Services SOL Server Replication OLE OB Provider for DTS Ok Lancel Help The Data Link Properties dialog box is the standard Windows system interface for configuring connection strings to data sources This dialog box exposes all of the properties that the selected OLE DB provider supports The Data Link Properties dialog box contains fou
285. ill be listed To activate a Check type click in the checkbox beside it O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control tes Lab Quality E F xi Lab Quality Templates Template Description Example Template Relative Percent Difference lt 20 Check Duplicates Coefficient of Variation lt 10 Percent Recovery gt 95 Check Spikes i k lt 0 Check Blanks Blank i Check Dilution Check MDL Duplicate Settings Check Holding Time a Relative percent difference less thar 20 E Coefficient of variation less than 10 Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color Apply Ok Cancel Help e The Template Description field is filled in by default with a verbal description of the Settings used for the template You can modify the Template Description with any text you would like to use by simply typing over the existing text Each Check type has its own Settings which can be adjusted by clicking on the Check type to highlight it The Settings will then appear to the right Settings for each Check type are described in the following sections 8 2 1 Check Duplicates Settings A field duplicate is a QC sample which is used to determine the precision associated with all or part of the sample collection and measurement process Field duplicates are two independent samples which are collected as nearly as possible from the same point in s
286. images must be georeferenced again in the new coordinate system Print Loads the map view into the Report Editor where the report may be printed and or saved for later retrieval For more information please see Chapter 14 The Report Editor Exit Exit the Map Manager and return to Hydro GeoAnalyst A Map Layer is a set of points lines polygons or a raster image that have geographic coordinates attached to it A Map Layer may be imported into any Map Project 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 269 11 2 2 1 New Provides options for creating a new map layer A new layer may be created as one of the following file types ESRI Polygon shapefile shp ESRI Line shapefile shp ESRI Point shapefile shp ESRI Text shapefile shp These are Annotation Layers meaning that they can be used to draw various shapes or labels text on your map project The new map layer will use the projection system of the current map project After entering a filename for the layer the new map layer will be created then placed in the Layer Manager and added to the current Map Window HINT For easy maintenance it is suggested that the shapefiles be kept in the same folder as the current map project By default Map projects are created in the Map sub folder of the current Project folder 11 2 2 2 Open Shapefile Provides options for opening a map layer The Map Manager is able to open any shapefile that has a projec
287. imply click on a station to remove it from the cross section Stations can also be added to removed from a cross section line in the Map tab as described in Defining a Cross Section Line 12 4 Querying Cross Section Interpretations In earlier versions of HGA the cross section interpretations were saved in shapefiles and along the cross section line The cross section editor now saves the interpretation results to the database for various uses including e displaying the results of each interpretation in HGA e querying the interpretation table for any desired surface s or thickness data that can be used for groundwater modeling applications The final interpretation results may be queried for information such as layer thickness at selected station s top elevation s bottom elevation s layer type name and description When you create a Data Query in the Query Builder and expand the Description data category you will see the Interpretation Results table as shown below Piei xi XH amp e Station Group Query Data Query Desg SQL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields Cross_section_model_interpretations 4 Function Expression Alas station id id Station Type station x x Total Depth neony y 9 P station name name Depth to Bedrock Interpretation Results layer_description Layer_Description description_addins Interpretation_Results top_elevation Top_elevation Interpretation Results Inte
288. importing data from a MON file a format generated from datalogger monitoring software such as Diver Pocket LoggerDataManager Diver Office and e SENSE MON files consist of three sections Logger Settings Data Series and Data The Logger Settings section contains the current settings of the logger including the location sample method sample interval serial number and available channels The Data Series section contains information on when field measurements were taken The Data section contains all the measurements for each channel ordered by date and time To import MON file data into your database follow the steps below STEP 1 Select MON Data Files STEP 2 Map Data Fields STEP 3 Import Data into the Database Please note that the MON data import procedure can accommodate multiple MON files simultaneously However for demonstration purposes only one MON file will be used in the following guide Also before you import data from MON files the water level values need to be compensated with respect to the top of the well casing This can be done through SWS datalogger software Diver Office Data Logger Manager by performing barometric compensation on the MON data using the Top of Casing method 2012 Schlumberger Water Services MES Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select MON files Select Data Type Water Level with Respect to Top of Casing PLEASE NOTE Ifyou select the Water column above Diver ar Water Level with respect
289. in Map Manager before the cross section is created In the Set Features dialog there are several options Name Name of the intersecting layer read only Visible Defines if the element is visible or not Field Allows you to select a field to use as a label for the intersecting feature Symbol Allows you to select a symbol to represent the intersecting feature Label Allows you to set properties of the label representing the intersecting feature The Field column contains a list of available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view Double click on the desired cell in the Symbol column to load the dialog where a symbol can be selected and its properties set Point Style EJ Pattern AA 14 Font WH Symbol Symbol x Fil PO poder FL o Sample x OF Cancel NOTE You will only be able to change the Font and Symbol of the point if the Pattern is set to True type The Label Properties dialog may be loaded by selecting the button the properties that are available are shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor Label Renderer x Rotatio Angle 45 E Font Placemen Vertical Alignment Center Horizontal Alignment Right Offset s 0 T Cancel Help The Placement options allow you to set the default label placement relative to the feature Use the Offset contro
290. in the figure below will be displayed Export E x Report Export Select the export File Format options Export Format Export Options Filename Acrobat version fi Acrobat 3 x JPG Quality 75 kd Mo Embedding Fonts E tBakang Grial Arial Baltic arial Black Arial CE Grial CYR Select the desired export format provide a file name and path specify settings relevant to the format as desired and click on the OK button Reports that are saved or exported from the report viewer are not directly managed by HGA and as such will not be listed in the project browser 14 7 Creating and Managing Report Templates The Report Editor contains pre defined templates which allow users to quickly and easily create professional reports Report templates can be edited saved and managed in the Report Editor and new templates may be created and saved for future use This feature allows users to have different report layout options for headers and footers and to share them between two or more reports This allows users to have as many report designs as desired For example one or more report templates can be prepared for each client with the specific header and footer Another advantage of having a report template is that if the header information using a certain template changes the change will automatically be applied to all reports that use the template without the need to reopen
291. inalize the data import EA l0 xi Import data Notes Select Channel dE EE m or Ad Iv Level Temperature Conductivity F Flovwman db default 2 Select the source MON file by checking on Import File Name Logger Type Location Serial Number Station Name Station B the checkbox in the WV CTD_070503132 CTD Diver 13 CTD NO1 61667 312 WO 80 56322954265 4 import column see Remarks below 3 Click on the Import button when ready C Documents and Remarks Settings Wayne Desktop CTD_070503132027_61667 MON o Rows highlighted in HA AA white have correct station name mapping and can be selected o Rows highlighted in red indicate that the station name in MON file can no be found in the database Click on the corresponding blue arrow to specify the destination x station 4 o Rows highlighted in yellow indicate that there vw Bact Import Cancel Help Upon clicking Import a progress bar will display shown above If the import is successful a confirmation message will appear similar to the one shown below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 59 Information pe x i The Following Files were imported successfully Cu Documents and Settings Wayne DesktopiCTD OF0503132027 61667 MON 83 Records Chemical Data Use this import routine for importing your chemical data Samples and results Please be aware yo
292. ine indicating it has been selected Left click on the callout box and using your mouse drag the box to the new location When you have done this the result could be similar to the example shown below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 308 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Map Project Site map Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help J6Aa a men s AO Lx PF MEER DAAANRD EAS ETE G sampl al ami al SS a hemical_n result_val sample_dat Lay ayn Ya nple_a chemical_n result_val sample_dat contour chemical_n result_val Chem TYOC 16 uoljjas sso15 Ja a a All Stations chemical n result_s m CrossSectionLineS gis Tvoc 2748 76 4 16 1996 Boreholes TWOC 2356 08 8 9 1996 S tit MA ee TWOC 3141 44 2 12 1996 AirPhoto_BW_or bm p AiPhoto_Color_gr b mp chemical_n sample_dat l result va Water Courses TYOC 3503 36 4 16 1996 Airports 1 ar A TWOC 3002 88 8 9 1996 Major Railroads z TWOC 4003 84 2 12 1996 Urban Areas Trees E a a E a e a a A x Grasslands Croplands Layer Information Station Layer Feature Counts 26 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N 535 541 4 814 418 1 2 055 When you are finished with the position edits you must right mouse click on the map window and turn off the Edit Layout option to disable this feature To edit the remaining layout settings including fields violation conditions
293. ine data series ranges and modify display properties for different data ranges e g define a data range where the data exceeds the water quality standard values and assign unique symbol line and display properties for this data Select fields for plot grouping or data series grouping Modify display properties including axis labels symbols legends and intervals Print plots to a single or multiple pages Save plot settings as templates for re use Export plots to graphics format Copy plots to Windows clipboard 1 2 9 Borehole Log Plots The Borehole Log Plotter BHLP is a tool that can be used to display detailed information pertaining to a well borehole Information related to a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst Lithology information for each formation Description of the geologic formation The depth and or elevation of each layer Well construction details casing screens annular fill Charts that display one or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc In a typical borehole log report BHLP there may be one or more instances of the items listed above The number of columns and their order of display is flexible and can be set at the time of designing the borehole log plot and edited at any p
294. ing 2012 Schlumberger Water Services so Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Import LAS File A E Hote Step Data mapping The second step requires field mapping from the source file to destination fields in one or more Select Section Field Select Destination Field E well l Log El Parameter G Description Er Location H Station Name HydroGeo Analyst database tables Select one field from the source file in the left frame E Map Select the appropriate matching held from destination in the right Station Type Total Depth i E description_ addins H Geologic Desenplior E Well Construction Fl Soil Testina Elick on the Map button Mapped fields will then be added to the Preview grid at the Bottom of the window To remove the mapping for a selected field select the Source Fields Destination Fields appropriate row in the grid then click on the Delete Table Field Source Unit Table Field Unit Mapping button Station Hame Fluid Resist Depth Fluid Resistivi Yalue lt Back Hest Cancel Help The next step in the data transfer operation is to match a source table with a destination table You may map the entire LAS file including the Well Section or just downhole parameters if you do not include the well section you must have the appropriate station already created in your project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find an appropri
295. ing The next step in the data transfer operation is to match a source table with a destination table The Data Mapping window is divided into two frames e The Source table and fields found on left side of the window and e The Destination tables and fields on the right side of the window The Data Mapping window is displayed below Data Transfer System Import E a El Z iol xj gt Data Mapping Destination Category Destination table sheet ki Description bi station bl Map source fields to destination felds Use Name Type Umi Conditions id DOUBLE i LONG LONG STRING STRING DOUBLE SystemC DOUBLE DOUBLE SystemC DOUBLE STRING DOUBLE m gt i DOUBLE m DOUBLE m gt DOUBLE m DOUBLE m STRING degree degree TT Ast TATA CI Requires a unit to be selected Cl Required field 1 Foreign key O Linked Fields Total of records 15 O Auto Increment field Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list In each source table stations must be identified at least by station names Back Hents Cancel Help The Source database table which contains the data to be imported can be selected from the list of tables available on the left side of the window Note that if the data source is a text file or a spreadsheet only one table will be available for importing The DTS makes an effort to automatically map fields from
296. ing 3D project to do so select File Import Plume from the main menu The plume may be visualized with one of the display formats shown below when you right mouse click on any data plume in the model tree Region Add Isosurface e Add Colormap E Add Isalines Add isosurface see Isosurfaces for more details Add color map see Color Maps for more details Add isolines see Isoline Maps for more details Refer to the respective sections for instructions on how to create these display elements and for details on the display settings associated with each one The display settings shown below controls the global settings for all Plume display elements Setting Mame result value Palette Visible Title O O o Text size 0 015 Text color Frame Frame line color Frame fill color The Name option controls the display name for the plume in the tree view The Palette option controls the color scale used on all Plume display elements A description of the Palette options is available see The Color Palette x lt i 0 O The Color legend settings are used to modify the appearance of the color legend as it applies to all color map display elements A description of the Color legend options is available see The Color Legend 13 5 1 Isosurfaces An isosurface is a 3D planar surface defined by a constant parameter value in 3D space Isosurfaces are typically used for demonstrating the s
297. ing sections 10 3 BHLP Columns The Borehole Log Plotter supports a number of column types that can be presented on a typical borehole log plot A borehole log plot consists of a set of desired columns selected from the list of supported column types The plot does not save the data being displayed and as such avoids data duplication A borehole log plot is generated in real time using a BHLP template and data for the selected borehole s For each column displayed on the borehole log plot it is possible to e Specify the column type image text plot symbol scale as explained below e Select one or more fields of data to display in the column e Select the start and end depth for the data being displayed e Set the property of the column depending on the selected data type For example if a depth dependent graph is selected it is possible to set the properties of the graph If a text column is selected the font attributes can be set Note that each column may utilize different data fields for its start and ending depth information For example the start and ending depth information for Lithology patterns may be different from that of the well construction and may come from different tables Supported Column Types BHLP supports many data types including e Scale e Lithology eg geologic formation details soil patterns descriptions etc e Plot e Depth dependent plots data measured as depth value e g Geophysical investi
298. ing the color scheme and or the symbol that represents the station To use the Graduated Renderer select Renderer from the Layer menu click the Add button and choose Graduated renderer from the available list The following dialogue will allow you to compose a set of symbols for different value intervals 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 285 Graduated Renderer Name Entes renderer name here Field Mame ELEYATION bs Classify Min 332 0000 Max 346 0000 e 43408 Je 334 6 i 437 6 334 0 337 6 i 340 4 337 6 340 4 i 343 2 340 4 343 2 i 346 343 2 346 xa e Ramp OF Cancel Enter the Name for the renderer and choose the Field based on the values from which you want to classify your data Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals Clicking on the symbol beside each interval will load the standard Point Style dialog allowing you to choose a specific symbol and or color for each interval Color may also be specified as a spectrum using the Ramp function Color Ramps Start Color Start Size 5 End Size OF Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for
299. ins coun Function Field Operator Value Operator Source Condition gt Project af Basic Cloze Help Field Name description_addins county Type STRING Rows 15 Time 0 0 0 15 Under the Having frame a condition may be applied to the Group By field For example if the query results are grouped by the field County it may be necessary to locate the MAX result in each county or the total COUNT in each County To do so right click in the Having frame and select Add Row Add Row Delete Row Specify a Function select from Aggregate options listed below e AVG Returns the average value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set COUNT Returns the number of items in a collection MAX Returns the maximum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set MIN Returns the minimum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set STDEV Returns the sample standard deviation of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e STDDEVP Returns the population standard deviation of a numeric expression evaluated over a Set e SUM Returns the sum of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e VAR Returns the sample variance of a numeric expression evaluated over a set using the unbiased population formula e VARP Returns the population variance of a numeric expression evaluated over a set using the biased population formula 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 156 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help
300. interest To add a vertex to the polygon continue to click with the left mouse button To close the polygon double click the left mouse button at the final vertex All stations within the polygon will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Circle Allows to select stations within a drawn circle To draw a circle place the cursor in the center of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and drag an expanding circle around the area then release the mouse button All stations within the circle will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Line Allows to select stations near a drawn line To draw a line place the cursor at one end of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and digitize a line through the area of interest To add a vertex to the line click with the left mouse at the vertex location To finish the line double click the left mouse button at the final vertex location This will open the buffer distance window 2012 Schlumberger Water Services ate Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Butter Butter meters OF Cancel Enter a buffer distance from the drawn line and click OK All stations within the buffer distance of the line will become selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol The Buffer distance extends out perpendicular to the line location All All stations on the current Map Layer will be
301. into HGA In the Contours dialog click the Refresh button The Status will change to Interpolated Under the Variable column select the desired variable from the combo box 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 298 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select study to retrieve from 154 715 Refresh Study name la hga water Level Interpolated k Water Levels Contour Typ e Contour Line Settings Color Shade Settings Zebra Settings Use Only Selected Stations Restrain within Domain Choose Domain Create Lancel Help S You can now select which contour layers to generate from the selected variable e g Contour Line Color Shade Zebra The Settings for each type is described in the following section Once you have specified the contour type s and name s click the Create button to generate the contour layers Note Be sure that you have selected the appropriate study from the study table located in the middle of the Contours window Otherwise the Create button will appear greyed out 11 2 2 14 Create Gridded Data This feature allows you to interpolate data for the current layer and create a grid file GRD for use in HGA 3D Explorer or other applications For example if you have a station layer selected you can create a grid file based on station elevations or TOC top of casing elevations Select this menu item and the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services
302. ions FAQ s for some troubleshooting suggestions Next select a Database on this Server Database combo box To create a new database select Create New Database from this list Enter a name for the database in the window shown below then click OK EET Database name E x Mame OR Lancel EJ Help Next button in the lower right corner of the Project Wizard window to proceed HGA will then test the connection to the server and scan the database to see if the required tables exist in this file For new databases HGA will create the required tables Please be patient during this process NOTE When using SQL Express the database will be created in the default directory Program Files Microsoft SQL ServenMSSQL WHNDatal with the file extension mdf Be cautious when un installing SQL Express as this may result in the loss of your data lf the server connection and database are valid the next window in the Project Wizard will be displayed Otherwise there will be a warning notification regarding the server or database If this is the case please select another server or database for your project or verify whether the connection exists Option 2 Build Connection String If the Build Connection String radio button is selected in the Database Environment window there will be an option to locate an MS SQL Server and build a connection to a database on a network server Build Connection String radio button fro
303. ir pertinent features Preview BHLP Allows you to view the borehole log plot BHLP of any station in the cross section To view the BHLP select this option and click on any station in the cross section Create Surface Line Allows you to take surface layers from the map manager and display them as a line layer on cross section interpretations Surface data can be used to show the relationship between interpretation layers and numerical model layers or for showing interpolated subsurface features e g water table In order to show surface data on a cross section you must first import or create the surface in the map manager Once the surface exists in the map manager select Tools gt Create Surface Lines from the cross section editor toolbar The following dialog will appear on your screen 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 339 Display Surface on Cross Section x Please select the surface layer E edro C k Bottom Layers Bottom Layer Bottom Layer Water Table Mame of the Surface Bedrock Line Style OF Lancel The Display Surface on Cross Section dialog displays all surfaces currently loaded in the Map Manager These surfaces may have been imported or interpolated from point data Layer gt Create Contours Select the desired surface to show on the cross section You may also change the name of the surface and specify the color size and pattern of the surface line by
304. is scene configuration including attributes rotations and shifts can be loaded during a later session by selecting File Load scene configuration from the main menu bar or by clicking the ni Load scene configuration button in the toolbar 13 9 Saving and Exporting Options Saving Project The 3D project can be saved to file by selecting Project Save As from the Main Menu or click the H Save As icon from the toolbar The following Save jn E vad e E W AA Ks W BENS a AB 3x5 a VEX3D 3x5 B All Sections 3x5 a BB 3xs a CC axs sn cube 3xs Save as type Visual Borehole Cross Sections file 3x Cancel The 3D image is saved with the extension 3XS and will be saved in the IHGAnalystiProjectsiProject Name V3D folder by default A Save an existing project by selecting File Save from the Main Menu or by clicking Save icon from the toolbar Exporting Options The displayed image can be saved by selecting Project Export Diagram from the top menu 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 399 bar or by clicking the _ Export Image button in the toolbar The following Save picture as graphics file window will appear ra Save picture as graphics file a Ioj x pic0 gi Browse Image Size Width Height fieno 1200 Cancel In the Image Size field opening the combo box shows a list of several different sizes for the image size to be saved
305. isosurface by default The default isosurface value will be 5 of the maximum concentration value calculated as a result of the 3D Interpolation In the Plume combo box you may select the plume data field used for visualization you will recall that 3D projects supports multiple plumes for one or more contaminants In the Style combo box select the desired display element Select from Colormap on XY XZ or YZ planes or Isosurface The Visible checkbox shows hides the current plume browser display element To the right of these controls you will find a scroll bar that is used to animate the selected display element When a color map is selected the scroll bar Position is used to slide the color map along the selected plane through the project s site domain from one side to the other or in the case of an XY color map from the top to the bottom When an Isosurface is selected the scroll bar is used to span through different isosurface Values or shells The O percent value represents the lowest possible value for the isosurface based on the interpolated data set and will result in the largest isosurface The 100 percent value represents the highest possible value for the isosurface and will result in the smallest isosurface When you are satisfied with a view click on the Save Colormap button or Save Isosurface in the case of Isosurfaces to save this display element to the 3D Project under the Plumes node in the tree By doin
306. ist Editor 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 126 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 5 The Data Transfer System The Data Transfer System DTS is a flexible tool used for importing and exporting data into and out of a HGA project When starting a new project it may be necessary to import data from other sources into the HGA database Data may exist in such sources as Text Files MS Excel or other spreadsheets MS Access SQL servers or Oracle databases The DTS is designed to import data from such sources into the HGA database In addition data may be exchanged import and or export between the HGA database and various other data sources during the lifetime of a project Such imports exports in most cases will involve the HGA database and other sources such as spreadsheets delimited text files and other database formats such as MS Access The DTS is designed to 1 Import data into the database from such sources as Spreadsheets e g Excel Delimited Text files e g Comma separated text files Other databases e g from one or more tables in a MS Access database 2 Export selected data to destinations such as Spreadsheets e g Excel Text files Other databases e g to a table in an MS Access database 3 Export one or more HGA tables to an external database MS Access SQL Server This chapter describes in detail the Data Transfer System DTS provided with HGA Note Depending on the performance capabilities of your comput
307. isualization Data Grids Toolbar Contains icons for the main options you can perform with the data contained within the data grid Status Bar Displays the program status HGA 2012 1 has a new look and feel to it You will find that you now have options to move the tabs around and dock them where you like The default configuration is to have one tab group for the Project Tree and one tab group with the rest of the tabs station list station data etc However you can have more tab groups vertical or horizontal You can find these options by right clicking on a tab Then you can just drag and drop the tabs where you prefer them Here is an example configuration that you might like to use Your configuration is remembered the next time you open the program 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NON Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 6S Pink atria ne A Project thee Ana Profi x subas Lit Dirge De Pete Hi 413 din H oe Ree eS Lion pe ul i Eies TOC Tephi Gae Tyee Cas CER See Cee eee E ie b 6 01 EA ENE ms Da Bartata __ ee ae ee ae ee Pate ee ne P E Gone _ Se a ee E ae Eria 58 06 DADAS aam e ss 110 Borreia ae _ See eee E 000 oe __ ae See ae E y Geeta DiS TAW S AO e i ii Eureka ae ie anaes ed 155 56 aria Tein ae ned ime cso Era fee ea CAE E IR j GEE ke Ie if a Ti A BRE Eretrip cee fA Ys ao aie Boren a
308. ith the following key features e Digitize geologic and hydrogeologic layers using the polygon draw tool e Select standard cross section fill patterns from the Geology e Copy zones from geology layers in order to define hydrogeology zones e Display the locations of intersecting layers and other cross sections using symbols and labels Display water table location in cross section view Dynamically view the spatial orientation of the boreholes in the Map Preview Window simply move the mouse over the 2D borehole to highlight its location on the map View the orientation of cross sections as they relate to the Map Preview Window Define properties of intersecting features other layers or cross sections Display screened interval in cross section view Modify labels for lines and polygons Zoom in out and pan features Launch cross section for viewing in the Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Export cross section view to image format Export model layer points for use in groundwater models including Visual MODFLOW Send cross sections to the Report Editor to be included in a report template Copy window to clipboard 12 1 About the Interface The Cross Section Editor may be launched from Hydro GeoAnalyst e In the Project Tree double click on an existing cross section from the Cross Sections node e Select the Cross Sections icon on the main toolbar and then select the cross section you wish to launch from the drop down list e Select Modules C
309. ith the settings click the Create button to create the contour map Contour Line Settings Click on the Settings button beside Contour Lines and the following dialog will appear Contour Line Settings X Contour Line Setting Contour Line Style Label Renderer Sample Text Decimal Placez a Interval Contour Interval fi 3400 Number of Intervals 00 Custom Interval dls Ok Cancel FJ Help Specify Intervals you may select to define the Contour Interval e g 0 5 1 0 5 etc or the Number of Intervals 5 10 20 50 etc You may also define Custom Contour Lines in the grid in the lower corner Use the and X buttons to add remove contours respectively Under Contour Line Settings specify the line color thickness style and label settings Label Renderer will add a label to the lines Color Shading Zebra Map Settings Click on the Settings button beside Color Shading or Zebra and the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 296 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Color Settings x Color Palette 321 09 323 03 324 97 326 91 320 09 A Ta d e 2 3 Transparency lo OK Cancel Ed Help The Color Settings Renderer allows you to define different colored zones ranges according to their specific interval of values The Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides
310. ks A DIE MA IAA forsook oat aa me e DS T Tima fe Fica ee ee er te aa saad Thaw Strikes Grog A Giger Ra E lala ha 1 am PHOTO ara oma me A ims agar i k E Daing Caer i From Taji ial Ero Cesonpbor i jal a O 0 E i Camie Cos read Dire bia ma ET miadi Bard Ta o rad ELJ EE Joma El Gual 7 F us CTS Fess TJ J CEJ E E i CET fw bn Gpl aet EX en New Navigation options on Data tabs We have added new navigation buttons on the Station List and Station Data tabs to help you more quickly find that station you want _ Station Data l E M4 15 of151 gt bl Additionally you have the option of showing the List of Stations on your Station Data tab In previous versions you had to select your station from a drop down list on the Station data tab which could be cumbersome when you had a long list of stations PREVIOUSLY 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst NN html Staton Data Daia Query Y Data Fite Yim Elevation m TOC endai O 12450 Coase Gere B Fine to med 26000 S000 Gravel Garel 52000 68000 Fie Sand Fie card too 100000 Se E Siy clay vell EH A H T CUBO gt Data Caimgory E epa Larise plrogeciog Modein Fer Grecia z a Tori pae hpr Deripr T jE E ja t 03 150 Comes Geared ctra Giren as Et Fara Sand
311. l x Fil Po poder FL o Sample x OF Cancel The dialog shown here is for point shapes There are similar dialogs for line and polygon shapes The available symbol Patterns include circle square triangle cross or any symbol from all true type fonts that may be available on your system If the latter is selected you will have to select the desired font from the Font combo box and the desired symbol from the Symbol combo box Choose a symbol size from the combo box in the upper right corner Finally the symbol Fill color may be chosen from a color palette If a border around the symbol is desired select the check box beside Border and provide a border color Displays statistics for the selected data field of a selected layer These include Count Maximum Minimum Sum Mean and Standard Deviation as shown in the figure below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 283 Statistics E4 Field ELEVATION Count ha Mlasimum 346 0000 Minimum 332 0000 0 Sum 6103 0000 blean 233 0556 Std Deviation 33323 0 OK 11 2 2 10 Renderer Provides options for a Map Renderer The Map Renderer allows assigning labels to objects on the map layers x Please choose the effective renderers for the layer System Renderers Type E D XATI Background Symbo WM Show Background There are two types of renderers System Renderers and Custom Renderers The System Renderers are rende
312. l Borehole Loge I PAT Map Projet ja Oo eon FI Viera ta 1 ih AE sara ET E Reports aoa 305 00 1 4214302 Bo TEAT 4014903 30 EEEF RABIES 06 E 53603258 481466420 1 535964 58 401449750 2874655 10 Ga 461452900 G es Jana 0 a Ses GE ESIE E RIGS 2 401457 Mid f En EE Borehole antanas 30 Borehole EE Pie Eneida 4214773 50 ee 17 Borshale 535887 13 4814860 E 36 3205 16 Busicle al BIRT 421472150 10645 23745 Borehole i 555590606 aman 1553 IH Barsha GE gama 481380620 331 64 ETE Euetrale i Station Group Boreholes Rows 44 Ready 2 1 8 Station Data Tab For a more detailed view of a single Station s attributes the Station Data tab should be selected and an appropriate Data category chosen The Station Data tab provides access to all data related to a single station Once a Station is added to the project detailed information on the station can be inserted edited or deleted through the Station Data tab 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 33 jaen Gendralyst Beta Dema Project Lo i Saal Project GP Modules EyDatahase E Help oP kt ae at bo A Project Tree Station List Station Rata Data Query Data Filter Well Profile PD Collapse Expand Hild A ju f4 b tf eke REPT SB R Seno Gro PS E q ee Fa Staton Dala a Lista Lategan IU e Mama Es i Dein f Al j T Geol Deron M ll A Wel Construction pam si eee F Sal Testi
313. lation process and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than otherwise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Min Trimming Limit Minimum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Min Value option is not selected by the user Max Trimming Limit Maximum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Max Value 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appe ndices 445 option is not selected by the user The Points per block along X Points per block along Y and Points per block along Z values allow the user to choose Block Kriging used for interpolation as compared to Point Kriging Block Kriging is based on the premise that since Kriging is a linear algorithm direct estimation of the block average is possible for user defined blocks The default values for
314. le is added The BHLP Report may be printed directly by clicking on the E Print button saved to a report archive file by clicking on the Save button or exported to one of several file formats including RTF PDF HTML XLS and TIF by clicking the De Export button If you would like to modify an existing report template or if you did not select an existing template and are creating your own report you can modify the report design to suit your needs For more details on designing and modifying a report please see Chapter 14 The Report Editor 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 260 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 11 Map Manager The Map Manager is built on ESRITM Map Objects technology and is packed with an abundance of mapping features that seamlessly connect your project maps with the Hydro GeoAnalyst database However the Map Manager goes far beyond simple mapping it also acts as a fundamental source for producing cross sections accessing borehole logs and well construction details and developing contour maps elevations concentrations water table etc The Map Manager is an integral part of Hydro GeoAnalyst and is ideally suited for analyzing and presenting the spatial orientation of your groundwater or borehole project data Some of the key features of the Map Manager include e Import vector maps into a map project e Import BaseMap Layers to the Map Project DXF Raster and Shapefile formats including high re
315. le if an interpretation having at least two polygons or lines is activated and at least one of them is selected E 27 Remove Links feature is used for breaking the vertex link between two or more polygons or lines This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected For more information see Link Vertex pu Zoom In option is used to zoom in on an area of the cross section defined by a rectangle a Y Lal Full Extent button restores the cross section view to the full extents of the Cross Section s coordinates 4 O Information button displays information for the selected station Moving the mouse cursor overtop of a station will display the information Zoom Out option is used to zoom out from the current cross section view Pan button allows the user to pan the current view left right up or down Previous Extent button restores the cross section view to the previous zoom extent Next Extent button switches the cross section view to the next zoom extent Al View 3D button loads selected cross section s into 3D Explorer O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 329 View BHLP button loads a BHLP for the selected station 12 2 Description of Menu Items Save This menu item will save all current edits for the cross section to the current cross section project file WCP Close Closes the currently open cro
316. lected a red circle will appear on top of the station s symbol Stations may be selected on the map by e Clicking individually e Drawing a polygon box or circle all stations inside the object become selected e Drawing a line and defining a buffer distance all stations within the buffer distance become selected e Multiple station selections may be accomplished with the use of the lt Ctrl gt key Simply press and hold down the Ctrl key after making the initial selection then use one of the tools to select or de select additional stations Each selection option is described below Pointer Allows to select stations one by one When a station is selected a red circle will appear on top of the station s symbol When another station is selected the previously selected station is un selected and the new station s symbol becomes selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Rectangle Allows to select stations within a drawn box To draw a rectangle place the cursor in the map window click once with the left mouse button in the area of interest and drag a window around the area then release the mouse button All stations within the box will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Polygon Allows to select stations within a drawn polygon Place the cursor in the map window at one point of interest click once with the left mouse button and digitize a polygon around the area of
317. lecting Show Settings then selecting the Plot node from the BHLP Settings window The settings for the Plot node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings xX El ES BHLP Plo Es EE i Visible Column Options Help Apply UE Cancel The Plot frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can modify the general column settings by clicking the Options button The Settings for the Plot Area sub node are shown in the following screenshots BHLP Settings g xj Plot Are General Horizontal Anis Vertical Axis Legend Appearano gt aha alge El Background Color a Es eee El Page Background Color Apply OF Cancel In the General tab specify the background color and page background color Under the series frame you can set the order of the plots to have one plot above below the other 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 22 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help BHLP Settings f x E O EHLP Plot Area General Horizontal Axis vertical Axis Legend Appearance Show Grid Lines Color Primary Secondary M Show Color F Auto W Show Labels Font Min 1E 38 Logarithm en 1E 39 Interval 0 Apply OF Cancel In the Horizontal Axis tab shown above you can modify the axis appearance and scale settings For both the Primary and Secondary Scales there are settings for Normal or Log as well as showing the gr
318. leting a Report To delete a report that is registered with HGA select it in the project browser right click on it and select Delete from the pop up menu The selected report will be deleted both from the tree view as well as from the file Saving a Report A report can be saved at any time by clicking on the Save icon on the runtime report designer An existing report will be saved using the same file name When saving new reports your will be prompted for a file name Saving a Report As To save a report with a different name and or as a report template click on H Save As icon on the Report Designer s toolbar You will be prompted for a file name and type The report or report template will be saved to the Reports sub folder of the folder storing your project related information The report or report template will also be saved in the project s database and will be made available in the appropriate node in the project browser The report or template can be deleted from the project browser if you choose not to store it in the 2012 Schlumberger Water Services aza Hydro GeoAnalyst Help database Exporting generated reports Once a report has been generated it can be exported to various formats as well as being saved in the Report Editor s native format The native format stores reports with an RTF file extension To export a report click on the T Export Report icon on the toolbar A dialog similar to that shown
319. linked at the desired locations Well Snapping Buffer The default Well Snapping Buffer is 10 pixels When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 10 pixels of another well borehole then the borehole will be highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this station s lithologic interval the line will be automatically Snapped to the closest vertex Boundary Snapping Buffer The default Boundary Snapping Buffer is 5 pixels When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a cross section boundary line either the left or right then the boundary line will become highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this boundary line the drawn line will be automatically snapped to this boundary line Vertex Snapping Buffer The default Vertex Snapping Buffer is 5 pixels When a vertex on a polygon is selected and the Link Vertex option is used and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a vertex on an adjacent polygon then the vertex will become highlighted with a red box outline upon clicking the left mouse button on this vertex the vertex on the selected polygon will be 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor sat automatically snapped to this newly selected vertex Polygon Vertex Snapping makes it easy to place polygons adjacent to one another for continuous cross section views Labels Tab Provides options for modifying the label fonts for the interpretation layers Geol
320. lity Code gt Detection Limit Detection_Limit Dilution Factor Dilution _FactlR gt Method Name Method Name gt Anales Date AnalvelS Date gt Required for Lab Quality validation Cancel Help de From the Select and configure a template window select from the list of Lab Quality Templates Once a template has been selected the Template Description field will be completed with the description entered when the template was created The next step is to map the fields in your data query to the fields required by the QC component Mapping Fields In the Mapping frame the Field must be matched to the Query Alias for all required fields required fields are marked with a and are also listed in previous section In most cases HGA will be able to automatically detect and map the fields however if you have created 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 190 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help custom fields or renamed existing fields in your database structure you may need to browse through the list and select the appropriate Query Alias in your project using the pull down menus that corresponds with a Field NOTE A field in your query must be mapped to each of the required fields as listed above Generate QC Results The results for an example analysis including all six checks is displayed in the screenshot below gt Lab Quality Yalidation lol x O Spike results x Blank results 2 Duplicate results 2
321. ll appear indicating no project is loaded To create a new project select Project New to open an existing project select Project Open Once a project is loaded the main window will appear the HGA demo project is displayed below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 89 Hyd GecArabya Beta Demo Peedect os Project Modules Database E Heip anu Gar A PEE a A Mi Project Tree ration List Station Data Data Query Data Filter Well Profile i Collapse Expand 1 d H PROA x Skabon Groups mabon Hame Jimi irma Elevalnonim 10Cm Doa Dep m Maion Type pn aay a E s A aeaa k a GEN 53621269 4B14000 00 32350 127 00 CEF Borehole Lab OC aber gt Goo PALANI 2140 0 00 ee ici Fereale bardor Mela See monn e a Sere GC Montorng Wels GEM EIBRARES 421406000 28 00 2500 Bseehole Sul_Hornge 55 06 ssaa asiaoiooo 3050 31 Borehole enna GET RIBARJER 421409000 Sno 14 00 Ferrhole Sha tector seh a G 6 08 535490 63 ESTE Fr at E Borehole Sol Heros wi TCE Ecama 10m 648 mases amaneni 22880 Real HE Stebon Deta GET sasea TO ESO Borehole FF Quero een 21531 E8 445400000 Eseehole Me Time Senes Pots 68 12 Sasasa 4814281 80 Eoreliule el Grossi 536129 74 461437970 Borehole 4 lso Ps EA E ET Borehole aiaj Cross Section SEIM 4814251
322. ll need to uninstall remove HGA from your system e g if the software is to be transferred to another computer or if you need to reinstall it on the current computer Before uninstalling the HGA software package from your system we strongly recommend you to make backup copies of all your HGA projects and databases These include your entire HGA project folder and all its contents Simply copy the Project directory and its contents to another directory lf you are also uninstalling your SQL Server make sure to also back up the SQL Server database s or else you will permanently lose your data For more details see BackUp Database To uninstall HGA Locate the Add Remove Programs option in your Windows Control Panel Select the HGA software as the program to be removed Follow the on screen instructions Once you are finished re boot your system to ensure all system files are updated 1 5 Opening HGA Demo Project You can download and open the HGA demo project for exploring features and familiarizing yourself with the program The HGA demo project is currently hosted on the SWS website Downloading Demo Project from Website e Ensure your computer is connected to the internet e Download the HGA Demo Project file Select the Save option and indicate where on your local hard drive to save the HGA_ Demo Project zip file e The demo project will begin to download to your computer Depending on your internet connection speed t
323. llow the directions below to create a report containing a Data Query Select the desired Data Query from the Queries node in the project browser if no queries are available create a Query using the Query Manager Execute the Query in order to see the results Press the Print button from the main toolbar or select Project Report This item is enabled only if a grid is visible and active and has at least one row of data The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the z Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications As in the previous type of report the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved 14 5 2 Creating a Borehole Log Report A report for your borehole log plots can be created by following the directions below Select one or more stations from the Station List Select then open a BHLP template from the Borehole Logs node of the Project Browser From the BHLP designer press the Print button 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a2 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select the desired report template The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the A Designer Window press the E Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications Print the report as is or save to one of the supported formats 14 5 3 Creating a
324. ls the thickness of the axis line Visible Shows hides the axis on the plot Log scale Plots the axis values using a logarithmic scale Max value Controls the maximum value for the axis By default this value will be calculated from the selected data set Min value Controls the minimum value for the axis By default this value will be calculated from the selected data set Auto max value Restores the default automatic maximum value which is calculated from the selected data set Auto min value Restores the default automatic minimum value which is calculated from the selected data set Grid Visible Shows hides gridlines on the plot Style Controls the grid line style select from Solid Dash Dot DashDot or DashDotDot Title Text Sets the title for the axis Visible Shows hides the axis title Angle Controls the angle for the axis title for the Y axis it may be useful to have the angle set at 90 degrees Font Controls the font for the axis title Tick Label Format Controls the decimal format for the labeled tics enter 00 to display 2 decimal places to display no decimal places simply enter O Angle Controls the angle for the tick labels for date labels it may be useful to select an angle of 45 or 90 degrees for improved display Font Controls the font for the tick labels Horizontal X Axis The Settings for the X Axis are identical to the Y axis with the following exceptions Log Scale is not available Min a
325. ls to fine tune the placement by adjusting the X and Y values The labels can also be rotated by specifying a desired Angle Change Well Width Provides options for increasing the display width of stations wells and boreholes plotted on the cross section Change Well Width i a i x OF Cancel Help You can change well width as it appears on the screen by a factor displayed in the Current width drop down menu Using this factor you can make the wells thinner or thicker on the cross sectional display Change Vertical Axis This option allows you to extend the vertical range of the elevation axis When this option is selected the following dialog will display 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 336 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 12 2 3 View Set Yertical Axis X Please sel vertical axis Bottom 216 0036 m OF Cancel Help Specify a Top value and a Bottom value Click Ok to accept the new values Change Vertical Exaggeration This option allows you to change the vertical exaggeration of the current cross section The vertical exaggeration is simply the ratio of the vertical scale to the horizontal scale Set Yertical Exaggeration x Pleaze input the vertical exaggeration m OF Cancel Help Specify a new vertical exaggeration and click the Ok button The cross section will then be regenerated to reflect the new vertical exaggeration Copy Window Provides an option for cop
326. ltiline True or if you want to force the text into a single line Multiline False Top Determines how far in pixels from the top edge of the report the object is located You can either enter the pixel value manually or select the object and drag it to the desired location Vertical Alignment Allows you to set how the text is aligned in the object vertically Top will start the text at the top of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text is Stationary Bottom will start the text at the bottom of the object and the cursor will remain on the same line with every new line while the text moves upwards Middle will start at the vertical midpoint of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text will expand equally upwards and downwards 14 2 2 2 Field Custom Allows you to change the object output format to General Number Currency Date Time Percentage and Custom It also allows you to specify the line border style CanGrow Allows you to set whether you want the text field to become larger if the entered text does not fit within the allotted frame CanShrink Allows you to set whether you want the text field to become smaller if the text does not fill up the allotted frame DataField Allows you to attach the field to a datafield in a project through a DataControl e g ADO If the field is linked to a DataControl select the desired data field from the dr
327. lts shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Queries 159 XEHE 7 Station Group Quen f Data Query Design SQL View Previews SELECT FROM pararmeterresult WHERE chemical_hame Benzene Select a Query gt E Description E Geologic Description E well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling H Monitoring Event E Mining E ploration q MwW 1 932 Benzene 50 E Geophysics 11 93 Benzene 20 E well History 1 Mw 1 97_ Benzene 141 398 Benzene 2 Mu 3 92 Benzene 2 MW 3 93 Benzene 2 Mu 3 94 Benzene 2 Mu 2 95 Benzene 3 0wW 292 Benzene 3 0W 2 98 Benzene 4 Dw 4 93 Benzene 4 O w 4 94 Benzene 4 O W 4 96 Benzene 4 O0 w 4 97 Benzene PARO 2 12 Benzene 10104 ug L 11 W117 4176 Benzene 35 ug L 4 OM 4 96 3 Benzene 1 E W 06 4 16 Benzene 310 ug l 6068 91 Benzene 200 ug L Source Condition Project k Advanced Close Help Category Event Rows gis Time 0 0 0 31 NOTE The table names e g Parameter Result specified in the SQL statement must be entered as they appear in the database e g parameter result You can check the table names by referring to the Template Manager Delete Command The Delete Command can be used to remove records from the database For example if you want to delete all records from the Parameter Result table with the chemical name benzene enter the following SQL statement into the SQL View Preview tab DELETE FROM parameter
328. lue 5000 Field OF Cancel Help The Header Row Color controls the color of the first row in the layout table The Violation Row Color allows you to assign a color to values in the table that exceed the violation conditions explained below This is useful for quickly identifying exceedences on the map The Grid Line Color controls the color of the gridlines in the table Under the Violation Field frame you may specify a condition for one of the display fields Select a Field from the combo box then a Condition lt gt etc and define the Compare To settings There are two options available e Compare to a Value simply type the value in the provided text box OR e Compare to a Field select another field from the data query to compare against The possibilities are limitless but here are some examples e concentration gt 5000 ug l a government guideline or MCL as shown in the screenshot above e depth to bedrock gt 40 feet e overburden thickness lt 50 feet e concentration of a chemical exceeds the criteria limit where the criteria limit is available in another field in the selected data query In the Choose Data tab you can specify which stations should display the data table This is useful if you have a station group with numerous stations and are interested in displaying the data summary table only for a few stations 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 304 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help
329. m the Database Environment window a Build connection string button located in the lower right corner and the following Data Link Properties dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Creating New Projects 99 E Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to SOL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name Po Refresh 2 Enter information to log on to the server f Use Windows NT Integrated security Use a specific user name and password Username Basswood Blank password Allow sanna password 3 Select the database on the server C Attach a database file as a database name AA o aig the hlename Test Connection Lancel Help The Data Link Properties dialog box is the standard Windows system interface for configuring connection strings to data sources This dialog box provides all of the properties that the selected OLE DB provider supports You also can open this dialog box by double clicking a universal data link udl file in Windows Explorer The Data Link Properties dialog box contains four tabs Provider Connection Advanced and All The settings available on the latter three tabs depend upon the Provider selected The Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is used to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access NOTE HGA currently supports only a Microsoft OLE
330. may contain graphic features on different layers as such there are options to select the layer to import These options are explained below HINT If you are having difficulties importing your CAD drawing please try exploding all blocks 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 279 and re saving as a dxf file before attempting to import into HGA Selecting Layers When a CAD format is selected using the Layer Import menu navigate to the appropriate file and open it The following dialogue will load Import DXF Projection Projection Type UTM Coordinate System NAC 1983 UTM one 17M LU rit meters Select layers to import into a map The top portion of the dialogue lists the projection system properties of the current map project Below this frame is a Transform button This option is required only if you are not sure that the CAD file has the same projection system as the current map project In this case click Transform to georeference the CAD image Once you are done click OK to return to the Import DXF dialogue In this dialogue select which layers you wish to import into the map and click OK Transforming Coordinates The CAD file must contain the same units and projection system as the current map project in order for it to be displayed properly If there are differences then the CAD file can be Transformed to the map project s projection and coordinate system From the Import DXF dialog click
331. may set the color for each value simply click on the Color box under the Color column and the Windows Color palette will display Select the desired color and click OK to continue Repeat this for other values as desired Adjust the Transparency option to make it possible to see layers under the color shading zones The higher the value the more transparent the layer will be The value must be within the range 0 100 To display the value intervals in discrete color zones rather than continuous shading select 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 272 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help the Zebra checkbox Once the color settings have been defined click the Ok button xl P The grid size For the selected surface exceeds 300000 nodes 45 a result loading and displaying the surface may require several eal minutes Click OK to continue or click Modify where vou can coarsen the grid size in order to improve loading and processing times Modif A surface file with a large grid size may take several minutes to load depending on the performance capabilities of your computer For example a DEM surface file that is approximately 9mb may take up to 10 minutes to load If the grid size for the selected surface file exceeds 300 000 nodes the message shown above will display and you can choose to accept the original grid size or modify its dimensions to lower the resolution and decrease the loading time To accept the original
332. modified by selecting Settings Options from the main menu bar then select the OpenGL tab The 3D Explorer must be closed and re opened before the new Open GL driver will be used Vertical Exaggeration In Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer the vertical exaggeration factor can be changed at any time to obtain a more desirable vertical exaggeration of the project domain The vertical exaggeration factor is available to provide an improved 3 dimensional view when the scale of the Xand Y axis far exceeds that of the Z axis When opening 3D Explorer the default value of exaggeration factor is set to 1 The Exaggeration factor can be changed in two locations In the Display tree under the Project Name folder OR In the toolbar top toolbar of the HGAnalyst 3D Explorer window as shown below Exaggeration factor fi 0 Simply enter a new value in the field and press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard 13 2 Positioning the Panels Positioning the Panels The Display Tree Panel and the Navigation Panel are both dockable panels which means they can be moved and or docked to another location on the interface or they can be left as floating panels on your Windows desktop i e not docked to any location on the interface These panels can either be docked on the left side of the interface or on the bottom of the interface Moving a Panel To mowe a panel to another location position the cursor over the title bar Press and hold the left mou
333. n HGA Create the desired 3D view Press the Print button from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the wf Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The Report Editor allows you to either create a new report for your current fence diagram or add it to an existing report If you choose to add to an existing report the report editor adds the new map to the report As such multiple views of your Fence Diagram project s can be sent to a report one by one In order to be able to add the current fence diagram to an existing report you must first open the existing report Each view of your Fence Diagram is created with its associated legends The report will appear in the project tree once it is saved 14 6 Managing Reports Opening an Existing Report All reports saved in your project are listed under the Reports node in the Project Browser To open a report you may either double click on the desired report or select the Open Report pop up menu item by right clicking on the desired report All reports are opened in the Report Designer by default The designer displays the report layout and allows you to modify it before generating the report The print preview of the report can be generated by clicking on the Print Preview button on the toolbar De
334. n and select Interval from the combo box that appears A new Interval column will be added to the designer window Expand the Interval node and select IntervalEntities 2 4 Depth FES Interval DataTable hi E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField hi Bottom ntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField hi Select the data table or query and the fields for the top and bottom entity In this column the data table or query is any data source that contains from to interval data and the top and bottom entities are mapped to these from and to fields As in the Depth column once the intervals have been established the value field has to be defined To do so right click anywhere in the Settings frame and select Add Entity LOR PL Te won Description DataField from E Bottomentity A el Caption Bottom el MaS Description Delete Entity DataField to Select Text Entity or Image Entity from the combo box depending on the type of data you wish to display A new entity will be added to the Settings frame Using the combo box provided select the field that contains the value or image you wish to display 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 239 Datal able E TopEritity Caption Description DataField From BottomE ntity Caption Description DataField este ritity Caption Text Description Test DataField Value To 10
335. n easy to use Office like designer environment Supports VBScript and JScript events and expressions Provides Barcode control Allows report bookmarks and internet hyperlinks NOTE This chapter provides a brief overview of the features that the Report Editor offers For more details refer to the Active Reports on line help file This file is named AR2Std CHM and is found in the report folder of the HGA installation folder The default is Program Files Common Files Data Dynamics Active Reports AR2Std chm Simply double click on the CHM file to load the help file 14 1 About the Interface The Report Editor may be launched from HGA in several ways Select Project Report or click on the S Report button in most HGA modular windows Map Editor Cross Section editor 3D Explorer or the main window When this option is selected if there are report templates available for this module there will be a prompt to Select a Report Template before proceeding The Report Editor may be loaded from the Project Browser in the main window simply double click on an existing Report or Report template under the Reports node The report editor consists of two main windows e The Designer Window e The Viewer Window Each component of the Report Editor comes with its own set of toolbars and icons that perform specific tasks related to the window The following few sections present a detailed description of the toolbar icons for each component 14 2
336. nager window and the Cross Section Editor window The Layer Manager allows you to manage the layers in the map project The icons at the top of the Layer Manager provide some insight into the functionality 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 262 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Layer Manage Toolbar E Pokaan ape ho Textil aya UA T E Condor Lai Ghalia Lae i Bioro 5 ei Bia ieee WC Exceeds 1 mo par a rod Satter Colorihade wa 1 wag Ainpost cobos bmp wU Shade g E keii These features include E Group Control Expand and collapse group layers lt Visible Set the visibility status of the selected layer 7 Editable Make the selected layer editable or not by checking or unchecking the check box Currently only those shapefiles created in the Map Manager are editable E Label Displays the Layer name tJ Symbol Edit the symbol identifying the layer on the map The Layer Manager will contain numerous types of layers each represented by a different symbol type In the example shown here the layer types from top to bottom are as follows PointLayer Point shapefile represented by a point symbol These include station groups and data query layers imported into the map project LineLayer A line symbol indicates a cross section line contour line layer or annotation line PolygonLayer Polygon shapefile represented by a polygon symbol TextLayer Text annotation layer represented by a T symbol Contour
337. nce from the start point including all segments To finish the line and end the line measurement double click the left mouse button Define Cross Section Line Allows you to create a cross section line Make sure you are in one of the HGA data layers before drawing a cross section line Please see the section Defining a Cross Section Line for more details Create Cross Section Loads the cross section editor for the selected cross section line This menu item is activated only when a cross section line is selected highlighted There are two ways to highlight a cross section line e Choose the cross section line on the cross section line layer e Draw a new cross section line on a station layer For more details on creating cross sections please see Chapter 12 Cross Section Editor O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 313 11 2 5 View This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of the Map Window and the layers within the map project Full Extent This menu item will zoom the map window to its original full extents Zoom In Provides options for zooming into a section of the map that is defined by drawing a rectangle Place the cursor on the map and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for Zooming
338. nd GOS WES 1084 is NAD 197 To WES 1984 11 lao you wani fo cool ihis seine When presented with this dialog select Yes to accept the default geotranformation Otherwise select No to return to the Please Select Area dialog shown at top of page to select a new geographic area 2012 Schlumberger Water Services
339. nd Max values when you define the min and max format you must select these values from a calendar You can specify a Date Time format from the following options m d yyyy MMM yyyy MM yyyy yyyy 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 207 MMM hh mm ss tt tt AM PM hh mm ss You can set the Tick Interval by selecting one of the following options Min Hour Day Month Year Series Type Line displays the plot as a line chart Bar displays the plot as a bar chart NOTE You can also change the Series Type by right clicking on any data point on and plot and selecting Change Series Type 9 3 2 Data Series Settings Data Series Range settings can be accessed by right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Edit Range Settings from the pop up menu The following Series Settings dialog will appear Series Settings 7 X et smbal Within quidelin 100 Text Exceedences 120 Font Color Alignment Custom Use Different Label Source Label Source Include Pre fix Pre tis M Include Post fix Post E ceedence Sample Preview Esceedence e On the left side of this dialog there is a list of available data series for the selected plot You may also Add Data Range series and specify Data Series options for this Series This is useful if you want to identify data on the plot that exceeds a guideline or standard value and assign unique sym
340. ndow that opens the borehole s you have selected previously will be made available in the Select Station combo box at the top left of the borehole log designer You can now add the desired elements to the empty BHLP template as shown in the following screenshot 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 24 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Borehole Log Designer Sample Be i ioj xj Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 53621269 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 al EXA e Live update Apply Close Export Y Print Y Help 10 4 1 Adding Lithology Column To add a column to the BHLP right click on the Design node in the tree view and select the Add column menu option or click the El Add button in the toolbar O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 247 Borehole Log Designer Sample E 10 x ae Mawe A Add Group Add Column Add Plot Series Delete Show odias Select Column Type Select the desired column type from the pop up menu and press OK button Choose Column Type x Please Choose a Column Type Well Construction Interval Depth Picture A node identifying the column will be added to the tree view under the Design node For some columns such as Lithology and Well Construction the BHLP attempts to obtain data for the 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 248 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help borehole that is currently selected in the comb
341. ndwater contaminants The plume is generated using the 3D Interpolator tool then displayed with the 3D Explorer The following section describes how to interpolate 3D points data in order to create 3D plumes for details on viewing the plume see Chapter 13 3D Explorer Plumes Display Settings The 3D Plume generation starts with a data set the data set must be generated by building and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the 3D Interpolation The following are required fields for the 3D interpolation and as such must be fields that are present in your data query e X Y Z elevation of sampling point Value concentration value for one or more contaminants Sample Date if transient plume display is desired Once you have created a data query you may create a 3D Interpolated volume plume of the data To access the 3D Interpolation tools select Tools 3D Interpolation from the main menu and the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Interpolation Ioj x 30 Plume Project Hame soiLplume_data Add Data Source Data Source Mame Result Values A esult_ Values Date Field Date Granularity Sample_Date Day Transient Flume x Plume Name Data Source Date Field P Result Values Result Values Sample Date Regio o
342. neously Display non detect uncertainty or detection limits on the plot as lines or symbols Define data series ranges and modify display properties for different data ranges e g define a data range where the data exceeds the water quality standard values and assign unique symbol line and display properties for this data Select fields for plot grouping or data series grouping Modify display properties including axis labels symbols legends and intervals Print plots to a single or multiple pages Save plot settings as templates for re use Export plots to graphics format Copy plots to Windows clipboard 9 1 About the Interface Once you have created and selected a data query you may create a plot with the data set The plot component may be launched from HGA in several ways To create a new Plot Page Design right click on the Plots node on the Project Browser and select New from the pop up menu Existing plots can be opened from the Plots node in the Project Browser by either double clicking on the desired plot in the available list or by right clicking and selecting the Open pop up menu option NOTE A data query containing the required fields see below must be selected in order to launch the plots mode from the HGA main interface A typical plot window is shown in the following figure 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 195 Plot Page A Viewer Window Desi
343. ng 66 02 1 Sel Samping GE pi P Description Consistency E Merking Event GB 05 1 eiye 66 07 5 GE U8 User Calea ee MER E Time Secon Polo GB 10 P CE E aoo ENE Silty iy As j Silty Seay E Crosstabs T j F L GETI e md BESE dr opta BPS Aporta EE GB 16 Gern 6638 g GETS 68 20 GEN G6 22 Geez BE GR Tct Geet GB 28 fees 66 31 GER cen GEH TES GE Gea l GB mesm AT A J 4 iti 68 42 Rows 5 Ready 2 1 9 Data Query Tab The Data Query Tab will display the results of executing running a query When you select a query from the Queries branch of the project tree the Data Query tab will be activated and display the results of the selected query 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Hydro Gen nalyat Beta Demo Project loca tl Project gA Medules EjDatabase E Help ENTRA TAN ARO A Preject Thee j Station List i Statina Data Data Query Data Fiter E Well Profile O WB coupe Expand E of 214 b M RGxXxSOROR a Frei Ma sd A r m y a rare Sampa JD Sampie Dela Batch JD Eminencia Ple pu Ug Pel Uv id aj JE al ica LO O CA II AI ral irse esa en EN E CS A frat DE O E CR A CI A E E wen LN O LN CS DINT y al 7 5250 15 AE O Eco 1002 17 WATAPI Li 1004 1233 a he TAK POINT 20 1 153525013 amama Mie 120041 Den 004 Mia Pte
344. ng Color to use the predefined casing color or select Use Default Color and specify a different color Use the Angle vertical scroll bars to change the reducer angle NOTE The reducer angle must be within the range of 5 89 The reducer is not drawn to 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 237 scale and is intended for visualization purposes only 4u 50 140 Scale BHLP Settings x Well Construction e Visible Column Options Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reducer Scale Appearance Display Unit mi ha Major ticks interval fi O Label Position Lert z Color Fort Minor tick intervall 5 Background El Color LJ Help Apply OK Lancel The Scale tab allows you to modify the scale within the Well Construction column The settings for this scale are identical to those described in the Scale Column previously 10 3 5 Interval Column The Interval based column is designed to display data that has been collected at various intervals As in the case of the Depth Point based column the data can be displayed using graphics text or both Examples of data that could be displayed using a Depth Interval based column include screen locations interval based samples and their descriptions etc 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 238 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help To create an Interval based column click on the El Add button to add a new colum
345. ning a Cross Section ssssssnsssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenna nennen 422 Creating a Report Containing 3D Images ccccooonncnncconoconnnnnococonnnannncnononnnnnnnrrnnnnnn nan rrrrrrnn nana rnrrrrnnnnnnnrnrernnanans 423 Managing IRE DOWNS ierni A aa 423 Creating and Managing Report Templates ooocoococococccoccccncococococacananannnrarararanarananannnos 424 Import Reports from MS ACccesS iiuiiiii A a A 425 Chapter XV Appendices 430 Appendix A Project Files and Directory Structure oocococococococococncnncorocoronanananannnranananns 430 2 Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for IMportiNo o0ococcocococcncocaconcccananinnars 431 Appendix C Advanced Interpolation SettidgsS ocoocococcncccoccncccacancccanancccanancnrnnancnnnns 441 INVErSe DISTANCE ii Ad A doi 441 Natural NelgNbO Pi A A AS 442 A adaon raara ea raaa Naa sE EA aa KE KAA Kaa astlencunsasvvdiestweruecuusan cud AENA KEANE EASES Kenaa 443 4 Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes occcoccoccccccccococcncocaconcocananconannncarannnraranancnrnnancnnnrs 446 5 Appendix E Online GIS Data Resources occoccccccncococoncococanconananconanancaranancnranancnnnnancnnnna 447 6 Appendix F Frequently Asked Questions FAQ S ooococococcococococoncocococoncanocanoncananaranonnnno 451 7 Appendix G Configuring Geotransformation SettidgS oocococcocococcnccconcncacanancananancnnnzs 452 Index 0 2012 Schlumb
346. nly to the labels that may appear up side down such as line labels Checking Flip will ensure that all labels will appear right side up Click OK to accept the settings Make sure the Visible box is checked and click OK to apply the renderer You can add delete and edit different renderers using the toolbar located under the renderer list 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 288 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help x t Background Symbo OF Cancel FJ Help The renderer may also apply a background to the data symbols this background can be modified using the standard Point Style dialog Custom Renderers Custom renderers are renderers that have been developed by SWS Currently the only custom renderer available is the custom label renderer The custom label renderer is similar to the system label renderer described above however it provides additional options allowing for greater control and flexibility when displaying labels on the map Note Please note that system renderers and custom renderers are mutually exclusive e you cannot apply both a system renderer and a custom renderer to the same map layer To add a new custom renderer make sure Custom Renderers is selected from the comb box at the top of the Renderers dialog A new Custom Renderer may then be added by clicking on the Add button The Label renderer will be added to the list of renderers To configure the custom label renderer click the A
347. nnes 394 Creating a Vertical SMC ends 395 Creating a Horizontal SiGe oo ia 396 selecting a Cross Sectional Slee in 396 Deleting a SCE Ree ere a doo nee ee 397 Modifying a UCSI A eae 397 SCENE Configura IONS cunas id 397 Saving and Exporting Opio Sci 398 PAnting me SDM AG Cie ici coe aaa a 399 The Report Editor 402 About the Interface sanan 402 Repor Designer WINdO Wines 402 Report Designer Toolbars noiai aa A a a A a AEE EAN 403 Toolbox options for General TOO Sii cai 406 e r a a a a a eee a 406 A A ee OO a A TA ANA A 407 SNECMA arrasar tarada 408 IMAGES aa NA dd 408 O o e 408 O E 408 RICOTA dCi cds 408 Fame da i n 408 SUD RODO aries har cedees cet tail loci licita dao a EREA 409 A A O 409 OLES A RR Scene erie 409 Al COC SY rt A A AAA AAA eae aahatitet Ri ada 409 ACUVORODO isc 409 Using the Report Designer ii od 409 Report VIEWER wWINdO Wisin 414 Report Viewer TOGID ANS iii tater E 415 USING the Report VIE WEB oa 415 Report SG CLIN OS ici asd sims Seen cee neces asi nee aG 416 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Contents 9 5 Creating REDOMS aoa a 419 Creating Reports in HGA Main WINK OW sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnn 420 Creating a Borehole Log REDON iuisornidas diia 421 Creating a Report Containing a Map Project sssssassssnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen nnn 422 Creating a Report Contai
348. ns a list of the surfaces used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings for each individual surface To load a surface into the project select File Import Surface from the main menu The following settings are available for surfaces Name sets the surface name Visible shows hides the surface Color selects a color for the surface View selects a style for the surface choose from wire or solid Semitransparent sets the surface image as semi transparent Color from palette assigns colors from a palette based on the surface value e g elevation gw elevation etc Isolines For surfaces you may also display isolines These settings are displayed below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 381 Sa Surfaces fe By Surface E EA H E Cross Sections Data SE eee Setting Sos s esses Value a EET eee ee Iw J Max value 40 9045 Min value 821 098 Color from palette e E 1 Solid Huuto intervals ElLabels Visible EST lo Sete 1731625 Sets sce nn I BESS cirri eee necce e ea eer erie ee 9 46325 Ee Saree ee You may modify the isoline properties intervals and label settings 131 Line properties Color from palette indicates each contour line will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type Color indicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected T
349. ntain data for the selected stations The remaining settings for the plot are similar to those described in the sections Choose Data tab below Tabular For a tabular display click on the Data Settings button and the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 302 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help SC x Fields Condition Choose Data Layer Fields Display Fields ID ELEYATION gt z Pe oe OF Cancel Help In the Data Settings dialog you select which Layer Fields from the layer should appear as Display Fields in the layout table as well as define the Display settings EE E EA Select the desired fields from the left panel under Layer Fields then move fields to the Display Fields under the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the gt gt button To remove fields from the Display Fields click on the lt or lt lt buttons respectively Use the tT button to move the selected field up Use the button to move the selected field down Click on the Condition tab and you will see options for defining validation rules for one of the selected fields along with display settings for the table O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 303 Data Settings l x Fields Condition Choose Data Font Header Row Color Grid Line Color UN Violation Row Color Violation Fiel Field Condition Compare To ELEVATION gt Va
350. nterpolation Interpolated point data can be brought back into HGA where it can be used to create contour color shading and zebra layers for your map project Note Isatis is a geostatistical software package developed and sold separately by Geovariances To acquire a license of Isatis please visit http www geovariances com If Hydro GeoAnalyst detects an installation of Isatis on your computer the Contours dialog will appear on your screen x Mame Data to be Contoured Grid Info Choose Fie LL ses a Min Value l Data Min 321 09 Y of nodes 40 Mas Value Data Mas 340 49 Send to SATIS To send point data to Isatis follow the steps below In the Name field type the desired name for the Istatis study From Choose Field combo box select the layer attribute that will be interpolated In the Grid Info section specify the resolution of the interpolation grid Click the Send to Isatis button to create the Isatis study HGA will then create the appropriate files and folder structure of the Isatis study on your C drive e g CUISATIS MyStudy You can open the point data and perform the desired geostatistical analysis and data interpolation in Isatis For information on how to use the features available in Isatis please refer to the Isatis user s manual Once you have interpolated your data you can bring it back into HGA to create contours color shading and zebra layers To bring an interpolated data set back
351. o Append the stations so any station names in my data that are not in the database will be automatically added Then the validation also found have duplicates in the database some of the sample IDs already exist in the database Again can select what want to do either overwrite what is in the database or reject the duplicate sample IDs For this example will reject these sample IDs Result A ha Validation Results Validation Station Key Validation Validation Log Station Names will be used as unique identifiers for this transaction If you want to use station ID as the unique identifier please map the Station field with the Station ID not Station Name Legend Checking if Stations From File Already exists in DB The project database does not include the following Station Name s Append this will add the Station Name s to the project database Reject this will ignore all data associated with Station Name s that are not included in the project database A record with the same Station sample_id already exists in the database Replace this will replace all information of duplicated record s with the data from the file Reject this will ignore all duplicated records and add only the ones that are not already included in the project database if any A 1 Waming Message s You may choose to ignore the wamings and continue with the import ere 0 Error Message
352. o Increment field to your table An Auto Increment field is a special numeric field where the value of the field automatically 2012 Schlumberger Water Services ata Hydro GeoAnalyst Help increments each time a new row added to the table This allows you to easily keep track of the number of records in a given table Only one Auto Increment field can be added to a single table x The Delete button allows deleting the selected node This button is activated when either a table or a field is currently selected Data categories as well as some required tables e g the Station table and fields e g required fields ID X Y Elevation etc may not be deleted Sa The Add Linked Fields button is activated whenever a field is selected in the Database Browser If this option is selected the dialog shown below will be displayed requesting the user to prowde the fields that should be linked Select desired set of fields e X f Complete set of fields E Short set of fields Consists of three required fields Hame Value Unit field OK Cancel E Hep The concept of linked fields is introduced in Hydro GeoAnalyst in order to enhance data integrity If two or three fields are linked together Hydro GeoAnalyst tracks changes made to values under one field and makes appropriate changes to all other linked fields as appropriate Currently a maximum of three fields can be linked together Linking three fields may be us
353. o box and displays a preview in the viewer An example is shown below for a new Lithology column Borehole Log Designer Sample E he ioj xj Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 53621269 487 4030 00 323 50 324 50 BE Design H E Lithology Coarse Gravel a Px IS Gravel e Live update Apply Close Export Y Print Y Help 10 4 1 1 Edit Column Properties Column properties Entities can be set by expanding the Design node and clicking on the sub node to be updated For example to modify a Lithology column expand the Design node and the Lithology node and select LithologyEntities from the tree as shown in the following screenshot O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 249 Borehole Log Designer Sample y a e IEJ Cora daraw Medina ara AA Fx APF tarawi Vir Seared In some cases the BHLP may not be able to identify the default data source for the selected column type and as a result there may not be a preview In this event you can manually select the data source or query results for the column using the Data Table Queries property In the case of Lithology select the Lithology Entities node as shown in the previous screenshot 10 4 1 2 Specify Data Source First select if you want to use a Data table or a Query as the Data Source Then choose the respective table or data query from the list provided in the combo b
354. o display data that has been collected at various depths The data can be displayed using graphics text or both Water Level is an example of data that could be displayed using a Depth Point based column Water level information can be displayed through a combination of a symbol showing the level accompanied by a text label e g showing the date at which the displayed water level was recorded To create a Depth Point based column click the Add icon Select Depth from the combo box that appears A new Depth column will be added to the designer window Expand the Depth node in the Designer tree and select DepthEntities ES Well Construction E ES Scale ScaleE ntities Datal able E DeptheE ntity Caption Depth Description Depth D ataField hi Select the data table or query and the depth entity for the column using the combo boxes provided Selecting the field for the depth entity will create markers at the depths for which data is entered in the specified table or query At this point you can select what is displayed beside or in these markers Right click in the settings field and select Add Entity Diatal able E Depthe ntity Caption Description D ataField Select from Text Entity or Image Entity from the following combo box that appears 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 241 Add Entity NE xi Please Choose an Entity ImageE ritity OF Cancel
355. o display numeric data select the Use numeric format check box 10 4 Create a New Borehole Log Plot Example In Hydro GeoAnalyst only the borehole log plot templates are stored This is done so that the data for the plots will not be duplicated HGA reads the necessary data for a borehole log plot from the database when displaying the plot To design a borehole log plot template select at least one borehole in the Station List grid Alternately activating a Station Group suffices for this purpose as all boreholes are assumed selected if there is no specific selection made in the grid Once a station group containing the desired boreholes is opened and at least one borehole is selected right click on the Borehole Logs node on the Project Browser Select the New pop up menu option as shown in the following screenshot to design a new template 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 245 Fels Plots E New Import Design Export Design Refresh e Refresh All In the New BHLP Design window that appears enter a name for the new borehole log design New BHLP design a A El Mame Sample DE Cancel E Hep Note that the background color of the text box turns red if you type the name of an existing borehole log design indicating that you cannot have two BHLP s with the same name Modify your new template name slightly and the OK button will be re enabled In the Borehole Log Designer wi
356. o_ rojert VID HGAJO i 2 8 x De Edt yew Settings hp eS q Sty ete O Det Seno HGAX Display oa Tree i Cot Sech n Date Display Settings Navigation Panel The 3D Explorer interface consists of the following components Display Window Displays the 3D image of the selected elements Menu bar Provides menu commands for most of the functions Toolbar Provides shortcut buttons for some functions Display Tree A tree structured list of the available project elements Display Settings Displays settings associated with each element Navigation Panel Contains a set of navigation tools to control the position and orientation of the 3D image and adjust the light source location Loading Projects To load a 3D project select File Open from the main menu and navigate to a directory where the desired Cross Section is located or click the a Open button from the toolbar Supported files are HG Analyst Cross Section converted files with the extension 3XS OpenGL Settings 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 366 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help f Use hardware accelerator Use MS driver By default the 3D Explorer will attempt to use the vendor provided driver included with graphics acceleration hardware lf problems are encountered with the vendor provided drivers display performance inadequate then 3D Explorer provides the option to use the Microsoft Driver for Open GL The OpenGL settings can be
357. oaded from Hydro GeoAnalyst in several ways Select Tools Map Manager from the Main Menu of Hydro GeoAnalyst Select Record Display on Map and the selected Hydro GeoAnalyst records will be loaded onto a Map project a In the Hydro GeoAnalyst toolbar click on the Map button From the Hydro GeoAnalyst Project Tree select a map project branch from the Map node Once the Map Manager window is loaded the display should be similar to the one shown below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 261 Active Window E ii Menu _ p Project ayer Edt Tock View Select semg Help j i Bar jaa omes AGFA A wees a Velen TAOL Eatin Si Tool bar m tote n airing Layer a Manager Map Window Coord MAD VSO UTM Zora 17N Cum 7 Layer information t s ieee A LATA Projecti n System Coordinates Scale The Map Manager window contains the following elements Menu Bar Contains program menu commands Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used features in the Map Manager Layer Manager Manages activating a layer visualizing and or editing layers Map Window Contains the visible layers for the map project Layer Information Displays the system for the selected layer Coordinates Displays the X Y coordinates for the current mouse cursor location and the Map Projection system Scale Displays the scale for the map window Active Window Select between the Map Ma
358. of the window Repeat 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 51 these steps for additional fields To remove the mapping for a selected field F Select the appropriate row in the Preview grid F Click on the Delete Mapping button Units Due to the flexible nature of the LAS file there may exist one or more parameters with units that are not supported in HGA as such unit conversion will not be possible during the import Where the unit categories and units exist HGA will attempt to do unit conversion and import the data If the destination field does not support the selected source units there will be no conversion and the data will not be imported For this reason it may be necessary to modify the field settings for your database schema before proceeding with the import For more details see Chapter 13 Modifying Fields and View Settings When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step lf the data to be imported contains the Well Section then some additional information may be required in order to allow proper data transfer The Station Related Settings window as shown below will only be displayed if data is imported to the Stations table Projection Settings Define the coordinate system the projection system and the units for the stations in the source file Following successful import the new stations will be converted to the projection system
359. og plot directly on the selected cross section when displaying elements such as geophysical plots and well screen intervals the borehole log plot can be a valuable asset when creating a cross section interpretation The BHLP layout settings is shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 348 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 12 2 5 Help BHLF Layout Settings x Visible Horizontal Offset gt OF Cancel In the BHLP Layout Settings dialog there are several display options available BHLP Template select the desired BHLP template from the list Visible show hide the BHLP on the cross section In the grid in the middle of the dialog select which stations should display the BHLP on the cross section selecting too many stations may result in a crowded display Launches HGA Help placing the focus on the Cross Section Editor section 12 3 Cross Section Interpretations Creating the Cross Section As mentioned earlier cross section locations must be drawn using the Define Cross Section Line option or the CrossSection Line button ci in the Map Manager See Chapter 11 Defining a Cross Section Line for details on this procedure Once the cross section line is defined the corresponding cross section can be created from the Map Manager as follows In the Map Manager select Tools gt Create Cross Section from the main menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button all on the toolbar Click Yes to create
360. ogy Hydrogeology and Model Simply click on the sample box beside the appropriate label and a Font options dialog will appear as shown below Font P Font Font style Size arial Bold 12 Cancel Arial Black Fr Arial Narrow Tr AvantGarde Bk BT Tr AvantGarde Md BT F BankGothic Lt BT F BankGothic Md BT Effects Sample Strikeout M Underline AaBbYyZz Color Black Script Wester Define the desired font settings then click OK to return to the Options dialog Rulers Tab Controls the appearance settings for the axis of the cross section plot For each ruler vertical and horizontal you may define e Foreground Color e Background Color e Marker Width e Min Tic Pixels e Tic Numbers e Font e Vertical Exaggeration Define the vertical exaggeration scaling factor for new cross sections There are two options Default value or User defined Specific If the default option is selected the map manager will automatically calculate and assign the most appropriate vertical exaggeration factor NOTE Please see Change Vertical Exaggeration in the Edit menu item discussed previously for information on how to change the vertical exaggeration once a cross section has been created Screen Water Levels 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NN Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Controls the appearance settings for how screens and water levels are displayed on the cross section Thes
361. oint thereafter Borehole log plots can be created for one or more boreholes at once based on a desired borehole log plot design Once the design is acceptable a borehole log report can be generated for any or all boreholes in the selection through the use of the Report Editor Borehole log reports once generated can be exported to various formats including HTML RTF PDF that are supported by the Report Editor The borehole log plotter can also be used as a data entry assistant in HGA by displaying well construction details as data is entered in tables that are related to the Borehole log plot Moreover the borehole log plotter is an invaluable tool in the process of making geologic and hydrogeologic interpretations of your data under the Cross Section Editor 1 2 10 Map Manager The Map Manager built on ESRI s MapObjects technology provides a spatial view of any set of selected data Basemaps of the site can be quickly imported allowing for meaningful interpretation of borehole and well data The Map Manager is designed in such a way that most files required for a desired map view are generated automatically The true power of GIS is harnessed when it is used for spatial analysis of multiple data sets These spatial data sets can be combined to prowde Groundwater recharge flux maps Aquifer yield capacity Aquifer vulnerability Contamination risk assessment Geologic cross sections Completion diagrams Contour Mapping In addi
362. oject Tree tab group The Project Wizard will then appear The Project Wizard contains three steps each step appearing in a new window with the various settings for a new project These include Step 1 Set Database Environment In this window specify the server and database to be used for the project and the connection string if necessary Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables Select a database structure from a list of available templates or create a new database template Step 3 Set Project Properties Location and Soil Settings In this window specify the project name project folder project location projection system units and specify the SCS soil settings for the project The project wizard is designed in a sequential fashion after defining the necessary inputs in each window press the Next gt button to proceed The Next button will only become activated after the necessary fields have been defined These required fields are indicated by an asterisk Set Database Environment The Set Database Environment window shown below is the first step in the Project Wizard and provides the controls needed to select a MS SQL Server and create select a database for the new project O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Creating New Projects Project Wizard pS gt 10 x Set Database Environment Select Server and Database Server ce OGODON WATSGEODATABASE i Windows Authentication SOL Server Aut
363. olor 13 4 4 Axis Display Settings The Axis display element controls the appearance of the lines and labels for the X Y and Z axes The axes are primarily used to indicate the total dimensions size of the 3D image and to orient the image when it has been rotated 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 378 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help F Stay on top M E Default Settings Fl YBX3D Elf Site maps Ey WEX3D E Surfaces a Cross Sections Data EE Stations E Interpretations of Model Layers fy Geology Layers Ey Hydrogeology Layers Setting Name As Visible O Z Color P ElLabel properties Visible mia mia Coor o O Sze 0 025 JA Label Al vba YI zZLael ee eal Sets the label attributes e Live Update Apply The default axes labels indicate the axes direction and the units but this can be customized to display alphanumeric text A new name may be defined for each of the axes along with label size and color settings 13 4 5 Sitemap Display Settings The 3D Explorer supports AutoCAD DXF files and BMP files for site maps The Sitemaps category contains a list of the sitemaps used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings for each individual Sitemap 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 379 _ gt gt j k gt 2 Xx Stay on top M E Cross Sections Data H E AA o Setin Value a ME AA be M Semitransparent f Z Level for bitmap
364. olor Legend are defined by the Color Palette settings for the selected data type element see previous section Other display settings including Title Text size Text color and Frame color can be customized using the display settings options shown in the figure below o tig oO Value a TYOC Palete Autoresel palette ElColor legend Visible 4 G El Textsize TS Texteolor 2 o Fame Framelinecolor Framefilcolor The color legend will automatically appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen whenever a display object using the color palette is plotted e g color map It can be moved to any other location in the Display Screen by dragging and dropping it at the desired location a 13 6 Cross Section Data Display Settings The Cross Section Data tree contains the properties of the cross sections loaded in the project e Cross Sections e Stations e Interpretations IMPORTANT Currently cross sections cannot be displayed in the 3D Explorer if they have been created based on a map project that uses a geographic coordinate system latitude longitude in decimal degrees In order to display cross sections in 3D Explorer they must be created in a map project that uses a projected coordinate system e g UTM where the units are either meters or feet 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 392 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 13 6 1 Cross Section Settings The Cross Section contains the name as
365. om this database and the field which should be used as the StationID from the respective picklists A preview will appear in the lower half of the window Click OK to begin the import The Template Manager creates the new table by importing all fields and their settings into Hydro GeoAnalyst The created table will have the General structure The Template manager does not attempt to capture primary key settings so this must be defined after the table and its fields are imported In addition as with any table the user has the option to modify the properties of the table All newly imported tables automatically become child tables to the Stations table Deleting Tables A table can be deleted by selecting it from the project browser and then either by clicking on the xl Delete button at the bottom of the window or by right clicking and selecting the Delete table pop up menu item NOTE The stations table is required in all projects and may not be deleted However it is possible to modify some of the fields in this table with the exception of the station ID name and X Y co ordinates Defining Table Relationships Once the primary key is set for the selected table a relationship between the current table and other tables in the database can be established To create relationships in the Table is PARENT to grid select one or more tables to which the current table would be a parent table Then for each table select one or mor
366. ome of the commonly used features Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no options for the selected layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance For example the option to add a vertex is active only when a polygon or a line is selected a Save button saves the current cross section project Print button sends the current cross section view to the report editor k Selection Pointer feature is used for selecting objects in the active interpretation N Draw Polygon feature is used for drawing a polygon or a rectangle in the active layer AS A Add Text features is used for adding annotation to the selected layer x Delete Selected Object feature deletes the selected object shape from the currently activate layer Draw Line feature is used for drawing a model layer line in the selected layer h Add Vertex feature is used for adding a vertex to the selected object polygon or line This button is activated only if an object is selected hx Delete Vertex feature is used for deleting a vertex from the selected object polygon or line This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected Link Vertex feature is used for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines This feature is only availab
367. ome of the project settings The coordinate type and the coordinate can be adjusted after the project has been created Additionally you can adjust the Material Specification can be adjusted The Database Server and Database name can been seen here but these cannot be adjusted 3 5 Spatial Geo Point Making use of the spatial geo point option within SQL Server 2008 R2 we can have a more direct link to ArcGIS When creating or upgrading HGA projects to version 2012 1 and using SQL Server 2008 R2 you will notice a new field called geo_point in the Location station table when in the Template Manager Additionally any Map Ready queries will now include this field as well ArcGIS is able to recognize this field and be able to plot your stations using this field Any time you make changes to your X and Y coordinates in HGA for example adding deleting or editing the geo point will be automatically recalculated Therefore all you need to do is select the refresh button F5 in ArcGIS and your points will automatically be adjusted as it is directly reading the points from the database Please be aware that if you are using a Projected Coordinate system for your project the geo point is being calculated as WGS 1984 lat long as this is the internal way HGA stores coordinates in the database If you are using a local coordinate system for your project then 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Creating New Projects 107 the geo point will n
368. omize the appearance of the contour labels Visible shows or hides the labels Text color controls the color of the label Text size controls the size of the labels Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value Multiple Labels enables showing multiple labels on the line Distance sets the distance value between each label smaller distance values will result in more labels Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 390 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help The labels are plotted on the top and bottom surface of a flat 3D rectangular box The size of the box will be automatically adjusted to fit the text size but the Box color and Box depth can be customized 13 5 4 Color Palette The color Palette is used to customize the range of colors used to represent the values of selected model elements for each display object this includes the color maps isolines and isosurfaces The color Palette settings will govern the color scaling used on each display object The color Palette settings can be modified by selecting one of the display elements and clicking the button in the Palette field of the Display Settings table The Palette window will appear as shown in the figure below x 0 Value 139574 5 T ER Rn COLOR A Heset Change color Mm Add Delete A Mu OK Cancel The default color setting contains a gradation of seven colors ranging from a dark blue at
369. on GROSA dad 26 Data Cale G Orie S unn idas 28 Adj s table WINGOWS wiaceeesssicecesdeveseranvactesaiiea aaea aeaa aa ds 29 Project Tree TaD ninen a a E A E r a tee creduatveneaantens 30 Sgen elgi E a Tiel A E E E E E E E E te nds E E E EE 31 Station Data Tabu a a Sasi auaaneineuveenitweuneanwaneas 32 Data Query Fab sisi iia dior sdd 33 Data Pinte Tai A O 34 Well Profile Tab aia aa 35 DAt ENUY a a A as 36 MGA Quick Check e Putas 37 Hydro GeoAnalyst Menu Bal ra is alii 40 Project 9 seuheteiced J oteecedateaiccc a E eda vine tcadian cen Oubawe sav susleuuedediectelvanmedl Su a a a 40 So Se ane ae A ee ee ee een A ee nee 40 OPE A CA Sone rene ma ee ADIT o e ee 41 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 4 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help opem Om BACKUP mererien nent a one eee Rene eer ee cer eke error erer rere ae kee see 41 A se a ee ee ec ae 41 O Mel es sch a A a eee 41 COMMIS SF ANIC eres dsct tence aa ole te cat ss e al eee ct 42 IS tall tie Demo Fo eo o een meaner 45 o A ne ee 46 BI dia o o eo siacenant ast nena ene ee ecae teeta cease 46 O ala a al Saat et 47 Modes A E 47 Ei E E a ee eae ace 47 O o A Sace eee cateene ans 47 e A o e otc 65 Quern Bulder sii ii aaa 68 SU A A ee ee ee 68 Material Spec mMeatons EMOL cestas core ears ee cd uds bi coil 68 A e eee al eel a 11 Tie SOIC SiON Cl ACIERTO on cnae R aaa edits eta ananc ene ontene tat ee 76 COS St RENO eb al es cE ence 8a 76 DA E a tane toys asc E laaadateeaee eke 76
370. on Related Settings Similar to the import procedure if you export station data you must specify the projection type and projection for the stations in the exported file 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 12 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Data transfer system Export NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N 7 Once this is complete Export button and Close button to complete the process 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 1 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 6 Queries This chapter provides a detailed description of the Query Builder and Crosstab queries Within a HGA project it may be necessary to perform different types of queries for data filtering reporting and management A few examples of data queries are provided below e Select wells drilled later than 1995 and earlier than 2000 e Select wells with discharge over 500 gpm e Select boreholes deeper than 150 feet e Select boreholes where the overburden thickness exceeds 20 feet e Locate groundwater concentration exceedances for BTEX In the Query Builder window the query fields and conditions can be quickly defined Once the queries have been created they may be easily accessed from the Project Browser where each new query will appear as a new node Using the Query Builder it is possible to create two types of queries e Station Group Queries and e Data Queries Each query type is discussed later in this chapter 6 1 About the Interface The Query Builder may be loaded from HG
371. on Section data related to the station location driller etc Parameter Curve Information Sections descriptive and or measured data for one or more downhole parameters When importing the LAS file in HGA the following options are available Import the Well Sections and Parameter Curve sections use this option if you want to import a new station and one or more measured parameters for this station A new station will be added to the database using station details name co ordinates etc in the LAS file If the station already exists in HGA you will be prompted to overwrite the details using those in the LAS source In addition data from one or more parameters Parameter Sections may be imported to one or more tables in your database Import only Parameter sections use this option if this station already exists in your project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find an appropriate match in the current project When you select this option the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 49 Import LAS file Step 1 Select LAS file Hote Select data souce LAS File Ex Spacity a data transter package The first step requires selecting the import package and data SOUICE Create an import package or select from existing packages The import package contains mappings from previous import sessions and allows you to save time when importin
372. on the line the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Adding Multiple Vertices To insert multiple vertices along a model line follow the steps below e From the layer manager panel enable edit mode for the Model interpretation layers e Select a model interpretation line from the cross section e Right click the line and select Insert Vertices along Line The following dialog will display O Insert ertices S x Insert Vertices along the Line A By distance m DE Cancel FJ Help You can insert multiple vertices in one of the following two ways e By number inserts a specified number of vertices along the model line at regularly spaced intervals e By distance inserts a vertex at a specified distance interval e g every 50 metres along the entire model line Select the desired method specify a value and click Ok to insert the vertices Other properties of model layers such as name pattern and description can be edited by using the Tools gt Model Layers menu option described in the Model Layers 12 3 5 Remove Stations from Cross Sections When working with a cross section in the Cross Section tab one or more stations can be removed from the cross section line by right clicking on the cross section and selecting the O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 350 Remove Stations option Then s
373. on1 AND OR Condition2 ORDER BY Field1 Field2 Field3 where the highlighted words are internal to the SQL language and the terms in the brackets are optional To modify the data source information of the ADO control in your report 2012 Schlumberger Water Services aa Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select the ADO control by clicking on the appropriate icon on the toolbar Display the Properties explorer window if it is not already visible Select the Custom properties option by clicking on the button next to this item A dialog will appear Provide or modify the desired options 14 3 Report Viewer Window The Viewer allows you to visualize the final report as it would be printed It can be considered a print preview of your reports Once your report arrives at the viewer it is ready to be printed saved in the native binary format of the Report Editor or exported to the various formats A report preview can be generated by clicking on the el Preview button from the Designer window s toolbar A sample of the Report viewer window is shown below with a report template loaded for demonstration purposes E New Dala Query Report mas_evaler_fevel lo Ll ai CATA Ao TI A fe Ga 100 P BBEL wom Conadi Xx A A O ers 7 0 E oe ee id Pere oe 4 4 Dyan es A 4 Company Name Query Report Address Propect Wraleloo imestigalion Contact Info Location Waterloo ON D
374. ons or any line type features such as rivers and highways in this dialog it is possible to specify the features to be displayed on the cross section plots The dialog also allows you to set display properties of these features The following options are available Name Name of the intersecting layer read only Field Select a field to represent the layer typically Name ID Text Font Select a font for the label Symbol Define symbol properties for the selected layer Angle Define label angle The Field column contains a list of available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view The Symbol column contains the symbol options for the selected layer Double click on the field in this column to load the options shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NON Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Point Style E4 Pattern Font WH l_Symbol Symbol Xx id Fil PO Border MT Sample x OF Cancel To show the intersections on the Cross Section Click on the Cross Section tab From the top Menu Bar click Tools and then Update Cross Section The following image shows the intersections between the cross sections Map Project Site map E E lol x File Edit View Tools Help mele ZNIX AA EE U Parae aeo Sa dew BB E a EAA a 3 o E lv LJ Model 3 Topography 4 BottLayer2 a 3 0 aM C Geology Medium Sand Gravel
375. ons with these values will be excluded from the import These coordinates could also represent erroneous coordinates Add Stations to Group Another feature provided in the Settings tab of the DTS is that of grouping new stations as desired The DTS lists all station groups available for the project All newly imported stations will be added to the Project station group by default If selected these stations will also be inserted in one or more of the station groups listed in this tab You can also enter a name of a new station group in the last row and the stations will be inserted to this new group if desired Duplicate Stations 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 137 Since Stations can use an ID as the unique identifier the DTS allows you to store stations with duplicate names in your database Duplicate Station names are common in larger projects that may involve stations from various sites If you attempt to import duplicate station names or import a station name which duplicates All Stations CT Operation name Stations in Source ay ea 1 1 19 ae ea a a a Preferences for Stations with Conflicting Names 535646 83 536892 536420 15 537172 5 535365 6 5351 1 536309 5 536267 7 535772 8 534994 4 136063 1 536174 3 535703 6 036724 1 O36 46 69 Y 4013320 23 4813306 4813671 51 40133643 40147391 4913176 5 401408 3 49012850 0 4914008 3 401
376. op down menu All fields linked to a DataControl in a current report are listed in the Fields window under the Report Navigator tree SummaryDistinctField Specify the field name of the field used in a distinct summary function SummaryFunction Set the function to be used for aggregating data SummaryGroup Set the name of group section for summarization SummaryRunning Determines whether the summary is a running value or not SummaryType 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 408 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Determines the type of summary to be used 14 2 2 3 Check Mark Value Allows you to determine whether the starting condition of the checkmark is True checked or False unchecked 14 2 2 4 Image LineColor Style Weight Set the properties of the lines borders for the object Picture Select the picture you wish to display in the frame Supported graphics formats are bmp ico cur jpg gif and wmf SizeMode Specify how the picture will be displayed in the frame Clip will display the picture at original size and if the frame is larger than the frame it will be cut off Stretch will adjust the image proportions to fit the frame even if it means distorting the picture Zoom will adjust the size of the picture until the entire image is visible in the frame and there is the least amount of unfilled space possible 14 2 2 5 Line AnchorBottom Anchors bottom of vertical lines to section bottom x1
377. or set the color for the outline of the callout box Transparent set the transparency select from True or False Box shape select the box shape choose from Rectangle Round Rectangle or Oval Tip style set the tip style choose from Triangle or Line Padding set the padding thickness the higher the value the larger the box shape will be around the tabular values in the layout Shadow display a shadow around the callout box select from True or False Shadow Color select the shadow color only used if Shadow has been set to True Offset X set the X Offset this parameter controls how far the callout box will be placed horizontally from selected station A positive offset will result in the callout box displayed to the right of the station A value of O will center the call out box over the station A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed to the left of the station Offset Y set the Y Offset this parameter controls how far the callout box will be placed vertically from selected station A positive offset will result in the callout box displayed below the station A value of 0 will center the call out box over the station A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed above the station When you are finished with the Display Settings click OK to return to the layout window Click OK once more to create the layout on the map as seen in the examples below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help
378. oringa_yeth_ TOE f GEO ETE EN 4414060 00 5g 50 1 1 Berehole SE Steno Data GEI B O 338 00 333 00 Esrelule BT Queries GeT manges 4etencong 12850 ECT Besehole Per l eet a en a Beanie i a ae GETZ EE 1281 80 153 1633 Borebule Cunedabe are Ea aga a z 55 pz ir ll Terehe Log a ae te eee BAT ilap Projects GETS 535065 16 E rado In Berehala ta Crvss Sectona G6 15 53596034 43142510 324 ES 5 Borehole WI Wir fake Th 53555 AR 4814345 40 Trh Se L Se Reraluda Ll reports Gb 5577666 a 25 ERE Borehole GB 14 525575 4H ano a 343 Borehole fap 51050 au 390 13 TG Brehy 66 20 saen 4 14 00 0 TE 131 76 Besehole Gia ee ee 15 1635 Borehole EEA asma aan 30758 238 58 Beeehale GEJ agar 4162030 32347 ETE Berehala GR 24 mewa an 3052 126 36 Eseehole GEJ Perera TN ETE 325 81 Borehole GB 26 53556450 apan 328 12 271 Borehole GEJ sasaeg 19 481466600 3275 iE Borehole 66 26 EE 4514535 fo i54 12643 Borehole GE 2Y 53559863 481450180 34425 EF Ecrelule GEH Sen a 39039 1313 Borehole GEJ amasa ama aare 329 78 harennle Ghia 5527656 EM 155 33752 Bocahole GB 35 5I5749 00 481471190 30645 327 45 Borehole GE S0 535556 06 481479150 3335 EE Borehole Ghat 5547643 4 tarc z 32740 328 40 Borehole DEA 53535239 M 33161 33264 Ecrelrule t Station Groupe Enrrhales Roae H
379. ort 46660 Your EDD Data was imported successfully You may select another EDD file to be imported or close this form Select the Import button to import the records and the import dialog updates to inform you that the import was successful Now you can select another EDD file to import or close the dialog box 2 2 2 3 Export Use the Export option to export data from the HGA project data may be exported to external files in various formats using the DTS Export Data This menu item will load the DTS with an option to export data from any grid to one of the following file formats Text CSV TXT ASC TAB Excel 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or Any OLE DB compliant database such as MS Access Database MDB For more details on this utility please see the DTS section in Chapter 5 The Data Transfer 2012 Schlumberger Water Services e Hydro GeoAnalyst Help System Export Grid All HGA data that can be displayed in any of the grids can be exported to a number of external destinations The data could be a station list from any station group a result of a query execution or any data from the data entry tabs HGA allows exporting data displayed in grids to various output formats including e Comma separated text file CSV e Extensible Markup Language XML e MS Access Database MDB e ESRI shapefile SHP e Hypertext Markup Language HTM All or part of the
380. ose enough to the boundary line the cursor will snap to the boundary Click once on the left boundary to add a vertex at this location and start the line Slowly move the mouse cursor to the right across the cross section to the interval in the first station which represents the model layer When the cursor is within the specified buffer distance from the station s lithology interval snapping will be activated With a left mouse click add a vertex at desired and appropriate locations both within and outside station intervals Continue to move the mouse cursor across the cross section using the left mouse button at each station to add a vertex at the desired location for the model layer At the right cross section boundary click once more with the left mouse button to add a vertex and complete the line when the mouse cursor becomes close enough to the boundary line the line will snap to the boundary The selected model line will be drawn at the specified location NOTE The model line is drawn using the attributes that were defined for it at the time it was created Most attributes of a model interpretation layer can be modified by right clicking on 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 356 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help the desired model interpretation layer and choosing Properties from the pop up menu A dialog similar to that shown below will appear Model Line E Name Description Pattern gt Color Size 2 S
381. oss section DD FF Mike test33 290 270 280 260 my ry 7 A A gt q AA AR A yo po O e A e x SS Fot v J T i Pi y SA p 2 wrest M y y i 4 250 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 Distance m 11373 17 328 91 Snapping to the end of the cross section line If the model layer pinches out from any given point on the cross section to the end of the cross section line the cross section editor can draw the model line from that given point on for you To do this double click on the first vertex The model line will automatically be created for you See the bottom most layer in the figure above In this example the model layer pinches out at the right side of the cross section 12 3 4 4 Editing Model Layers Editing Model Layers Once the model interpretation layer lines are drawn it may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more vertices or add more vertices To move a vertex 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a58 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select the k Pointer tool from the toolbar Click once on the desired model layer line to activate Click on the vertices to be moved Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex e Select the k Pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once anywhere on the line to activate the line e Select the h Add Vertex tool from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location
382. ot contain and coordinate system information only the values of the coordinates Within the current version of ArcGIS version 10 you can select File Add Data Add Query Layer O ei ina ra Fa bla a Enri a A GRA Li a ep pl re Corde n L Q 2 ld Chi 4 i eee Ca migo der ba pom Da Diei A uE po Ad ELA Ad Din de p Li ler E A dahi Pa Pie y peta Deeg ich FW Plata Hie Ee Pipa e gt i ld Beste i oo i an kig Pci dll Gg Layer Select New to make a new connection Manage Connections Easing Cormection s Mame Connection lo squeryer Provide your SQL Server details please remember you must be using SQL Server 2008 R2 and the database you wish to connect to Database Connection Properties Data Sourte Dait a i supper bad by pour DEMS Then select OK and you will see the New Query Layer dialog box here you can see all the tables and fields in your database You can write your own SQL statement or you can copy a SQL statement from one of your HGA saved queries in HGA in the Query Builder on the SQL View tab For this example wrote a simple query to take all the information from the station table 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 108 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Ti Pes doo atean is do mila ide dbo squiier_best imm boas iima o bip tioba derby EEEE E PA Dirion Si eee T Oo i Shoe enced Opie When you select the finish button the laye
383. ot designer toolbar provides the controls for designing the plot page The following buttons are available I Save button saves the current plot design H Save As button saves the current plot design as a new name El Add button provides two options Add Plot will prompt you to select a template to be used Add Default Plot will create a new plot using the default plot template xl Delete button deletes the selected plot or line series 2 Refresh button refreshes the design with new settings or data Zoom in button allows you to zoom into the selected plot page to zoom in on selected plot data within an individual plot 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 196 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 7 Zoom out button returns to the original zoom view ES Fit to Page button fits all plots to the current viewer window size At the bottom of the window you will find the following buttons The function of these buttons from left to right is Previous Page scroll to the previous page in the plot design Next Page scroll to the next page in the plot design Zoom To zoom in on plot data in an individual plot use the mouse cursor to draw box around the MAE desired data a sample is shown in the screen shot below Plot Desegneer El wabengualty Eleciical Conductivity Dym Tee Electrical Conductivity vs Time Ba 550 ae 540 535 A 530 y a kal LA A 620 i F pol t i
384. ottLayer2 288 9999999291 4 46 9999999460998 Model Source Condition 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 BottLayer3 241 999999983041 19 9999999830406 Model 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 Coarse Gravel 321 99999997 7853 7 99999988853 Geology Station_Groups sl 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 Fine Sand 314 000000089323 16 0000001468975 Geology 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 Silt 268 00000008306 26 0000001000194 Geology Boreholes y 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 Clay 297 999999942426 9 00000001328527 Geology x Adyanced Close Help Rows 250 Time 0 0 0 47 For more details on using the Query Builder please see Queries Text labels lines and shapes can be added to any layer in the cross section To add 12 5 Adding Annotations to the Cross Section annotations you must select the layer but NOT make it active i e do not check the active edit check box Once the layer has been selected right click and select Annotations from the list of options The Edit options shown in the following screenshot can be used to add edit and delete text lines and polygons 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 361 Saye Delete view SD Copy From Geo layers Properties Model Label Update Erosssection Show Intersecting Info Annotations Edit Text F i Edit Line ove P Edit Polygon Move Down Settings To add an annotation select the appropriate option from the list to enter Edit
385. ou can validate the accuracy of the georeferenced raster using Control Points Control points are simply locations on the raster image of which real world coordinates are known Real world coordinates can be derived from geographic sources such as topographical maps or GPS units By comparing the georeferenced raster coordinates with their corresponding real world coordinates you can determine if the raster has been georeferenced accurately To add a control point Click the a button from the toolbar Click a location on the raster image where the real world coordinates are known A dialog similar to the one shown below will display Control point ne 5369972879747 Ye 481 3771 400585 XP ass Yp 303 Coordinates shown in the above dialog X2 Y2 represent the interpolated coordinates derived from the two or three specified georeference points for that particular location on the image You can validate the accuracy of these coordinates by comparing them to the real world coordinates of that location Note To improve precision you may want to Zoom In directly on the location before adding the control point Click Ok to accept the Control point You can add additional control points by simply clicking on a different location on the raster image All control points are stored in a table Shown below which can be accessed by clicking Edit Control Points from the menu bar 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 278 Hydro GeoAnalys
386. ou have an option to specify if you want a specific date range for the water levels or simply include all water levels This will be displayed as water level elevations in the Online Share when you select a station on the Map Online Sharing General Stations Queries Maps Please select a map from the list a Selection gt ET SiteMap test i iji TVOC Exceeds 5000 ug per L Elevation_contours a Topography WQ_Data CrossSectionLine5 Stiff Airports 1 Water Courses Major Railroads Urban Areas HOGS SbE000080 a Ground Water Level Time Series Plot All data O Specify date range From 1 1 1900 To 1 11 2012 FAA i a sn e q 7 Launch browser after publishing les Following are some screenshots of an example project Online Share 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NN Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Ro E ro mam ios tamme pasani a uienangar E F TaT AE gr Dd tas iman semi as 1 pam S ele e aviv Ter n ed lip a A pa e tt Ver ens a Hep Ea a es fee Te e Cong gt Uia P ura we 4 lt P Gey a F hd wee e ate i i puva a a gt gt Pap em eee i Briana a a hpr lees we Tee wert 6 e O poas AMAID MAE TET COTS IA bat GA aut TI eee e Te wee t e Dee met we 1 Tirada met abe w ina Ir gt et mo os Them ghee wot we ina Diserat met P wor mn trenar met 6 ra mme rc e we ew Mr met Mo weer Thea
387. ound color In the Data Markers Editor window there are several options available for setting the display properties of data fields and defining colors for conditions Click the El Add button to add a condition Next define the condition and specify the color scheme in the following fields e Fact Field select a data field from the list e Minimum define a value for the lower limit e Maximum define a value for the upper limit e Cell Style define the display properties for the condition including the BackColor Alignment Font Styles ForeColor Gradient Style GradientBack Color and Progress Bar Color When you have defined the settings press the A Apply Changes button To delete an existing condition simply select the appropriate row in the table and click on the xI Delete button When you are finished click on the OK button The values should then be colored accordingly in the crosstab report Edit Value Markers To edit a value marker simply double click on the desired item from the list of markers Now you may make changes to the cell style properties or the Min Max values Once the changes have been made click the fel Apply Changes button 7 3 Printing Crosstab Reports Crosstab reports can be easily printed directly from the crosstab component Before printing you may want to first define the page and print settings These settings are described below Page Settings 2012 Schlumberger Water Servi
388. ove the selected soil type down use the id button To delete the selected soil type within a SCS press the x button Press the ley Save button to save the current SCS settings NOTE If you want to re use this new SCS in a new project you must save the current database template Then create a new project with this database template and the SCS will be available For details on saving database templates see Chapter 13 Exporting the current template as a Database template Modifying and Deleting a Soil Classification System 5 To modify an SCS select the desired SCS then use the A button to load this into the edit window on the right To delete an SCS select the desired SCS then use the x button on the lower left corner of the window NOTE Only user defined Soil Specifications can be modified or deleted The Default Specifications USDA USCS DIN 2043 Compton s IAH may not be modified or deleted from the project Changing Soil Classifications Once a project has been created it is recommended that the SCS not be changed the reason for this is that existing cross sections with defined geology will be impacted by changing the soil names and patterns However if it is necessary to change the SCS this may be done in the Miscellaneous Settings dialog available under the Project Properties menu 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 2 2 2 7 List Editor This menu item loads the List Editor whi
389. ovider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAF Services Microsoft OLE OB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE OB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DE Simple Provider MSD ataS hape SOL Server Replication OLE DE Provider for DTS OK Lancel Help Select the Provider option For this example select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers this option allows you to choose from such sources as Text Excel or Access Click on the Connection tab once more to display the original dialog 2012 Schlumberger Water Services asa Hydro GeoAnalyst Help E Data Link Properties Under the Specify the source of data select the option Use Connection String Click on the Build button and the following dialog will appear O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appe ndices 435 Select Data Source El Ei File Data Source Machine Data Source Look ir Data Sources X DSN Mame Hew Select the file data source that describes the driver that you wish to connect to TOU can Use any file data source that refers to an ODBC diver which ts installed on Your machine Cancel Help In this dialog select from a list of data sources Since none are available click on the New button to create a new one The following dialog will then appear Create New Data Source E Select a driver hor which you want to set up a data source Driver do Microsoft Access mdb
390. ow we have an option to create folders on the Query branch of the Navigation tree so you can organize your queries Right click on the Query branch and you will find the option Add Folder Simply provide a name for the folder and then you can drag and drop your saved queries into the folder Ti vee re TD miera rpe T A SA e T Cra Seer MAA MM Com paci n _rodal_ nipona AA Y Boards Too ras T A M 7 sol_desc_concuteraa T dera D Ti Se a Ca T v Skala Ci T ME Wa ata 50 L Ti Desa Plot i ri oT i 2 3 1 Toolbars There are different tool bars available within the program The top toolbar with the larger buttons provides quick access to the various modules in HGA e g Map Manager Materials Specifications Template Manager Chemical Analysis etc Ar Pura ate ea RS A There are also toolbars available on the individual tab groups specific to the actions you may wish to perform on the data contain within the tab group 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Below is the general tool bar found on most tab groups ld 4 16 ofi51 d RET Bs lt provides options to scroll through the list of records forward backwards first and last an option to add a record and delete a record as well as save any edits made There is also an option to print an option to show hide columns and a refresh option By placing your cursor over any of the icons in the tool bars you will find a tooltip indicating what t
391. ows clipboard Show Single Page Displays report one page at a time Show Multiple Pages Displays multiple pages of the report at once y Zoom in Zooms in to a selected area of the report and El Zoom in percent Sets the zoom level to that selected in here 2 Zoom out Zooms out the report EJ First Page Moves to the first page of the report EN Previous Page Moves to the previous page in the report Page Moves to the page specified in this text box P Next Page Moves to the next page in the report bi Last Page Moves to the last page in the document EJ Back Moves back to the previous page in a list of recently accessed pages ll Forward Moves forward to the next page in a list of recently accessed pages 14 3 2 Using the Report Viewer Once a report is generated and displayed on the Viewer it can either be saved in the Report Editor s native binary format printed or exported to various formats that are supported by the Report Editor Using the S button on the toolbar reports can be exported to e Portable Document Format PDF e Microsoft Excel e TIFF e Hyper Text Markup Language HTML e Rich Text Format RTF 2012 Schlumberger Water Services ate Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Saving Reports Saving the report design as opposed to the final report is preferable as the design requires a smaller storage space for most reports and the reports that are generated from a saved report design are dynamic they are up to
392. ox next to this property as indicated in the following screenshot All fields from the selected table or query will be available for mapping to the required data fields in the column Update each Data Field as necessary The Data Fields required for a Lithology column are circled in the following figure 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 250 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Borehole Log Designer Sample y a ES aa Cora daraw Medina ara AA Fx APF tarawi Vir Seared Note The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths not elevations Therefore the BHLP requires that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark Note When Queries are selected for the data source all Queries in your HGA project will be listed in the corresponding pull down menu Duenez toe exceeds 10 mg per kg Datal able LJ erez Using a Query instead of a Data Table provides more flexibility in the type of information that can be added to a BHLP For more information on developing a Query to use in a BHLP please see Chapter 6 Queries Please be aware that not all queries will be appropriate for use in a BHLP and that in some cases e g Lithology a query cannot replace a data table As well queries cannot be used if images are to be added O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 251 NOTE When a Query returns more than 1 record for a sel
393. p up menu z Alternately color maps may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create color map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window shown below with a list of the available surfaces slices The color map can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section lines If there are no slices in the list then this window can be used to create the desired vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps For more details see Creating Slices and Cross Sections 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 386 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help ras Select create slices Ioj x Slices CroseSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal lice no 1 Select Cancel To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A color map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Color map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Color Map Display Settings Once the Color map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below IE O ENS Name Colormap_2 Visible 3 33 lv Max value 39399399 Min value 0 Upperlimit A000 Lowerlimit OO Clip atlimits OO lv b Semitransparent M Slice Slice Name is the name for the color map Visible shows or
394. pace and time The two field duplicate samples are collected from the same source using the same type of sampling equipment Ideally analyte concentrations in the duplicate sample should be identical or very close to the original sample to which it is being compared The following settings are available 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NT Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than 20 Coetticient of variation less thar 10 Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color Relative percent difference less than This criteria is used to compare how close the result from a duplicate sample D is to the true original field sample O It is expressed as either a positive difference the sample result is higher than the true value or negative difference the sample result is lower than the true value When used with duplicate samples the Relative Percent Difference measures precision the lower the value the more precise the results must be to be considered acceptable It can also measure accuracy when one of your results is the true value such as the quality control lab results for a split sample or the actual concentration of a known or unknown sample Coefficient of Variation CV less than The standard deviation as a percentage of the average The CV is a unitless quantity indicating the variability around the mean in relation to the size of the mean When used
395. part of a data collection process duplicate samples blank control samples and spiked samples are added to sample sets these samples are sent to a laboratory along with the original field samples to be analyzed in a controlled environment using constant techniques instruments and personnel The objective is to identify any sources of contamination that may originate from the lab analysis and provide some assurance to the client that the data is valid and representative of your site conditions HGA has integrated a Lab Quality Analysis component that allows users to e Define one or more lab quality assessment templates e Analyze Duplicate Spiked and Blank samples e Compare Relative Percent Difference and Coefficient of Variation for Duplicate samples for more details see Check Duplicates Settings e Analyze Percent Recovery for Spiked samples for more details see Check Spiked Settings e Compare Blank samples to method detection limits for more details see see Check Blanks Settings e Analyze Dilution Factor Detection Limit and Holding Time e Compare the dilution factor in your results with the maximum allowed dilution factor that you set in your template for more details see Check Dilution Factor Settings e Compare the detection limit in your results with the standard detection limit for more details see Check Detection Limit Settings e Compare the holding time in your results with the standard
396. patial distribution of a selected parameter For groundwater modeling purposes isosurfaces are generally used for 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 383 representing the spatial distribution of concentrations HGA 3D Explorer allows you to create and simultaneously display multiple isosurfaces for the one or more plumes in your project Creating Isosurfaces To create an isosurface click on the desired plume data set in the Model tree to highlight it then right click on the element and select Add Isosurface from the pop up menu h ct Alternately isosurfaces may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create isosurface icon located above the Model tree This will open the Isosurface properties window as shown in the following figure pas Isosurface properties lsosurface name Plume_4 Minimum value O Masimum value 32721 lzosurface value fi FOS lsosurface color Show borders Color from palette This window is used to set the display settings of the isosurface as described below Isosurface name defines the name of the isosurface as it will appear in the Model Tree under the selected element Minimum value is the calculated minimum value from the interpolated data set Maximum value is the calculated maximum value from the interpolated data set Isosurface value is the element value for which the isosurface will be created Isosurface color is the user specified color of the isosurfa
397. pecific data transfer operation will be saved to the package once the transfer operation is completed successfully Select the Data Source Once a data package is selected or created the data source can be defined The format of the source file must be Records as Rows which means each new record must be in a new row in addition if the file contains Header information the Header must be in the first row If the source format is a database then in most cases these requirements will be satisfied However if Excel or Text formats are used ensure that the necessary formatting is completed before using the DTS A few examples are shown below The following example demonstrates an Excel file containing station location data note the format records as rows and the header information in the first row 2 1 B01 536012 7 4613630 333 5 334 5 3 2 GB02 535956 7 4613650 336 33r 4 3 GB03 535079 7 4613670 336 33r 5 4 604 535753 7 4613620 J32 J33 z 5 605 535646 7 4613660 35d 335 f b amp BUb 535543 7 4613670 340 5 341 5 D GB07 535454 7 4613630 145 344 4 o 605 535290 7 4613640 359 5 340 5 10 4 B09 535106 7 4613660 359 5 340 5 11 10 GB10 535095 7 4613630 346 349 The following example demonstrates a CSV file containing lithology information for a few stations note the format and the header information in the first row 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 130 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help File Edt Search Help ID Name from to form
398. perties could be altered by activating the Properties Explorer window and modifying the desired property The position of the controls can be changed by selecting and moving the selection to the desired location Controls can be moved this way only within a given section Cut and paste can be used to move controls to another section Some controls have special properties that require the user s attention these controls are described below Altering Borders of Controls Border properties of one or more controls can be modified by selecting the controls first and either clicking on the EE Borders button on the toolbar or selecting the option from the pop up menu Modifying Data Source information of the ADO data control The ADO data control mainly uses the connection string and SQL statement as its input to provide access to the data stored in your project s database Currently HGA provides basic inputs for this control However advanced users may want to modify these inputs in order to produce advanced reports that are supported by the Report Editor One interesting feature provided by the Report Editor is that of generating a report based on specific values For example a report that displays chemical data for all stations can be modified to only generate reports for a given station and or chemical The SQL statement is usually composed of the following four parts SELECT Field1 Field2 Field3 FROM Table Name WHERE Conditi
399. pping window are explained below Unit Conversion The DTS allows conversion of data from source units to the unit specified for each corresponding destination field If a destination field with a matching source field has a unit the DTS requires that a unit be selected for the source field before proceeding with the data import operation A unit can be selected from the list of units available for the specific unit category Importing Criteria The DTS allows specifying a simple criteria condition for each field that is selected to be imported The criteria will be used to filter the source data For example you can import data only for a specified station i e Elevation gt 300 or Name OW 1 and so forth If a criterion is specified based on a field with numeric data types it should be compared against values that have been converted to the destination field s unit This version of the DTS supports only one condition per field The condition should be provided through an operator lt gt or lt gt followed by the value for the condition For instance in the above example if importing data only for the station OW 1 is desired the condition should simply be stated as OW 1 Similarly if data for all stations except OW 1 are to be imported the criteria should be provided as lt gt OW 1 or OW 1 NOTE For the equals operator you must enter a double equal sign with no spaces i e 2012 Schlumberger
400. ps of toolbar items The Template Toolbar Upper Toolbar consists of buttons that affect database templates as a whole The Tables Fields Toolbar Lower Toolbar consists of buttons that affect the selected field table in the selected template Template Toolbar Global Template Options The buttons on the upper toolbar located at the top of the window immediately beside the list of Database templates contains buttons that allow copying an existing template saving changes made to the current template and exporting the current template as a database structure template The functions of the buttons are described below E The Copy Template As button allows you to make a copy of the selected template Clicking on this button displays a dialog where a name for the new user template can be entered Profile Settings 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 112 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help The Set Profile Settings button allows you to provide information that will be used for displaying well profiles BHLP in Hydro GeoAnalyst as well as the Map Manager and the Cross Section Editor Clicking on this button launches the window shown below that can be used to specify which tables and fields are to be used to obtain information related to geology and well construction details RN Define Well Profile Parameters Beene x AN Litholagy Drilling Casing Screen Filling Hydrogeology Wi ater Level Pump Select tabl
401. ption to create a backup copy of the SQL Server database used by the current project A backup of the database is helpful in order to preserve data or to detach and send the database to colleagues or SWS Technical support Select this menu item and provide a name and directory path for the file It will be saved with the BAK extension If the entire project is to be backed up simply make a copy of the project folder however if you have map projects in another directory then copy these additional folders as well 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 2 4 4 2 3 NOTE Backup Database works only if you are running HGA on the system that also hosts the server NOTE SQL Server does not permit saving the back up copy of the database to a mapped network drive it can be saved only to a local drive Help Displays the HGA In Program Help Check for Updates This option checks to see if there are any updates for the version of HGA you currently have installed About Displays the HGA Info dialog This contains the HGA version number serial number and information on how to contact Schlumberger Water Services License This menu option provides the ability to request a license as well as install a license If you are working with a Team License you will also find the option to check out and check in a license About the Interface When HGA is first loaded a blank window wi
402. ptions as shown in the following screenshot Print current borehole Print all boreholes NOTE If you select Print all boreholes a report will be generated for each station in the current selection please be aware that this may take some time lf you want to print a BHLP for just the selected station use the Print current borehole option You will be prompted to Select a Template for generating your report as shown in the following screenshot You can either select from the existing templates or leave the selection blank and create a new report template yourself Select Template x Mame bhlp_ landscape bhlp portrait Ok Lancel FJ Help O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 257 An example report loaded with the bhip portrait template is shown in the following figure x ER REN Sea rare cece ec ce A E Company Name Borehole Log Report Address Project Waterloo Investigation Contact Info Location Waterloo ON Borehole Date May 6 2009 Description Coarse Gravel Gravel Fine Sand If you have set a Print Scale factor please see BHLP Default Settings for more information by default the scale will appear in the lower left corner of the BHLP report Alternately you can use the Report Designer please see Chapter 14 The Report Editor to add a label named Scale in your header footer information The default label will automatically be removed if a label named Sca
403. r Next add the analyzed spiked sample as a new sample Create a new sample ID and assign the appropriate Quality Code SM for Measured Spiked concentration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the measure amount of constituent that was recovered for every spiked parameter Both the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch Batch ID which relates the samples to each other Defining Quality Codes for Data When importing adding sample data quality codes need to be added to indicate the type of sample in order to be used in a Lab Quality Analysis The following are the codes required by HGA Sample Type Quality Code Duplicate Original O Duplicate Measured D Spiked Theoretical ST Spiked Measured SM Blank measured B Using the Template Manager you can create a field that will store the quality codes This field may be added to any table but typically it is found in the Parameter Sample table with the Sample ID These quality codes are saved in the file Program Files HGAnalyst Whi QualityAC dll config If necessary the codes may be changed to reflect the codes used in your data Simply use a text editor to open the config file and modify the quality codes under the section lt QualityCodes gt Data Requirements Quality Control starts with a data set before you can apply a quality control template you must generate a data set by building
404. r The Template Manager allows you to link a selected field to a list of distinct values that may be used as values for the field To link a list to a selected field Select Settings Template Manager or click the ES button from the toolbar The Template Manager window will load From the tree view on the left side select the appropriate Data Category and select the appropriate table and the desired field Locate the View Settings options in the lower half of the window as indicated in the figure below Template Manager Demo Project P loj x 2 Enyvironmental metric Database structure Database Setting W Description Field name M Geologic Description driling_method E e Well Construction AE El Drilling Protocol a i Fin STRING F To Unit category 4 Diameter E TA Drilling Method Description M Inclination M Azmuth W Casing W Screen W Annular Fill W Monitoring Points 4 Abandonment x A A A A A A E Sail Testing View Settings Sail Sampling Field mame Monitoring Evert MiningExploration Drilina Method Read only Geophysics Default value Unit well History IE CF User Category Format Get values fram list General List El Allow values only fram list taxAaQe st Last Changed on 7 15 2010 11 25 32 Afl Close Help Select a General List from the Get Values from List combo box If the field should be fixed to contain only values from the list enable the option Allow Valu
405. r Water Services ne Hydro GeoAnalyst Help data resulting from monitoring events Geophysics resistivity and gamma readings Well History historical information on wells Mining Exploration results from any mining and exploration activities User Category Any of these categories can be renamed as desired and used to store any information Selecting a category in the Template Manager displays an interface where the name of the category can be renamed in the view settings field this allows the user to customize the look in the main interface of HGA Table Property Settings Information related to all user tables can be edited through the Template Manager The Template Manager allows all users to set the visibility status of any selected table To make a table visible or hidden check or un check the tick boxes that are provided in front of the table name in the Project Browser Adding Tables A table can be added by selecting a data category in which the table is to be created and then either by clicking on the El Add button at the bottom of the window or by right mouse clicking and selecting the Add table pop up menu item Template Manager Demo_ Project E 0 x Environmental metric gy FS Database structure Database Settings Category name Geologie V Llescription m Geologic Description tholog J From W To Iv soil_type W Description A Consistency M Structure W ASTM Des
406. r additional grouping options For example if the Query Results are to be grouped by County or City simply select this field and drag and drop the field into the Group By List Additional rows may be added to the Group options by right clicking and selecting Add Row Function Field Operator Walue Operator Add Row Delete Row Add Station ID field Once the Group By conditional options have been specified an aggregate function must be defined for the Display Fields a common aggregate option must be selected for each Display Field as shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Queries 155 Query Builder El 0 x Station Group Quey Data Query eign SOL Wiew Preview Select a Query Display Fields VCExceeds20 Function Espessor ___ gg ____ Order by ain id El Description station x F o E Location I station y oki m station name Al name E description_addins Ft MAX E BHA leva H station guide pda_ guide ap and BHLP Ready w Use current projection system H purpose H location_name Po Operator Expression Operator E e hemical_hame Trichloroethane AND mM ES esult_ value gt 10 AND F sample_date 2003 11 28 ve Bees address city or town ba county pu state province a Zip Postal Code Installation_Date IS status G Geologic Description El Having E k Y A Sa description_add
407. r area for your cross sections Each method is described below Digitizing a Cross Section Line In the Map Manager open an existing map project or create a new map project Select a Hydro GeoAnalyst data layer i e station data and ensure this is visible and active selected If you do not have such a layer you may create one based on station groups that are available in your Hydro GeoAnalyst project To do this use the Layer gt Load HGA Data option to select a station group The Map Manager creates a layer with stations that are available in the group O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 321 Zoom in to the area of interest optional Click the ad Cross Section Line button at the right end of the toolbar or select Tools Define Cross Section Line from the Main Menu Place the mouse cursor at the starting point of the line and click once with the left mouse button Click again at another location to add a vertex to the line You may add one or more vertices that define the cross section line Note If you wish to place a vertex beyond the extent of the current map view click and hold the right mouse button to pan across the map Also you can use the mouse wheel to zoom in and zoom out while defining the cross section line At the end point of the line double click the left mouse button to finish This will launch the dialog shown below CrossSection Line Fa Mame ab Butter 200 meters Description
408. r common example within the environmental industry is to show analyte names reporting units and regulatory limits along the left column while sample names date and or depth ranges are shown along the top row and result values and qualifiers shown in the intersecting cells Storing your data in such a way in a table would break the first normal form which disallows repeating groups Crosstab queries provide a solution to this problem HGA uses a state of the art crosstab component that is easy to use to produce dynamic crosstab queries and reports The data in your crosstab reports can be highlighted with the format you specify allowing you to flag values that are outside user defined range values for example above guideline levels Once you are satisfied with the crosstab query you created you may save the query for later use send it to a printer or export it to either an Excel spreadsheet PDF or an HTML format All formatting details will also be printed and or exported 7 1 Creating a Crosstab Query The crosstab query starts with a data query which can be designed using the Query Builder The data query should contain the desired data set along with the desired fields you want to display in crosstab format For example if you want to generate a crosstab report of groundwater chemistry results over time at several stations you may want to include the following fields e station name sample name or code screen location sample d
409. r each of the interpretation types e Model e Geology e Hydrogeology Under each individual Interpretation Layer there is a list of the soil types belonging to 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 304 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Stay on top W E Cross Sections Data ra Ff AA HE Stations Interpretations ff Model Layers Ff Geology Layers o ES E Medium Sand fy Gravel ff Fine Sand Setting b Name Coarse Grav A S M LayerName Coarse Grav this layer Each soil type has its own settings as shown here The soil Name may not be modified this name will appear in the Legend contents Each individual soil type may be set to Visible or hidden from view 13 7 Creating Slices and Cross Sections A slice is defined as a 3D planar surface extending horizontally or vertically through the project There are three types of slice objects available e Vertical slices along the XZ or YZ plane extending through the entire depth of the domain e Horizontal slices along the XY plane of the project domain e Cross section slices along a straight line or an irregular polyline through the entire depth of the domain these are based on cross sections available in the 3D project These slice objects define the locations where color maps and contour maps can be plotted for concentration visualization To define the slice locations select Objects Surfaces from the top menu bar A Select create slices window will appear
410. r relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for vewing geology and hydrogeology data The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results using a complete selection of graphical formats and features These include e 2D and 3D views of the grid Station representation showing lithology Imported Surfer Grid surfaces Display contaminant plumes in the form of isosurfaces or color maps DXF and Bitmap overlays on surfaces Light source position control Semi transparent objects Auto rotate tools continuously rotate the image around the X Y Z axis Record grid rotation to an AVI file This chapter provides a detailed description of the features and functionality of the various options for preparing and customizing a three dimensional presentation of your HG Analyst data 13 1 About the Interface 3D Explorer may be loaded from Hydro GeoAnalyst in several ways In the Project Tree select a project from the 3D View node Through the Cross Section Editor select a cross section and choose the View 3D option from the View menu When the 3D Explorer window is loaded it should appear similar to the figure shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 365 Display Window Menu Bar y HydroGeo Analyst ID Explorer F Prograen Files HGAnalyst Projecto Dens
411. r tabs Provider Connection Advanced and All The settings available on the latter three tabs depend upon the Provider selected The Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is used to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access Use the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box to specify where your data is located and how to connect to it using an OLE DB provider The connection information can be represented using a common string format This tab opens by default when you double click a data connection in Server Explorer Note that the fields displayed on this tab depend upon the OLE DB Provider selected For example if you select the OLE DB Provider for Oracle the Connection tab displays fields for the server name and login If you select the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server then the server name type of authentication and database must be furnished For more information about the Data Link API visit msdn microsoft com open the MSDN Library Online and then the Platform SDK to find the MDAC SDK which contains the Data Link API Reference or see Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 132 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 9 1 2 Once the connection string has been defined click OK to accept it Click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step The next step is Data Mapping Step 2 Data Mapp
412. r the image file as shown in the following figure x Scale Factor Guality h I I I L I I go 0 100 Falette i Default Half Tone Export Depth e 256 Colors Scale Symbolo f No Symbology Scaled C Line Symbology Not Scaled Source Depth Web Safe Grays With System Colors All Symbology Scaled C 24Bit Color DK Cancel FJ Help There are several options for modifying the image Scale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option is available only if the JPEG export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size is also directly proportional to this value Scale Symbology Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Color Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Meta File EMP Properties The Map Project Properties dialog contains general settings for the map project This dialog is shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 268 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 11 2 2 Layer Map Project 0 E x Description C Geographic tf UTM
413. r will be added to your map eee der ia la me dl A AA Apo a dems imm TE A om HO yi ious E a mi m x C i A E i A Ta a ates O Lewes E T Fia T r i es a ai If ET 1 ca T If any changes are made to the database stations within HGA you delete stations or add new stations or even edit the stations coordinates all you need to do is hit the refresh button in ArcGIS F5 or View Refresh and the points will be automatically updated O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services o Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 4 Template Manager The Template Manager is one of the most powerful tools provided with Hydro GeoAnalyst lt allows you to edit the structure of your database as well as set an unlimited number of user level views of the database The Template Manager provides the tools to Add delete tables Add delete fields Alter the properties of each table field Group tables under logical data categories Edit table designs define primary keys relationships between tables etc Save user templates Export user templates to a stand alone XML file Create and edit linked fields Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users Set visibility of tables and or fields Setting user level table and or field names display units where applicable and data formats where applicable Understanding the Template Manager Hydro GeoAnalyst comes with a number of standard environmental database st
414. ragged and dropped into the desired section of the report if displaying data from these fields is desired Report Properties Toolbox The Report Properties toolbox as shown in the figure below provides the tools that can be used to edit properties of the report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain This window can be accessed by clicking on the Properties icon EN on the toolbar 2012 Schlumberger Water Services az Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Property ToolBox EXESTR MUNICIPIO fle A Ee a Mamet EXESTR_ MUNICIPIO Alignment 0 ddT LeFt BackColor BackStywle O ddBETranspare Canara True CanShrink False ClassName Mormal DataField STR MUNICIPIO Font Arial ForeColor B height 205 hyperlink left TO MultiLine True Qutputrormal Style summaryDistir summaryFunc O ddSFSum Summar yaro SummaryRunr O ddSRMone SummaryType O ddsMblone Tag text STR_MUNICIPIO top fo Seabee carer _ Custom This window serves to access the properties of the controls that are present on the report and it contains an orderly list with the names and values of the properties of the objects in the report presented in the first and second column respectively A combo box with the list of objects whose properties can be edited is provided in the upper part of the window Additional information for the selected property is provided at the bottom of this window D
415. rame allows you to select which water level s to represent on the BHLP Choose from the following options e All e First e Last e Min e Max e Average The color of each option can be changed by clicking on the corresponding color box Finally the Labels frame allows you to specify the Visibility Font and Alignment settings for the data labels NOTE In order to see the water level dates displayed beside the symbol you must map the appropriate Well Construction 1 Drilling Water Level Entity fields as shown below the data source may be a table or query 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 236 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help H E Scale E ES Well Construction FES Scale A E Drilling H E Lithology EE Wy aterLevel ES WaterLevelEntities H E Pump Fl Plug mE Filing H E Casing ES DrillingEntities H E Lithology DataTable Water Level hi E DepthE ntity Caption Depth Description Depth D ataField E TextEnitity Caption Tent Sgn DataField Reducer BHLP Settings d x E Es BHLP Well Constructia aa M Wisible Column Options Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reducer Scale 4 Appearano f Use Casings Color Angle 45 E 5 89 Use Default Color E Help Apply OF Cancel Under the Reducer tab the appearance frame allows you to modify the display settings for pipe fittings that connect casings of different diameters shown below Select Use Casi
416. re you wish to import the data A list of available fields will appear as seen in the example below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 134 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Data Tranter tysten Import a alli ELE ET ou i Seat reve repent _ ho DOUBLE mi DOBLA m be hE ST HG To Pesas pir ey ba asen O Spss O Peep TO Linked Fk lala Ml e 15 LI Gar Fiii bel Fi eel es e ad ya rel a e a e pp a e ee Bt bae jah it a sih io CARR M mL de a A y A L Burke Hai gt Lanna hat Select the appropriate source field from the list In the example shown above the appropriate field is Elev since it should be mapped to the field Elevation in the Station destination table Select the appropriate Unit for the field if applicable Fields that are shaded orange require a unit selection NOTE The units for station X Y co ordinates will be defined in Step 3 of the import routine Check the Use box beside the appropriate field to include this field for importing Repeat this for other fields until all necessary fields have been mapped to fields in the Destination table NOTE As a minimum one field in the source table must be mapped to the primary key field in the destination table The primary key field is shaded in green and is typically the first field in the destination table The primary key is the Station ID ID Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS Some of the additional features and options available in the Data Ma
417. rers provided by MapObjects and include label value and graduated renderering Custom Renderers are renderers developed by SWS These renderers may provide the same 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 284 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help functionality as the MapObjects renderer i e label renderer but with additional options System Renderers A new System Renderer may be added by clicking on the Add button The following dialog will appear with the available Renderers from which you can select Renderer Type Typ C Value Renderer Label Renderer OF Cancel The Graduated Renderer provides a way of classifying features into categories or classes by drawing different symbols for features based on numeric attribute values and their ranges The Value Renderer provides a means of representing features of a map layer by drawing a symbol for each unique data value The Label Renderer can be used to display labels on contour maps or to place labels on stations or any other object Select the desired type and click OK For each Renderer type there is a corresponding settings dialog which is launched automatically when you create a new renderer this can also be loaded by selecting the Ed Edit button after selecting the renderer you wish to change Graduated Renderer Graduated Renderer allows you to graphically display station data according to their specific interval of values You have the option of specify
418. ress the ES Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string Press the ley Save button to save the query Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the figure below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 152 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Query Builder XAH amp Station Group Query f Data Query Select a Query bedrock 30 Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soll Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploratian Geophysics Well History User Category Design SOL View Preview SELECT td 5 id ts as x 10 as y name as name FROM Station as t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON 0 10 P Station SID LEFT JOIN lithology 45 4 ON tid 1 Station WHERE t FROM_ gt 30 AND 0 zo1l Limeztone SND PStation ID 5 100070 20 5575320604263 43402114232673 BH 010 100011 20 5616076993998 43 4751191676727 BH 011 10007 3 20 561 3306964769 434812779610142 BH 013 100019 00 5459026665231 434 07262301272 BH 019 Advanced Cloze EJ Help Category User Rows 4 Time 0 00 80 You will see that the display fields show only the ID Name X and Y If desired additional fields may be added to the display fields using the steps listed above The query may now be accessed from the project tree under the Queries node If the user is familiar with SQL string structure the query string may be
419. results so on an 8 1 2 by 11 page 100 feet measured on the BHLP would take up just over 1 page when printed in portrait mode The scale factors must use the same units Column Options Column Options E i x Bod Color E width 75 ml T Header text Font Angle U El Scale rm Align Center la e wod wrap The Column Options dialog allows you to specify unique display settings for each column in your BHLP In this dialog you can modify the Header Color and Body Color by clicking on the appropriate color box Use the Width vertical scroll bars to change the width of the column Under the Header Text frame specify the Font Angle and Alignment of the column header text Select the Word Wrap check box to ensure that the header text remains visible within the defined column width In the Header Text text box specify a header name for the BHLP column The Column Options dialog is available in the settings for each BHLP column and can be accessed by clicking the Options button shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services zis Hydro GeoAnalyst Help BHLP Settings Scale e Visible Column Options visibili Tetak e Visible Major Tic Mark Interval fi O ml Display Unit mi mi Color Label Position Left E L Minor Tic Mark Font Interval E Background El Color J Help Apply UE Cancel Individual column settings are described in the follow
420. ription of each display property is available by clicking the mouse pointer on the display property This 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 374 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help produces a tool tip Description of the Property in the bottom of the Display Tree Panel below the Setting table Although each display element has a different set of display settings there are several display settings which are common to most display elements Name Sets the name of the display element as it appears in the Model tree Visible Shows hides the selected display element On Off 13 4 1 Default Settings The Default Settings are used to define how selected objects are initially displayed when a project is first opened If Default Settings of the selected objects are modified the new settings may be saved and applied to all HG Analyst 3D Explorer projects The Default Settings include e Background Color e Title Color and Size e Axis Text Color and Size and Line Color e Legends Text Color The modified Default Settings can be saved by selecting either File Save scene configuration from the main menu bar or clicking the a Save Scene Configuration button in the toolbar The following Save scene configuration dialog will appear e Save scene configuration for HGA3D aj x Configuration Name Delete Cancel Using this window the most recently viewed scene configuration can be saved by entering a name for it When you clos
421. rmalized outputs from that data In other words crosstab queries let you format existing data queries by rotating rows to columns to see different summaries of the source data for easier analysis and reporting HGA uses a state of the art crosstab component that is easy to use to produce dynamic crosstab queries and reports The data in your crosstab reports can be highlighted with the format you specify allowing you to flag values that are outside user defined range values for example above guideline levels Once you are satisfied with the crosstab query you created you may save the query for later use send itto a printer or export it to either an Excel spreadsheet PDF or an HTML format All formatting details will also be printed and or exported 1 2 8 Time Series Plots The plotting component in Hydro GeoAnalyst allows users to create time series plots of data stored in the HGA database The plotting provides the following features Create Time Series plots using data from data queries Display plots as a line or bar chart Add legends and data marker labels to plots Add best fit trend formula or statistical lines to the plot Interact with plots and display multiple plot windows in the viewer window simultaneously Display non detect uncertainty or detection limits on the plot as lines or symbols Display one or more water quality standard values as a line or symbol for quick detection of samples that exceed the standards Def
422. roject can be made by simply copying the project folder and its contents using Windows explorer Restore Database As aa l ie x Server JWAYNENWHE O WAYNE SH This dialog allows opening a project and restoring related database to the selected local server Project E Program FilessHaAnalyst Projects Demoa_Project pr Ey Please select the desired server provide the project tile and the Backup File pst estBackuptBackupD atabase bak Ey o H A ES to the server DE Cancel FJ Help In the Backup database dialog specify the Server The Server can be the WHI or SWS instance or any SQL Server instance provided it is on the local machine Specify the Project to open VBH file and specify the Database BackUp File BAK file NOTE On Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating systems User Account Control UAC must be disabled before you can successfully open a project from backup 2 2 1 4 Close Close the project which is currently open 2 2 1 5 Re Open This menu item provides a list of projects that have been recently opened The most recent project will appear at the top Simply select the desired project and it will be loaded into HGA 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 2 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 2 2 1 6 Online Sharing This new option allows you to share your HGA project with others who do not have the program You can find this option by selecting Project Online Sharing On the first tab you can provide
423. ross Section Editor and then select the cross section you wish to launch from the drop down list The Cross Section Editor may also be launched from the Map Manager in one of the following ways Activate the cross section lines layer from the layer manager and select a Cross section line by clicking on the desired cross section O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 327 To create a new cross section select the Create Cross Section menu option from the Tools menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button aL on the toolbar This option will create a new cross section based on the selected cross section line TO open an existing cross section based on an existing cross section line click on the Show Create Cross Section button ll on the toolbar This opens the cross section editor with the corresponding cross section Click on the Cross Section tab in the upper right corner of the window see figure below to activate an existing cross section from a list of cross sections that are available for your project The Cross Section Editor window is shown in the figure below with a cross section loaded for demonstration purposes Active Menu Windo Bar A Map Project firstmap ONS Eie x ile Edit View Tools Help Toolbar ns RAMA xiko lr BRS S ORE SF a S a al SecondLine Y C Model 360 LOIpD3S S801 Topography M 4 Geology
424. rpretation Tab Define the data storage options for cross section interpretations Options e xl Editor Labels Fiulers Vertical Exag Screen wLevel Intersecting Grid Interpretation e Store Soft Data Points e Save All Contacts The cross section editor now saves the cross section interpretations to the project database The interpretations are also linked to the stations that were selected for the cross section and these stations along with their interval data are also saved to the database The interpretations and the wells and corresponding interval data can be retrieved later using the Query Builder For more details please see Querying Cross Section Interpretations Store Soft Data Points Whenever a layer intersects with a station at only one point it could be because of one of the following reasons The layer truly touches the well at only one location e g pinch out or There is no contact with the well In either case the following options are available Consider the actually intersecting point as the top elevation and insert NULL for both the thickness and bottom elevation Extend the depth of the station fictitiously within the bounds of the cross section to determine the location of the other point These extensions are known as Soft Data Points If this point can not be found within the bound the layer will be considered to be a zero thickness layer with thickness of NULL Save All Contacts
425. rpretation_Results thickness Thickness Station ID interpretation Results interpretatior Interpretation Station Name A Y Layer Description dh a Y Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Slice Name Top Elevation Conditions Thickness Below Slice Mm i338 4 4 4 4 Bottom Elevation Expression Operator Expression Operator Interpretation ID Xsection x Name Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration 4 4 Mm Reaarnhuaia Source Condition Station_Groups z Boreholes v Advanced Close Help Field Name Interpretation_Results thickness Type Unit meters Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 The Interpretation Results table is read only also known as a View and stores data from the cross section interpretations By default the following fields are included e Station ID Station Name X using project coordinates Y using project coordinates Slice Name 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Layer Description Top Elevation Thickness Below Slice Interpretation type Simply select the desired fields from the tree view and move these into the Display Fields or Conditions as required When you are finished Generate and Execute the query An example of the results is shown in the screenshot below Query Builder PISE
426. rt Settings xj a Normal Headingl Heading Headings Heading Horizontal Alignment Lett Vertical Alignment Top Cancel O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor ata The Styles section allows you to create remove and modify text styles which can then be selected from the Text Style dropdown box and applied to your text controls Text styles are useful for applying many text characteristics font size bold italic underline etc to your text in just one simple task Click the New and Delete button to create a new style and delete a current style respectively The Font Color and Misc settings in the right frame allow you to set and modify the text characteristics of the selected style Using non default page dimensions If you wish to print to any non default paper size e g plotter paper you must first specify the page dimensions in three different areas within the Report Designer To do so follow the steps below 1 In the Report Designer select the Page Setup button from the main toolbar Select the Printer Settings button Specify the page size from the PaperSize dropdown box Alternatively define the page dimensions by selecting Custom Paper Size from the PaperSize dropdown box and then entering the Width and Length values below Click Ok 2 Select the Printer Settings button from the main toolbar Select the desired plotter from the Name dropdown box Again specif
427. rt export data using the DTS please refer to Chapter 5 The Data Transfer System 2 1 13 HGA Quick Checker The HGA Quick Checker is an Excel Plug in You can find the installation here http www swstechnology com hydro geoanlayst quick checker download setup exe Once you install the plug in you will find a new ribbon in Excel this plug in is only supported in Excel 2007 or 2010 Bookl MicrozoHt Excel hier Page Layout Formula Dais enpre Whey Citcikthecker acrobat Team Mo eman Q Open Template a A f E Data has ngi pel been validated hs RRE Chear Waiedate Formatting snd Submit l imp AEAEE EES uber tion Here you can open the EDD template that was created in HGA see Export section of the Modules described in the next section for details on the EDD Template Designer Then the Generate Headers open will become available this will load all the information from the EDD template into the Excel workbook In the example from above it created a worksheet for the 2012 Schlumberger Water Services as Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Parameter Sample table and populated it with the fields chosen from that table As well as a Parameter Result worksheet with the fields associated with that table Two additional worksheets are also always generated The List Data worksheet will contain the contents of the list editor from any field that was set to Use List in the T
428. ructure templates that are currently in use around the world When creating a new database for your project you have the option of either using one of these database templates or creating your own If the latter is selected the template manager can be used to create the new database structure from scratch All database structure templates that come with HG Analyst also come with their respective report and borehole log plot BHLP templates As such if one of the existing database templates is selected during the project creation these templates will be copied to your project by default You can later edit them or even remove them from your project if desired The Template Manager allows you to modify the current user view as well as create an unlimited number of additional user views For example a geologist working on the project may only need to view tables that are related to geological investigation data The Template Manager allows you to hide all unwanted tables and or fields from such users and display only a smaller set of relevant tables and or fields All user modifications to the database views can be saved either in the currently active template or as a new name All such modifications to the project s database are automatically reflected in all copies of user settings The Template Manager allows you to export the currently active database structure as a new database structure for use in creating similar projects More informa
429. ry define a Picture for the list item Click in the Picture column and a dialog will appear with options to load the desired graphics for the list item Click in the Check box under the Include column in order to make this list item available to HGA List items can be turned on off as desired in order to limit the amount of items displayed in HGA For example a list of chemical names only certain groups of chemicals may be needed at times In those circumstances the list can be shortened by turning off all unnecessary groups of chemicals Enter a Description for the list item if necessary Repeat these steps to add additional list items until the desired list is created Click the lr button to save the list Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager in Chapter 13 O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst for more details Generating Lists List items may also be generated using existing data The data could be an existing value in the current database for the selected field or could be a list from an external source To extract all existing unique entries from the current database for the selected field Using the procedure described above load the List Editor and select the appropriate table and field for the list Click on the n Import from current database button at the bottom of th
430. s Clicking on a Color box opens a palette to select from 10 3 2 Lithology Column The Lithology column is specifically designed to display geologic formation details It allows the use of soil lithologic patterns together with an optional description for each formation To add a Lithology column click the Add button and select Lithology from the combo box provided A new Lithology column will be added In the Designer tree expand the Lithology node and select Lithology Entities Using the combo boxes provided select the data table top bottom image and text entities Lithology column is a specialized version of the Interval column 10 3 2 1 Settings The Lithology column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Lithology node from the BHLP Settings window 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 222 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help BHLP Settings E x Column Options Pattern Symbol Description 7 Visible 7 Visible Font Width 51 40 Help Apply DOF Cancel The Lithology frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button The Border Line Visibility frame allows you to show hide the column O
431. s Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal alice no 1 If there are no slices in the list then this wndow can be used to create the desired vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A contour map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Contour map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Isoline Map Display Settings Once the Isoline map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below Color fill will fill the space between contour lines with a solid color where the color between lines is scaled according to the lower contour line value Line properties 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 388 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help o Seting al Contour map 3 Visible 53535353 Iv Color E Semitransparent m Max walue 393397952 Min value OOD CEA Color from palette E o Coo L Width Sbe Solid El uto intervals Custom values Color from palette indicates each contour line will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type Color indicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected The browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB
432. s 309 WNW E a 313 o sakie a a N A A SEa aE R R a 315 SENINGS a a OT 316 PED a E a A E ance awed unsutec caveceeteu as 320 Defining a Cross SeCUON LING issc ae ai a T 320 Cross Section Editor 326 AbDouUtthe Interfaces a a a a aa a a 326 Description OF Men Mems rinia a de E a a eaaa 329 A RA 329 ETE A as 332 VIC oa 336 TOOS TR E EA oO netuseeetceenecesnaseane 339 o E vaneucencecconuecestestsulvuer satatectuhvumecseauaneesesaenes 348 Gross Section interpreta tons isos 348 L ding SUrTACE Layers enei N a r A at 349 Geology Layer Interpretations ni a 350 Hydrogeologic Layer Interpretations cccocccccccccccncnnccncncocnnanononanonnnancnnnnrrnnnnrrnnnnrrrnnnrrnnnnrrrnnnrrnnnnrrnnnrenanarinnns 352 MOGel LAVer Interpretations anta aaa 353 Defining Model Layer usos dica 353 Draw ing Model Interpretation Layers occcccononccccccononcconononoconononcnonononononanonononanononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnanennnnnnss 354 Snapping Vertices to Other Model Layer LinN6S cococonnconocococonocononococonoconononononanonononononannnononononanenannnos 356 ETA Model LIS Is 357 Remove Stations from Cross Sections s ssssssssnnunrnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen nnee 358 Querying Cross Section InterpretatiONS ocoocccccococococococanannncorocanenanarannnrnrarararararananannnes 359 Adding Annotations to the Cross Se Ction ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeaeaeaeeeeseeneneeaeaene
433. s Geology j xI E lt Station Label Properties Visible shows hides station labels Color sets color of station labels Size sets size of the station labels Title Title field allows for entering a project title Visible shows hides the title Text color sets the color of the Project title text The default is white Text size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen size By default this is 0 02 Text Frame Visible shows hides the text frame Line Color sets the color of the text frame 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 377 Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Time Label these settings are applicable when displaying time varying plumes Title field allows for modifying the time label Visible shows hides the time label Text color sets the color of the time label The default is white Text size sets the size of the time label text as a fraction of the total screen size By default this is 0 02 Text Frame Visible shows hides the text frame Line Color sets the color of the text frame Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Legend Visible shows hides the legend Title changes the legend title Text size changes the legend text size Text color changes the legend text color Frame allows to decide whether there is a frame around the legend Frame line color sets the legend frame line color Frame fill color sets the legend frame fill c
434. s belonging to a SCS Use the B button to create a New SCS Use the ln button to save the SCS Use the H button to add a new soil Use the xi button to delete the selected soil Use the tT button to move the selected soil type up Use the button to move the selected soil type down Creating a New Soil Classification System 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help To create a new Soil Classification system SCS follow the steps below Click the o New button Enter a name for the SCS You may now proceed to create or add soil types to this SCS Soil types may be added manually or copied from an existing SCS To add new soil types manually Press the El Add button in the lower right corner Enter a Name for the new soil type and select a Pattern To select from one of the available patterns select the button beside the soil type and choose from one of the pre existing images for the soil pattern To use your own image right mouse click on the picture field select Get Own Picture and locate the image file To copy one or all soil types from an existing SCS into the new SCS use the following buttons Choose the desired SCS from the left side of the window To copy a single soil type use the button To copy all soil types use the O button Use the following buttons to arrange the order of the soil types within the selected SCS To move the selected soil type up use the T button To m
435. s dialog to ensure that a valid connection to this Server exists The additional tabs in the Data Link Properties window include Advanced includes default network settings All vew and edit all OLE DB initialization properties available for the OLE DB provider Properties can vary depending on the selected OLE DB provider For more details press the Help button in the Data Link Properties dialog to vew an on line help for this component Click OK once the Data Link settings have been defined to return to the Project Wizard The Connection String will now appear in the Database Environment window An example is shown below Project Wizard eS l 10 x Set Database Environment f Select Server and Database Server ce OGODON wATSGEO Windows Authentication f SOL Server Suthentication Enter SQL Server Account User Name sa Password Database New Database f Build Connection String Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Secunty 55P1 Persist Secunty Info False mitral Catalog Test Data Source 5 A Next gt Cancel Help N Next to proceed HGA will then test the connection to the server If a database was selected in the Data Link Properties then HGA will scan and validate the database to see if the required tables exist If no database was selected then there will be a prompt to define a name for the new database as shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Creating New Proje
436. s does not have any effect on how the tables are stored in the database 2 1 5 Adjustable Windows When opening HGA the default window displays will appear There are two tab groups one with the Project Tree and one with the other 5 tabs Station List Station Data Data Query Data Filter and Well Profile Hydra Gea nalyst Beta a e Project A Medules E Database a Help Prajert Tree z Station L st Satins Gata Data Query Data Aiter Well Profile Ready You have several options to adjust the view of these tab groups You can add additional tab groups right click on any existing tab either vertical or horizontal You can rearrange the order of the tabs within a tab group by simply dragging and dropping a tab You can even drag a tab from one tab group to another 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Here is an example of another way to organize your windows Hydro Geotnalyst Beta Dema A la Project GP Modules G Database E Help AF TA PANA Project Tree Station List Data query Cara Filter Well Profile A Cops Expand A 44 of 160 gt bl EA Tawon Groups vim Beeson TOCIm Sabon Typelmi Al Stelios Boreholes Eomboles_wllhi_piol_dala Lab OC Sabons Mata _ We OC Mentonna_ Wels BHE i o oad Berra i 55 4163 vinnm RARER ES WU ai Oey Picker han am 10 sal_Eoirmga_ veils TE i Ed Tapon Data GB du
437. s the full extent of the cross section line Leave this dialog blank if you do not wish to use a surface layer 12 3 2 Geology Layer Interpretations This option allows for drawing interpretation layers that assist in defining the geology sand clay till bedrock etc at the site To draw Geologic interpretation layers the polygon draw tool must be used and the polygon must be digitized manually using the mouse Follow the directions below e Activate make it editable the Geology interpretation from the layer manager e Select the ul Polygon button from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location of the first vertex of the intended geology layer e Click once on the left mouse button to add a vertex and start digitizing the polygon in the desired direction e Add more vertices by clicking on the left mouse button at desired locations Move the mouse cursor to an interval on a desired station the mouse cursor will snap the vertex of the polygon to the nearest station interval A vertex can also be added anywhere on the cross section by clicking on the left mouse button e Double click anywhere on the cross section using the left mouse button to close the polygon the following dialog will appear Geology Layer Pattern E x Hame Description fS and Pattern ok Cancel FJ Help e In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the layer a brief Description and select a soil Pattern If the
438. scription of the major components which make up the HGA package is provided These components simplify the task of managing analyzing and visualizing the data stored in the database and include Template Manager List Editor Material Specifications Editor Project Manager Data Transfer System DTS Query Builder Map Manager Cross Section Editor 3D Explorer Report Editor Borehole Log Plotting Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts HGA is designed to manage databases with any structure and any level of referential integrity constraints As such a project database is not limited in the number of tables it may contain nor in the relationship between the tables An HGA database is designed to store any type of environmental data Most environmental data is inherently spatial as samples and observations are taken at specific locations in the map coordinate and elevation In HGA these sampling sites are known as Stations Station Types In HGA all data is saved and referenced to a Station A Station is a unique real world location at which data collection activities are performed Depending on the scope a project 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 25 may contain single or multiple station types each with its own attributes Typical examples of stations are explained below Boreholes A borehole is a hole drilled at a site for exploration of subsurface geologic structure soil and rock param
439. se button and drag the panel by moving the cursor to another location then release the mouse button to drop the panel at the new location Floating Panels Once a panel has been moved from the docked position to a floating position a Title Bar will appear at the top of the panel and it will behave like a separate Window The Display Tree 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 367 Panel has an option Stay on top When this is active the panel window will float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer interface as long as it is the active window When this is active this panel will always float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer window Docking Panels Floating panels can be docked again by clicking the mouse pointer on the panel Title Bar and dragging it to the left or bottom edge of the 3D Explorer window A grey outline will appear when the mouse pointer is in the proper location and the panel is dockable Release the mouse button to dock the panel at the desired docking area Closing Panels The panels may be removed from the 3D Explorer interface by clicking the Close icon X The panels can be re opened using the View options from the top menu bar The panels can be toggled on off by clicking the E Hide project browser button and 2 Hide Navigation tools button on the toolbar 13 3 Navigation Tools The Navigation Panel should appear on your screen as shown in the figure below Slider Buttons 4 Rotate Shif
440. sibility of tables and or fields Defining user level table and or field names units and data formats where applicable Save user templates as a new database schema structure Rename fields add fields to data categories and modify the field formats For more details please refer to the Template Manager Chapter 2 2 2 2 Import Use the Import option to import data or reports into the project database data may be imported from source files using the Data Transfer System package 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 48 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Note Depending on the performance capabilities of your computer importing large quantities of data points can take a very long time and cause HGA to become unresponsive As such SWS does not recommend importing more than 20 000 data points at one time Data Using DTS This option allows data to be imported into the HGA project database using the Data Transfer System DTS Data may be imported from the following sources Text CSV TXT ASC TAB MS Excel 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or Any OLE DB compliant database such as a MS Access Database MDB For more details on how to import data using the DTS please refer to Chapter 5 The Data Transfer System LAS Data This option allows for importing data from an LAS Log ASCII Standard file a standard format introduced by the Canadian Well Logging Society in 1989 The LAS file contains two types of sections Well Informati
441. signed a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Num_Neighbors Number of nearest data points to use when calculating interpolated value for each grid node Z Only Allows the user to select between outputting the original Xand Y values plus the interpolated value x y f x y or the interpolated value only f x y Note This has no effect on the actual contour output and can be ignored 15 3 2 Natural Neighbor The Natural Neighbor method Watson 1994 is based on the Thiessen polygon method used for interpolating rainfall data The grid node for interpolation is considered a new point or target for the existing data set With the addition of this point the Thiessen polygons based on the existing points are modified to include the new point The polygons reduce in area to include the new points and the area that is taken out from the existing polygons is called the borrowed area The interpolation algorithm calculates the interpolated value as the weighted average of the neighboring observations where the weights are proportional to the borrowed areas The Natural Neighbor method is valid only with the convex hull of the Thiessen polygon formed by the data points and values outside the hull extrapolation should be used with caution The Natural Neighbor interpolation scheme may be visualized as a taut rubber sheet stretched to satisfy all the data points
442. simply drag and drop the desired layer onto the layer group Removing Layers from a Group To remove a layer from a layer group simply drag and drop the desired layer out of the layer group Removing Layer Groups To remove a layer group follow the steps below Right click on the desired layer group From the pop up menu select Delete The component layers will ungroup and return to the root of the layer list All layer types including layer groups can be moved up and down within the Layer Manager panel by simply dragging and dropping the layer into a new position 11 1 2 Description of Toolbar Items The toolbar in the Map Manager provides access to most of the same features available in the Main Menu Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no options for the selected layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 264 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help New button creates a new map project Gy ln Open button opens an existing map project Save button saves the current map project bed Print button sends the current map view to the report editor k Selection Pointer button allows objects in the active layer to be selected ul Draw Polygon button allows a polygon to be drawn in the active layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is
443. solution MrSid image files e Georeference and import raster image maps Display Station Groups or Data Queries from the Hydro GeoAnalyst project as a Map Layer in the Map Project Edit map layers labels order style visibility Draw and edit a point line polygon or text on a map with Annotation tools Create contour color shade and zebra maps of a desired data set Create Thematic Maps Bar and Pie Charts of selected fields Select stations using a rectangle polygon circle line or a single point Create new station groups with stations selected in the map project Send a Map view to the Report Editor Export Map view as Raster images Create a legend for the Map Project Turn layers on off and set their properties using Layer Manager Define locations for cross section lines View statistics for selected data or station group layers Min Max Sum Standard Deviation Mean e Label and symbol renderer allows for creating color ramps gradients shading etc based on specified station data e Line measurement tool allows for measuring the distance between two points on the map project 11 1 About the Interface Map projects are created and modified within the Map Manager application linked to Hydro GeoAnalyst The Map Manager can view and modify one map project at a time In addition the map projects should be modified by only one user at a time A map project may have an unlimited number of map layers The Map Manager may be l
444. some general information regarding the project e Online Sharing o General Stations Queries Maps Project Name Top Hat Project Description This project is an example project a lt includes data from several boreholes soil borings and monitoring wells in the area Note Best size for client logo is 150 pixels wide by 100 pixels high The next tab allows you to select a query to display station information A Online Sharing 2 Stations Queries Maps Please select station data from the list Select All aquifertest_pumpingrates aquifertest_pumpingtest_water_levels avg_waterlevel_per_date Cross_Section_Interpretations Cross_section_model_interpretations cross_tab_example diver_data lithoelevations max_btex_concentration max_water_level PCE_Exceeds_10mg_per_kg_Depth_exceeds_10m ac_lab_analysis select_for_deletion Soil_chem_exceedences soil_desc_concatenate Soil_Plume_Data TCE_Exceeds_10_mg_per_kg popogopgopagomnt osoooomr Time_Series_Chart_Data TVOC_Exceeds_1000_ug_L tvoc_Exceeds_5000_ug_per_L VC_exceeds_1_mg_per_kg vmod_head_observations water_elevations_months water_levels ni Launch browser after publishing lt Previous Next gt Publish Cancel OGG lt The Queries tab allows you to select a qu
445. south merica i Brazil Add Edit Delete Clear To create a group Click the Add button to insert a new group item The group item will appear as a tree node under the Groups frame Here you can specify a group name From the Items frame select a field item and click the gt gt button to add the field item to the group Similarly you can use the lt lt button to remove an item from a group Note A field item can only belong to one group The Edit button allows you to modify the name of a selected group Use the Delete button to remove a group from the groups list Clicking the Clear button will remove all groups from the groups list Once the groups have been defined select Ok 7 2 1 Crosstab Table Display Settings You may show hide data from the crosstab report using tools built into the crosstab component Each data field that is displayed as a row or column includes this functionality Click on the ka button beside the field and you will see options similar to those shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 174 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help A Filter f By value C By condition Filter by value For each data field you will see the results returned In the example above the query returned seven instances of station name but if the selected field was chemical names then you would see all the chemical names that are included in the data query results You can show hide data from
446. ss section Export Model Layers This option allows you to export the model layer lines for all cross sections to XYZ text file format These files can in turn be used to define layer elevations in groundwater flow models such as Visual MODFLOW When this option is selected the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 330 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Export Model Layers pA zA xj Select Model Layer Topography Topography Top L2 Top L2 Top L Top L3 Top L4 Top L4 Top L5 Top L5 Bot LE Bot LE Select Cross Section Select All Create Cancel FJ Help JJ o ___ In this dialog select the model layers you wish to import Each model layer will be exported as a separate file for each file you may define the name under the Export As column Next select which cross sections should be considered in the export Click the Create button to generate the files The files will be generated in the Model sub folder of the Project folder for example D Program Files 1 HGAnalyst Projects Demo Projecti Model Topography txt The Cross Section editor will generate the text files based on the vertex location of each model layer line in each cross section For example for model layer 1 Topography if cross section AA contains this model line with 5 vertices and cross section BB has the same model line with 10 vertices then the text file should contain 15 rows if both cross sections AA and
447. sstab report Use the button to print preview the report Use the button to define the page settings Use the button to set the printing options Use the button to print the crosstab report Use the 3 button to export the report to an HTML file A dialog will appear where you can specify a directory and filename for the HTML file Use the el button to export the report to an MS Excel file A dialog will appear where you can specify a directory and filename for the XLS file Use the Ea to export the report to an PDF file A dialog will appear where you can define the page and export settings and the filename for the PDF file Note HTML Excel and PDF export features do not support gradient coloring As a result report elements that contain a gradient appearance will export as a solid color Use the button to open the DataCube Wizard Here you can modify the crosstab query format and style as described in the previous section Use the 2 button to define modify data markers for the data points See Data Marker Settings on page 161 for more details Enable the button to have the crosstab report automatically refresh when changes are made to the format or style Use the e button to manually refresh the crosstab report when the automatic refresh is disabled and changes are made to the format or style Use the Y button to access the electronic help document The Crosstab results window provides flexible managem
448. st Help EDD Template Designer 1 Sb a Template Version URL ww Lab template_version_check com E Description Geologic Description Database Name Well Construction E parameter_sample sample_date Soil Testing E Soil Sampling E Data Type Unit l Monitoring Event i IDATESTAMP E Parameter Sample Comment E Parameter_Result i E Water Level H Meteorology i 6 Divers i E H Diver Channels z Result Value El Diver Data Result Unit E E1 Field Measurements Qualifier EE E MiningExploration i Reporting Detection Limit 2 E Geophysics E Well History Condtions E Required EEF View Names A Numeric A Unique Use List 2 2 2 4 Query Builder This menu item loads the Query Builder which prowdes options for tasks related to queries In the Query Builder there are options for creating new queries or loading previous queries The 3 button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 6 Queries 2 2 2 5 Quality Control This menu item loads the Quality Control component with these tools you can manage Lab Quality Control templates and perform a quality control assessment For more details please see Chapter 8 Quality Control 2 2 2 6 Material Specifications Editor The Material Specifications Editor provides options for editing material specifications specifically creating editing soil classifications for your project This Editor displa
449. stem ae y Cor te rn pare TT Epression Operator Expression my Operator a dF station toc E H description_addins H Geologic Description E Well Construction E Soil Testing E Soil Sampling E healer Dic Source Condition Project Advanced Cloze E Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time O 0 04F7 Under the Conditions select an Operator for the field A combo box with several options will appear gt gt lt lt lt gt I lt I gt LIKE IS IS NOT 8 For this example select gt Enter a value in the second Expression field For this example type 320 Next add this field to the Display Fields To do so double click on the TOC field in the Project Tree and it will be added automatically as a new row in the Display Fields Or press the Add button located below the Display Fields Then select the TOC field and drag this field into the blank field For each Display Field there are Aggregate sorting Functions Select from AVG COUNT MAX MIN STDEV STDDEVP SUM VAR VARP These functions are explained on page 141 Otherwise leave blank to apply no aggregate options For each Display Field Order options may be specified Select from ASC Ascending or DES Descending or none Once the fields have been added the Query Builder display should be similar to the one shown in the figure below 2012 Schlumberger Water
450. stination station to be updated If the destination contains more than 1 station with the same name you must choose the appropriate one by selecting the appropriate radio button Above the left grid you will see the All Stations combo box with four items Append Update Reject and blank This combo box will control the group operations and allow you to apply the same operation to all stations listed on the left grid The default selection in this combo box will be the Append option 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 138 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Above the right grid the Filter controls can manipulate what stations will be displayed in the destination right grid By default all stations with the same name will be displayed However you may select any field an operation e g gt Like Is Not and a criteria that will be used to retrieve stations from the destination This feature allows you to locate Stations that may be already in the database but with names that were misspelled or entered incorrectly e g MW 1 MW_1 MW1 etc 5 1 4 Step 4 Data Validation The last step in the DTS involves previewing the data to be imported and taking appropriate actions with regards to erroneous data The Data Validation window as shown below displays all data ready to be imported Errors or warnings if any will be listed along with the data Data Transfer System Import ele oe IOl xj E Data Validation Errors
451. surface layer Map Project E E x Mame Description DEM_UTM This is a sample Projection Typ C Geographic f UTM C State Planar C Hon Earth C Others NAD 1983 UTM Zore 17N OF Cancel Help Projection Once the surface layer settings have been defined click Ok The Color Settings dialog shown below will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 271 Color Settings E X Color Palette 330 3549 356 0269 Zebra 330 3545 333 56415 336 734 339 95265 343 1915 T a d e 2 y 3 Transparency lo OK Cancel FJ Help The Color Settings dialog allows you to define different colored zones ranges according to their specific interval of elevation values The Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals indar The Ramp option loads the following dialog Color Ramps Start Color End Color EA Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box Click OK to return to the renderer screen Alternatively you
452. t Light Position x Le zj Ax p O Y LJ E 2 YT gt ajo Z Lo E gt zp __ Options Rotate model around the screen axes X up down Y left right Z rock side to side lf the Navigation Panel does not appear on the screen click View Navigation tools from the top menu bar Alternately the Navigation Panel can be loaded by clicking the E Hide Navigation Tools button located on the top toolbar The Navigation tools panel contains several tabs e Rotate tab controls the rotation of the 3D image around the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e Shift tab controls the location of the 3D image along the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e Light Position tab controls the location of the light source for the 3D image e Time tab allows you to adjust the animation time when viewing Plumes e Plume Browser tab is used when displaying Plumes and provides a summary view of plume data using slices or isosurfaces 13 3 1 Rotating the Image The Slider Buttons are used to rotate the display window along the selected axis or shift the view within Display Window The X axis is oriented horizontally left and right across the Display Window Y axis is oriented vertically up and down the Display Window and the Z axis is oriented into and out of the Display Window w Shift Rotate Screen and Y Rotate Model andr 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 368 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help The image orientation and location can
453. t Help 536997 207974739 40191 40055556 535061 246412517 497 44595 1401 4657 537074 361637415 4015506 3007 56 1 536355 3271 78395 4012017 920r 6004 O 1535631 637094599 4813653 15720517 1537571 759289336 4612207 69712205 534812 301152791 49153042 02998296 538122 215810651 4010212 02011539 Cancel Here you can review all of the control points To delete a control point simply click the appropriate row in the table and click the Delete Row button Click Ok to close the table If there is a significant difference between the georeferenced coordinates and real world coordinates check the precision of the georeference points and reassign if necessary Once the georeferencing is completed click OK in the Georeference window A confirmation dialog will appear as shown below a File attributes Source file name Swayne SWBAProjects Demo _Projectstempstemp_ img bmp Name in the project SwapnesD WIBSProjects Demo_Project temp temp _geo BhP Cancel Click OK to continue The Raster Image will then appear as a new Map Layer in the Map Project CAD The Map Manager also allows you to import AutoCAD files dxf into a map project CAD layers may be built in a Projection that is different from that used for the current map project therefore when a CAD file is selected the projection system and units may need to be converted to the current projection system and units In addition CAD files
454. t constant is the y intercept value The Use variograms option allows the user to select the type of variogram to be used The Variogram models available include e Spherical e Exponential e Gaussian e Power e Hole Effect lf the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 15 4 Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes None 1250 ANSI Central Europe Latin 2 1251 ANSI Cyrillic Slavic 1252 ANSI Latin 1 1253 ANSI Greek 1254 ANSI Latin 5 Turkish 1255 ANSI Hebrew 1256 ANSI Arabic 1257 ANSI Baltic Rim 1258 ANSI Vietnamese 437 OEM US Latin 708 OEM Arabic ASMO 708 720 OEM Arabic Transparent ASMO 737 OEM Greek formerly 437 G 775 OEM Baltic 850 OEM Western Europe Latin 1 852 OEM Central Europe Latin 2 855 OEM Russian IBM Cyrillic 857 OEM Turkish IBM 860 OEM Portuguese MS DOS 861 OEM Icelandic MS DOS 862 OEM Hebrew 863 OEM Canadian Frech MS DOS 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices 447 864 OEM Arabic 865 OEM Nordic MS DOS 866 OEM Russian MS DOS Cyrillic Il 869 OEM Greek 2 IBM Modern Greek 8859 1 ISO Latin 1 West European Danish Dutch English Faeroes Finnish French German Icelandic Irish Italian Norwegian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 8859 2 ISO Latin 2 East European Albanian Czech English German Hungarian
455. te 0 0 00 POINT 00 ES 13 da 315 00 Mel 004 1 AS Mise Ai i Cond 1225 00 us E EI IS ee O E hat E 1 LLE DA EIC a ae CE LE 1 63535019 481431500 Mel EN Mur 1 2004 1 35 135 R raat 53525013 4814315 00 LZA tH EAA bailas Mo A a sy ae a II ALI E ELE e Taf o LA habe 13 287143715 00 MeT DRTC Mi T 2004 1 35 PCE rx RITA 1S ana Mea 3 MTAA META pH EE a614315 00 La Waaa H tet GE 53525018 aBa MAT E RnR 18 Bia Mit Melt ToS nia mgl 535250 1 apens Mea I Mit 2004138 Temp E 14 20 oa E o E ERNE ae RET 13 2814315 00 MPA 10021 ATA Mint Te Ts Mylene oa MKI a8 saa amana M 1 2004 31 Dara POINT B0 1 53525019 481431500 Miel Mine 1 2004 31 3 Joss Ju re assess gt ME POINT 80 1 53525019 amna MEI MUTA Benzene a mL POINT 80 1 maa amano Mit Mul 1 200431 3 Cn mgl POINT 80 1 53525019 4ntad1500 Met Miob1 2004 31 3 cl mpl E GL E MATAN a 5 POINT 80 1 535250 13 381431500 Me 1200431 TAAT Meetai ely bene mL POINT 80 7 Sara 13 2814315 00 MIA 11031 joan ATD Mae taaa Fe dE ml m Query Name qelib anaiyris Rowe 2114 Times 000845 80 53525019 aaao MET MT Le Fm 120 JINT 4 535250 18 Vania oo Mr y Mi 1 7004 1 34 BOOS 42500 ls3525019 agl431500 Mel Meia Hg 10 00 Ta 15 TE 18 Fi FF Fa En LAA AA yE fini Ready 2 1 10 Data Filter Tab The
456. te These features are only available for polyline and polygon layers which have been digitized created in Map Manager Rectangle 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 311 Provides the option to draw a rectangle This option is only available if a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Circle Provides the option to draw a circle This option is only available if a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Line Provides the option to draw a line This option is only available if a line shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Point Provides the option to add points to the map layer This option is only available if a point shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Text Provides the option to add text labels to a map layer This option is only available if a text layer is selected and set for editing Information Provides a dialog containing information about the selected station or other objects such as contour lines an example is shown below Info Window i EE a x Rec No 31 To load the Information dialog Select a layer containing HG Analyst station data Select Information from the Tools menu or click on the O toolbar Click once on any station within the selected layer Information button in the 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 312 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help This window will display Station ID Name Elevation TOC and an
457. tection Limit from the Project Properties0S0C References menu Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color You can enter your QAQC references Standards by selecting Project Properties QAQC References QAQC References j FaiES __ Standard Detection Lima Standard Holding Time EPA 524 2 Rev 41 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 41 __ EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 ERA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rey 41 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 US EPA 8270 F US EPA 8010 1 4d 4d 4 4 4 4 4d 4 4 4d 4 i e a o A td EN CA OA CATA Here you can manually enter or import the reference values used for running the associated checks You will notice that the Method Name and Chemical Name have drop down lists you can pick from this is based on your selections from the Settings gt DAQC References Settings A O x Location of Analyse Method Field Local of Chemical Parameter List Field Category Monitoring Event Category Monitoring Event Table Parameter_Result y Table Parameter_Resul Field Analysis Method Field Chemical Name 8 2 6 Check Holding Time Settings Holding time is the length of time a sample can be stored after collection and prior to analysis without significantly affecting the analytical results This QA QC check will compare the Standard holding time with the holding times of your results The holding time of your 2012 Schlumberger Water Serv
458. ted for a plot the Settings tab will display the appropriate Line Settings as shown below Settings Mapping Mame test Visible True Width 1 Color MA Red Style Sold El Marker Visible False Font Microsoft Sans Serf 8pt Font color MM Black Symbol Triangle Color MA Blue Size 4 4 Name set the line name Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Show hide markers on the line using the Visible option Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify the color Size Set the size of the markers along the line 9 5 Saving Exporting and Printing There are several options available for saving exporting and printing your plot page design Saving Once you are satisfied with the current plot page design click on the lr Save button on the toolbar The new plot will appear under the Plots node in the HGA tree Exporting To export the current plot page design right mouse click on the plot page design node in the tree and select Export Plot Page to Image from the pop up menu The image can be saved to the following graphics file formats BMP JPG TIF EMF GIF PNG Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save Copy Plot to Clipboard This option is available for individual plots in the design To copy the selected plot to the windows clipboard right mouse cli
459. ter ses miwn uu aer mer Mwn na a w Mon me Three met wwe zp or Thebes Se Ww we 2 rato et Pe IA naa teiaa Me tas itenati mot Wow mu e met mu a moss mM Had wot Wwe use Oteervaber mat Rian xs Traer set Dos ru Id vot B vu ne Meenas met a no mw Tiran Met A ee me ead B eo mm aem Ban an aren aes om a Need Prga a meee s D compen ramtes Mede OF la Same A see MD nn Poteet Mote OF a Sam O uae aiaa aa Li piedad By ety a oS e ey rra on pr pe AS 5 rl ER P e P an ou ent EJ 2 s eee yee oe e lan en me a 4 gt a ww mm or TE se e an e mo ost 7 m me Po blas e aa Pu 2 2 2 en NM an mu su e fh as 7 m oo t an ow so ES U sa ars oat e M eou rv oo oy t eo et cot e e aa e ta e P mo ares sm e sa aus eon ow we so ares oo e gt a ame om a n e sm gt a eu a oo v Dan om so ar a 2 me om aw R an m om oe B a mb ar ee mans fond any eer bA D orpoen Metes Mom On a Sm NE Nw tems Mempo toms thew OF gt MAMA If you select one of the stations on the map you will find a pop up with some additional information Also the pop up will provide a link to visualize the water levels in another window associated with that stations a o Jw o ve rr rra pa ros pe a p j Fe cit vee Peets Tes Heie Gry gt un F Moen o S B tiee Bocina Qg w Mm te Tee O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 45 2 2 1 7 Install the
460. ters for some State Plane set the AquiferTest units as feet Currently there is no conversion for these units 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Pumping Test Analysis 10 x Settings Pumping Wells Pumping Rate Observation Wells Data Source Select a data query that contains the required fields for Time and Pumping Rates aquitertest pumpingrates bi Field mapping RequiredData Match to Field Name id tl Pumping Rate rate rm S day 1 1574074074041E 05 Start Time start date DATE TIME STAMP 26400 l End Time DATE TIME STAMP 86400 Data Preview yo name start_date end date rate 21 0594392 300 40144139 Wee B B42007 1 6 6 2007 1 1200 required information Analyze Cancel Help In the Pumping Rates tab the workflow is the same as earlier mentioned In this tab you must map the well name pumping rate and the start and end interval 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 85 Pumping Test Analysis Of xj Settings Pumping Wells Pumping Rate Observation Wells Data Source Select a data query that contains the required fields for Time and Water Level Data aquifertest pumpingtest water levels bi Field mapping o RequiredData Match to Fields DBUmit Multiplier Name id bd co ordinate Hi hi TY co ordinate Obzervation Time date_and_time DATE TIME STAMP 286400 me
461. ters 1 Ro name date and t depth_to_ 20 535599 400 4814341 29 4 20 BB42007 1 109146541 20 535599 400 481431 29 20 BB22007 1 0 2134145 20 535599 400 481431 2944 20 BRB22007 1 0 536 415 20 535599 400 48145341 29 4 20 BB22007 1 0 640 433 ed 535599 400 48145341 29 4 20 BRB22007 1 03 5603 20 335599 200 4814541 29 4 20 6620071 1 097561 ed 935599 700 4814341 29 W 20 BeB42007 1 1 25 2U 535599 400 4814541 29 W 20 BRBR2007 1 1432927 20 335599 400 40145341 29 4 20 BRB22007 1 1 554670 20 535599 400 48145341 29 4 20 6 6 2007 1 1 615694 ed 935599 700 48145341 29 44 20 BRBR2007 2 1 737005 ed 535599 700 4814341 29 W 20 6rbr2007 2 1 659756 ed 535599 700 4814341 29 4 20 6rbr2007 2 1 920732 ed 935599 700 48145341 29 W 20 6rbr2007 2 2042663 ed 935599 700 4814341 29 W 20 B BR2007 3 2 591463 ed 535599 400 4814341 29 44 20 6 62007 9 3 32571 required information Analyze Cancel Help In the Observation Wells tab the workflow is the same as earlier mentioned In this tab you must map the well name X Y coordinate and the observation date time and observed depth to water level Once all the required fields are defined click the Analyze button to send the data to AquiferTest For more details on how to use AquiferTest please refer to the AquiferTest User s Manual 2012 Schlumberger Water Services s Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 2 2 2 17 AquaChem Preferences ae x AquiterTest Aqualhem Select the lo
462. the data Records with errors will not be imported You may return to previous steps to make any corrections to the mapping The data is checked against the following conditions Proper Station Locations Data type compatibility NOTE All coordinates in the database are stored in latitude longitude format WGS 1984 for internal use regardless of the projection system in the source file and project The Preview in this window displays the converted station co ordinates However the station co ordinates may be displayed in HGA in any projection system desired At the top of the window each tab represents a different database table containing one or more mapped fields Accepting or Rejecting Records Any of the records in the preview window may be accepted or rejected To accept the selected records click on the Y Accept button To reject the selected records click on the xl Reject button Finalizing the Import Once you have removed or verified the errors F Import button to import the data to the project After successfully importing the data a confirmation window will appear similar to the one shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 53 Information f A D records were updated and 1 44 records were inserted To close the import routine and return to HGA OK button in the confirmation dialog then Close button at the bottom of the window MON Data This option allows for
463. the minimum value to a dark red at the maximum value This range of colors and the values associated with each will be reflected in the Color Legend for the selected display element Changing Color Values The parameter values associated with each color can be changed by typing in a new value or by clicking on one of the color boxes beneath the color bar and dragging the arrow to a new location on the color bar Changing Colors The color for each color box can be modified by selecting the color box and then clicking the Change color button or by clicking the button for the color you would like to change Each color can be selected from an RGB 16 million color palette Adding Color Intervals In order to display more than seven color increments additional colors can be added to the color scale by clicking on one of the colors in the color value table and then clicking the Add button A new color entry will be added with a value midway between the previous and next value Deleting a color To remove a color increment simply select the color from the Color Value table and click on the Delete button Resetting the Color Palette 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 391 The color settings can be reset to the initial default values by clicking the Reset button 13 5 5 Color Legend The Color Legend is a scale of the element values associated with each color The values and colors shown in the C
464. the All Stations item under the Station Group node in the project tree By default all projects will contain a station group named All Stations that lists all stations in the database belonging to the project However for some of the tasks commonly performed in HGA retrieving the complete list of stations in the project may not be necessary Moreover retrieving all the stations when only few of them are needed may be a time consuming process especially for large databases containing hundreds or thousands of stations The solution is to create Station Groups Grouping stations into their logical groups allows efficient management and quick retrieval of data stored in the database For instance all stations which contain groundwater chemistry sampling data can be grouped together under a group named as GW Sample Locations Whenever these stations need to be updated with a new groundwater sampling round selecting the GW Sample Locations group displays only those stations that belong to this group Station groups can be created based on any criteria Common examples include e Locations of the stations e g locations sorted by City Project Sites etc 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst e Station type e g Monitoring Locations Boreholes etc or e Purpose of Study e g remediation site monitoring There are two kinds of Station Groups in HGA Static Select two or more stations directly in the Station List tab
465. the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 286 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help This dialogue also allows you to specify the size of the symbols or if you wish the start and end size for a range Click OK to return to the renderer screen At the bottom of the Renderer dialog there is a toolbar with additional options These are described below x a amp 6 From left to right the function of these buttons are e Add a new row to the renderer table with a new value and symbol color Delete the selected row from the renderer table Order the values by Ascending order Order the values by Descending order Reverse the order of the colors symbol lowest will be flipped to highest and highest will be flipped to the lowest When you are finished click OK again to confirm the renderer settings Make sure the renderer you ve created has a check mark in the Visible column and click OK to apply the renderer Value Renderer The Value renderer function is very similar to the Graduated renderer The Value Renderer dialog is shown below Yalue Renderer X Mame Elevation Field Hame ELEVATION i Display Value Font Frequency for display value fe Default Symbol Total 323 117 325 144 Ser 1 329 195 329 195 4 331 225 777757 E F x 4 FO Ramp 323 117 OF Cancel 2012 Schlumberger Wat
466. the borehole log plot Although a table and respective fields for the starting and ending depth could be provided for this column the BHLP automatically adjusts the scale column so that the scale represents the largest column placed on the borehole log plot One or more vertical scale columns can be placed on a given borehole log plot This feature may be useful in such cases where displaying the vertical scale in more than one unit e g metres and feet and or a combination of Depth from a certain reference e g top of casing and Elevation from a selected datum is desired To create a Scale column click on the El Add icon on the toolbar From the combo box select Scale A new Scale column will be added to the BHLP window In the Settings frame in the lower left corner of the window you can set some of the visual details of the column 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 22 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 10 3 1 1 Settings E E Design AES Lithalogy AES Well Construction Scale i OX 2 Visible True hi E Header Text Scale Horizontal Algi Center bl Vertical Align Center h Font Font Angle U Font Escape O To specify the display information for this column expand Scale in the Designer tree and select ScaleEntities E ES Design E Lithology Well onstruction cale gt ScaleE ntities DataTable Lithology E TopErtity Caption Top elevation Description D ataField from hi E
467. the coordinate system used for this project You may choose from the following list Geographic UTM State Planar Others Local Once the projection Type is selected choose the Projection from the combo box on the right side of the window The Units will be selected automatically based on the selected projection type e g UTM will use m State Planer will use feet etc If the Local option is selected select the desired coordinate units from the Units combo box Note If Local is selected the project coordinate system cannot be changed once the project is created Furthermore all imported spatial data must already be expressed in local coordinates as HGA does support conversions from projected geographic coordinates systems to local systems Depending on the projection type that you select you may also be required to select an appropriate Geotransformation for your project If required the following dialog will display 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Creating New Projects 105 Please select area a ES PEN Avggsotranetonradieari wall acc hs rs sr thes Tol lr arira i ayate NAD 1442 LM Zono T N GS Was THA Plinio le e areas et Met aini thes ata eint Caran Coengrriar PEE Parks leslearacdss Alberta Tritis Colinas Neser ariede Berwi Scotia Cuchia Simply select the area that best represents the spatial extent of your geographic data from the list and then click the Ok button Note You will not be
468. the cross section line BHLP The BHLP subfolder contains image files for any borehole log plots drawn on the cross section BHLP images are saved as EMF format 15 2 Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing The Microsoft Data Link Properties dialog appears throughout Hydro GeoAnalyst whenever an option to import data or entities or Build a connection string exists A few examples are Importing lists in the List Editor Importing tables in the Template Manager The following section describes briefly an example of how to Build a connection string and import an Excel file using the Data Link Properties For more details please refer to the context sensitive Help buttons in this module The example below applies to importing a list of fields in the template manager from an excel file To load the Data Link Properties window a Click on the Build Connection String button The following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a32 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help E Data Link Properties From the top of this dialog click on the Provider tab as shown below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appe ndices 433 E Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Providers Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE OB Provider Microsoft OLE DE Provider for DTS Packages Microsoft OLE DE Provider for Internet Publishing Microso OLE DE Pr
469. the line color of the selected control w Line style Sets the line style of the selected control H Border Sets the border style of the selected control General Tools To insert any of the items listed below into your report select the item from the toolbar and in the designer window draw a box in the position where you wish that object to appear h Select Selects a control object on the Designer Act Label Allows you to put headings and labels in your report abl Field Insert it and link to a data field to display specific data from the project Field also allows you to put text in your report dl Check box Add a check boxes to a report can be used to create check lists in your report Image Add logos maps and other images to your report You can link it to a data field in your project or to an image file outside of the project 4 Line Add simple lines in your report T Shape Add shapes rectangle square circle to the report Hz A Rich Text Control Add a text box with a RTF text to your report Er Frame Add a frame in and or around the report Similar to the square Shape tool however the emphasis is on the border not fill E Subreports Add any number of subreports to the report The subreport will be limited by the width of the control but the height will grow to accommodate the length of the subreport Page Break Add a page break in the report at a desired location ME OLE Object Add an OLE Obje
470. the report For example if the client company s telephone number changes the user needs to change only 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 425 the template instead of changing each report Each time a new report is created previewed or printed it will use the active report s layout unless a template is specified Creating A Report Template The Report Editor allows you to save the active report s design as a report template for future use Once you are satisfied with the design of the currently opened report s layout click H Save As button to save it as a report template In the dialog that is displayed provide the name for the template check the box beside Save as template and click on Save The template saves the header the footer as well as the background for the detail section of the current report The detail section may have background watermarks such as DRAFT CONFIDENTIAL etc at desired angles and locations The header and footer may contain relevant information for your company and or client including logo name Address Telephone Fax e mail and web site address The user can also configure properties such as font alignment etc for the template Once a report template is created it will be listed under the Reports node in the Project Tree of HGA Opening a Report Template Report templates can be opened by double clicking on them in the Project Tree of HGA A template can also
471. the vertices of the polygon Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex Select the k pointer tool from the toolbar Click once anywhere on the polygon to activate the object 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 352 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select the j Add Vertex tool from the toolbar Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Geologic interpretation layers can have a free form and do not have to conform to a conceptual model e g a sand layer may appear more than once in an individual cross section Layers may not have to continue from first to last borehole However to have a meaningful view of your cross sections in the 3D Explorer you must avoid creating overlapping interpretation layers When defining Geologic interpretation layers there is an option to snap the vertices of one polygon to adjacent polygons For instance if after drawing polygons and the cross section still contains gaps the gaps may be filled in by linking the vertices of the polygons using the Link Vertex option To use this option please refer to the Link Vertex in the Edit menu NOTE Moving a vertex of a selected polygon will also move the linked vertex of any polygons or lines that might have been linked through the Link Vertices operation 12 3 3 Hydrogeologic Layer Interpretations This option allows for drawing layers t
472. these parameters are 1 and in this case the default method is Point Kriging If Block Kriging is being used the user needs to enter the Min points for block Kriging and Max points for block Kriging The Octant Search option is an exhaustive search option available to make sure that data are taken on all sides of the point being estimated and is especially recommended for 3D data If the user specifies Max points per octant to be greater than 0 an Octant Search is employed to find the neighborhood of points for interpolation The Max radius and Min radius defines the search distances in user specified units in the maximum horizontal direction and the minimum horizontal direction for determining the neighborhood of points for interpolation For isotropic data the two radii are the same Enter the Vertical Radius value if 3D Kriging is to be performed If the total number of points in the data is large gt 200 computation time for Kriging may be reduced by specifying a smaller radius for the search The Angle1 Angle2 and Angle3 parameters define the search ellipsoid for situations in which anisotropy is present in the data The Kriging type options are e Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean e Ordinary Kriging e Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file e Kriging with external drift The following guidelines are recommended for selecting the type of Kriging Choose Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean i
473. this table with those in the selected destination table If the field names are identical then the fields will be matched automatically Unmapped fields will appear blank this indicates that the DTS was unable to match the source field to a field in the HGA database template Therefore a field must be manually selected from the available list and mapped to the appropriate source field The Destination frame contains the data categories and tables in the current database structure From this frame select a Category then a Table from this category and a list of fields will be displayed in the grid on the right side of the window Data Requirements O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 133 In the previous version of HGA the DTS required all source tables to contain a numeric Station ID in order to map data to the correct stations in the stations table The benefit of this design is that the database could support duplicate station names the disadvantage was that in many situations numeric station ID was not available and had to be manually added to the source tables either by hand or through the use of queries Although numeric Station IDs are still the ideal unique identifiers for stations this is no longer a requirement You may now use Station names as a unique identifier in source tables in order to map data to the correct stations When you import stations and only the Station Name is mapped the follo
474. tial column type for the station table This means you can link your project directly to ArcGIS to display your stations This also means that as changes are made to your stations added deleted or modified these changes are automatically reflected in ArcGIS e Online Sharing Option providing you a way to share your project station groups queries map layers water levels with others who do not have HGA This option can be run locally or could be hosted on a webserver e New Navigation Options on the Data tabs allowing you to quickly and easily scroll through stations or find that station you are looking for e Grouping Folders for your Queries on the Navigation tree this allows you to organize your queries so you can find a particular query more quickly 1 2 About Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA is implemented through a number of modules each performing a specific task This approach allows HGA to be memory efficient flexible and expandable The following modules are for the purposes of Data Management e Template Manager Data Transfer System Query Builder Lab QA QC List Editor Material Specification Interpretation of geologic and hydrogeologic data is made easy with the visualization modules that are provided in HGA Using these tools raw data can be transformed into meaningful spatial data sets HGA offers a collection of standard and custom modules for interpreting vast amounts of spatial data Some of these modules are bri
475. ting an item in the project tree you will either activate the appropriate tab or launch appropriate module to view this item 2 1 7 Station List Tab The Station List tab provides an overview of the available stations in the selected Station Group As such only a few basic Station attributes name X coordinate Y coordinate Elevation etc are displayed in this tab These fields may be modified for a selected station or a new station may be created here and the values for these fields may be defined The Station List tab may be used to quickly enter numerous stations and define the basic attributes for each station de P H E a E H a H E E 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Hydro Gendnalyst Beta Demo Project aoe Project GP Modules EyDatahase E Help Si EENE A aT S Preject Tree Gi Station List Statina Data Data Query fata Filter Well Profile i E del DW Cope Expand itd 4 ja ff H PRESS p Steen Groupe Slater Narra Him Yim eii TOCIm _ Typelm a A alioa Il El l j Berehoes em seun aman aa 32100 E PO GR both Th kI AAA Ex E 225 00 E Za i Morioniny_Wels C Monting Wells ol Boira vrm WO Stations Clay Hecker Han 2m sa Barga _mih_ Top fice 5 Season Data Get 53529563 4814030 00 pI Queries GE RIGS 421400000 kaa Tore Senga Plots 35775 4914281 80 eq Cuerlabe EE EARR Ena 70 d e
476. tion 11 2 Description of Menu Items New The New item provides options for creating a new map project file Map projects are saved with the extension VMP in the project sub directory Map The new map project will use the same projection system and extents as defined in the current Hydro GeoAnalyst project NOTE Each Map Project has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 4 Template Manager Profile Settings Open Provides options for opening an existing Map Project only files with the VMP extension 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 266 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help can be opened using the Map Manager Save Provides an option to save the current map project file All current Map Layers that are displayed will be saved to the current Map Project file Save As Provides the option to save a copy of the current Map Project with a different name Close This will close the current Map Project If there are unsaved edits there will be a prompt to save changes before closing Reopen A list of recently accessed map projects will be displayed beside the Reopen item This is an alternate method of opening map project files instead of using the Open command Export Project Creates a copy of all layers in the current map project for use in other applications E po Export Map Project 9 Map Layers Surface M Sele
477. tion in units of dpi The vertical scale is the ratio of the height of the Cross Section in actual world units height of the Cross Section in screen units These are used to calculate the output image size So a higher a resolution will mean a bigger image while a smaller vertical scale will mean a larger image Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option is available only if the JPEGs export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size is also directly proportional to this value Scale Symbology Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Color Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Metafiles EMF Print Loads the current cross section into the report editors runtime designer Please refer to Chapter 14 The Report Editor for more details on managing reports Exit Exit the Cross Section Editor and return to the main window of Hydro GeoAnalyst Note that this menu option also closes the map manager 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 332 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 12 2 2 Edit Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all shapes from the currently active cross section interpretation Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to th
478. tion on the detailed options that are available in the Template Manager is provided later in this chapter 4 1 Interface The Template Manager may be loaded from Hydro GeoAnalyst in several ways Select Settings Template Manager from the Main Menu 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 111 Click on the Template Manager button from the toolbar The Template Manager window is shown in the figure below Template Toolbar Template Manager Demo_Project AN Oj x 5 Fr Environmental metric ay al Database structure A M Description 4 Geologic Description H Well Construction TDatabase Settings Category name Description V Soil Testing 4 Soil Sampling J Monitoring Event 4 Mining Exploration Y Geophysics Tree View do Settings Window View settings Tables Fields wm4 2 A4 6 5 m Toolbar Last Changed on 2 25 2008 9 52 00 AM The Template Manager window contains the following items The Template Toolbar Contains toolbar buttons that affect templates as a whole The Tree View Contains a view of all data categories tables and fields for the selected template The Settings Window Contains the interface for editing tables and fields The Tables Fields Toolbar Contains toolbar buttons that affect the selected field or table Description of Toolbar Items The Template Manager provides two grou
479. tion system already assigned to it These shapefiles include all types of ESRI shapefiles polygons lines points and text Once a map layer is opened it will appear in the Layer Manager and is added to the current Map Window lf the selected shapefile contains numeric attribute data the Set Field Precision data will appear on your screen For more information on this dialog please refer to Setting Field Precision in the next section Surface Provides options for importing 3D surface layers The following surface files are supported e Surfer grid grd version 6 and 7 e DEM DEM e ESRI ASCIl asc e Text txt Upon selecting this option an Open dialog will display shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 270 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Look ir gt Surfaces d ej Ez G DEM Bsz 3 DEM_Canada El ARAL txt JESRI Grid E FAL grid txt JNEC E Bedrock bet raw ESRI Format binary grid file grd calpts grd Surfer File name ln heads Files of ype All supported files grd dem asc txt Cancel Ht Locate and select a surface file and select Open The following dialog will display where you can specify a Name Projection Type Projection system and Description The surface projection system must be the same as the projection system defined for the Map Project For example if your Map Project is set to the NAD83 projection system you must select NAD83 for the
480. tion to creating and displaying selected data on a map the Map Manager also allows you to create contour maps and other thematic maps for any selected data from your database For example you can create and run a query that returns the maximum concentration of a given chemical over a certain period of time and load the result to the Map Manager Once the map has this data you can create and view contour maps depicting the distribution of the selected chemical concentration over the site area 2012 Schlumberger Water Services poas Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 1 2 11 Cross Section Editor Many geologic and or hydrogeologic site investigations require a detailed analysis of the available lithological data and the drafting and interpretation of cross sections The Cross Section Editor can be used to perform these tasks The Cross Section Editor provides a set of easy to use tools to interpret subsurface data including geological and hydrogeological interpretations as well as interpretations geared towards creating model layers Model layer interpretations In HGA can be exported to x y z format to be imported into groundwater modeling software packages including Schlumberger Water Services Visual MODFLOW for use in interpolating the model layers The Cross Section Editor is integrated with the HGA 3D Explorer a tool that combines and displays one or more cross sections in a 3D fence diagram view 1 2 12 3D Explorer Once cross sectional vie
481. tions remove all display objects except the axes the axes labels and the project title 13 4 3 Project Display Settings The HGAnalyst Project element consists of general project settings as shown in the figure below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 376 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 2 z 5 Geology ES tations Label Properties Visible ra E 9 96 ElTitle Title HG 3D5 Iv Ml Ld 0 03 EIT ext frame O T as Lu o co Title Date 5 15 2000 o Visible Iv Testcolor E LJ EA Testsize 0 04 HT ext frame Ellegend Visible Tte Gel 0 015 Framefill color O o By default the project Title is the same as the project name and it appears at the top of the Display Window This can be moved to any location within the Display Window by clicking on the Title and dragging it to a new location Background color sets the image background color By default the Background color of the display window is black Vertical Exaggeration sets vertical exaggeration factor for the project Extend model to plume region When you load plume files into existing 3D projects they may lie outside the 3D domain created based on the cross section extents Use this option to re size the 3D domain to include the plume Interpretation Type sets the cross section interpretation type currently in vew Only one interpretation type may be viewed at one time Choose from Geology Hydrogeology or Model The default i
482. to Hydro GeoAnalyst 21 Additionally we have both on line and on site training courses available for HGA Please contact Schlumberger Water Services if you require further training on HGA for yourself or your company or on other software that is developed and distributed by Schlumberger Water Services 1 7 1 Hydro GeoAnalyst In Program Help To view the In Program help select Help gt Contents Some HGA windows and dialogs contain _ BH buttons which load the appropriate help section for the current active component The HGA Help window is divided into three main areas e A Navigation Frame on the left displays the Contents Index Search and Favorites tabs e A Toolbar across the top displays a set of buttons to help navigate through the HGA Help system e A Topic Frame on the right displays the actual Help topics included in the On Line Help The tabs in the Navigation Frame provide the core navigational features as described below Contents The Contents tab displays the headings in the Table of Contents in the form of an expandable collapsible tree Closed book icons represent Table of Contents headings that have sub headings Index The Index tab displays the list of Help topics You can scroll to find the index entry you want or you can type in the first few letters of the keyword in the text box and the index will scroll automatically as you type Double click an index entry to display the corresponding Help topic Alt
483. ts including RTF PDF HTML XLS and TIF by clicking the ea Export button If you would like to modify an existing report template or if you did not select an existing template and are creating your own report you can modify the report design to suit your needs 9 6 Managing Plot Templates Saving Plot as Template Once you have designed the current plot to your style and data needs you can save the design as a template for re use in future plots To do so F Right mouse click on Plots and select Save as a plot template from the menu Enter a name for the plot template and F OK The template will be available next time you create a new plot in the Add Plot dialog under the Templates combo box Deleting Plot Templates 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 212 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Plot templates can be deleted from the main HGA window Right mouse click on Plots in the HGA project browser tree and select Plot Templates The following dialog will appear ioi x Select the template you want to remove then click on the xl Delete button at the top of the window 2012 Schlumberger Water Services za Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 10 Borehole Log Plotter The Borehole Log Plotter BHLP is a tool that can be used to display detailed information pertaining to a well borehole Information related to a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes e Lithology information for eac
484. ttings r Live Update Lidia Output Options The Borehole Log Designer dialog contains the following items A list of all Available Stations Select the station for the BHLP Designer Tree Contains the columns and related entities for the BHLP design Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the BHLP design Settings Contains the settings for the selected entity Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the BHLP Output Options Allow you to export or print one or all BHLPs Live Update When this feature is enabled the BHLP will automatically refresh update whenever an entity is defined or modified in the entity settings The time it takes for the BHLP to refresh depends on the volume of data being displayed on the BHLP a BHLP displaying a lot of data will take longer to refresh In this case it may be desirable to disable the automatic refresh to avoid the extended refresh times when making changes to the entity settings To do so simply uncheck the Live Update checkbox make all the necessary modifications to the entity settings and then click the Apply button to refresh the BHLP Description of Designer Toolbar Items The BHLP toolbar provides the controls and commands for the BHLP design The following buttons are available a Save button saves the current borehole log plot H Save As button saves the current borehole log plot with a new name El Add button adds a new group column or plot entiti
485. turent Director Options gt Click OK to proceed 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices 439 Select Data Source El ES File Data Source Machine Data Source Look in Data Sources Sl DataSource ame DSN Name Datas ourcel ame Hew Select the file data source that describes the driver that you wish to connect to Tou can use any file data source that refers to an ODBC driver which i installed oon pour machine Cancel Help Select the DataSourceName that was created Click OK to proceed l ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup El E A Database Versione Excel 97 2000 Workbook DA ASsample Stations le Select Workbook I Options gt Click OK again to proceed The main Data Link Properties dialog will appear once more The connection string to the data source will now appear in the connection string field as shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services o Hydro GeoAnalyst Help E Data Link Properties Advanced Ar ha ees ol DEO 0 Program Files Hydroh eoB ases am Next you must select the initial catalog to use from the bottom of the Connection tab as shown in the figure below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appe ndices 441 E Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specity the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name
486. u need to have a primary key on your Result table that consists of the Sample ID and Chemical Name fields in order to import your chemical data with this import routine Please see Chapter 13 Template Manager for further information on setting a primary key Step 1 Choose a Data Source Select the source file you wish to import and you will see a preview of your data You also have options for setting which row to begin importing at and if the first row contains header information gt Import Chemical Data Wizard loj xl Choose a Data Source Data Source File CAD ocuments and Settings mgaertnerDesktop chem import files Example Chemical Data sle Format One An alpzed Value per Row T Start Importing Data Using Aow 12 I Use First Row as Header Data Preview Worksheet Peas station name sample date sample ID chemical name result value rea P 1 29 4 18 2001 291218042001 El 0 3 me 2 29 4 13 2001 24 1 184042001 aK me 3 4 18 2001 29 18 04 2001 ie 4 29 421822007 2312182042001 1 65 me 5 29 14 18 2001 29 18 04 2001 Ba lt 0 05 me E 29 IAE 29 1 18 04 9001 ljea AAA aii SE Result Field contains Non Detect gualiferz e 9 lt 0 5 Select Resul Field 2 Back Next gt gt Cancel Help You also have the option to select if your result field contains Non Detect qualifiers e g lt 0 5 when you select the result field you will find that 2 new columns of
487. ubreport Sales Totals by Amount Summary of Sales by Quarter Summary of Sales by Year il Options I Convert Finish Cancel lt Back Next gt The dialog shown below will be displayed It allows you to specify some settings that will alter the converted report The default values are fine unless a change is desired ley Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Fonts Charset Comment Module Text e Strip sourcecode Espedecls handler prefixes Options e Convert M5Graph Chart Controls W Use 400 For Data Control instead of DAC Convert Finish Press the Next button to start converting selected reports Cancel lt Back Next gt Click on the Next button to start converting the report to the Report Editor s native format A dialog will appear displaying the progress of the report conversion Once conversion is completed the dialog displays the summary report as shown in the following figure 2012 Schlumberger Water Services a28 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help le Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 i i E Charting conversion YYY e Conversion complete The following report were converted From database 9 JosimariMisual Pocos Sistemas visual Pocos Projectlxsectionsample mdb Reports to WHI Report gt Relationships For CrosSection Options Stark Dak ab Convert Finish Finish Click th
488. uery Builder A ff Ioj x XAH E Station Group Quem f Data Query Design SOL View Preview Display Fields Function Expression sles Order by sbation id id station x station station name Select a Query TOC_E sceeds_ 320m Ej Description Location gt Station Name E Elevation gt station type total depth depth to bedrock H description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Sail Testing Sail Sampling ofa ed Map and BHLF Ready 4 Use current projection system Conditions if Expression Operator Expression Operator kd mutha Coit Source Condition Project Advanced Close E Help Field Mame station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 Click once on the field and drag this field into the blank Conditions field under the 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 148 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Expression column The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually XRRR a 7 Station Group Quem e Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields TOC_Exceeds_320m e a A les Order by station i El Description Elo E Ey puesta station name a Station Mame i dh gt e Map and BHLP Ready fv Use current projection sy
489. uilder option from the Tools menu Select Station Group Query as the type In the toolbar click on the New button Mew Query E x Hame Description OK Lancel FJ Help In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the new query e g TOC Elevation Exceeds 325 m In the lower left corner of the Query window select the Source Conditions The options are Station Group Project and Database If Station Group is selected then the combo box below will become activated From here select the appropriate Station Group to query If Project is selected then all stations in the project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database Expand the tree on the left side of the window O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Queries 157 Locate the desired data category table and field For this example select the Description category then the Location table and locate the TOC field An example is shown below Query Builder ixauB e Station Group Query Data Query signi SQL View sPreview Select a Query TOCElevationexceeds 325m r station i i station name station station y station toc station elevation elevation El Description E EF Location 2 E Station Marne M Map and BHLP Ready 4 Use current projection system station type total depth depth to bedrock H description_addins FI Geologic Description E Well Constru
490. ults Flag M Sample Flag Export Quality Control Analysis Results To export the results of your Lab Quality Analysis to a MS Excel spreadsheet click the Export Results button select the check results you wish to export and provide a name for your spreadsheet Export Reports TT MW Spike results IY Blank results Duplicate results f Dilution results T MOL results T Holding Time results DLC Validation Export xls ax OR Cancel If more than one check result is selected you will find multiple worksheets within your spreadsheet one for each check see below for an example 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 192 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help vw o Le a TAE 3 eee tie i i T pmj ej 7 ae Ta 7 aini ri A y il Bh A m aeg Fu Ps gt at heal i i Al rr siete A E Diari E ie Ae eo ee EE a nl ee RD A O O l O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 194 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 9 Time Series Plotting The plotting component in Hydro GeoAnalyst allows users to create time series plots of data stored in the HGA database The plotting provides the following features Create Time Series X Y plots using data from data queries Display X Y plots as a line or bar chart Add legends and data marker labels to plots Add best fit trend formula or statistical lines to the plot Interact with plots and display multiple plot windows in the viewer window simulta
491. urvey http www ags gov ab ca mapserver map236 download download_gis htm Data Geology Geochemistry Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Alberta Datum Geographic NAD83 Layer Geology Alberta Community Development http www cd gov ab ca preserving parks Irm index asp Data Parks and Protected Areas Format Shapefile 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Appe ndices 451 Geographic Coverage Alberta Datum NAD83 Layer Parks and Protected Areas Department of Provincial Treasury http www gov pe ca gis index php3 number 77868 Data Warehouses Format Shapefile and MIF Mapinfo Geographic Coverage Price Edward Island Datum NAD83 Layer Administrative Boundaries Road Forest Hydrology Department of Natural Resources Nova Scotia http www gov ns ca natr meb DOW NLOAD UTMNAD83 htm Data Natural Resources Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Nova Scotia Datum NAD83 Layer Natural Resources New York State GIS Clearinghouse http www nysgis state ny us Data New York State GIS Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage New York State Datum NAD83 Layer Provinces and territories census divisions economic regions census metropolitan areas and census agglomerations census consolidated subdivisions census subdivisions Ontario Geological Survey http www mndm gov on ca mndm mines ogs draftbedrock_e asp Data Digital version of the Paleozoic bedrock of Southern Ontario
492. use the errors are highlighted in different colors Records shaded red indicate Errors that must be addressed before the Import can continue Records shaded yellow indicate a Warning or Caution with a corresponding message To accept the posted warning messages and import these records select the items and click the Y Accept button To reject the posted warning messages and ignore these records from the import select these items and click on the x Reject button To view the error report click on the Display log file button Accepting or Rejecting Records Any of the records in the prevew window may be accepted or rejected To accept the selected records click on the Y Accept button To reject the selected records click on the x Reject button Finalizing the Import Once you have removed or verified the errors Import button to import the data to the project After successfully importing the data a confirmation window will appear similar to the one shown below Information A 0 records were updated and 1 44 records were inserted If all desired data transfer operations are done the DTS can be closed by clicking on the Close button If however that is not the case the Back button can be selected to go back to previous tabs and specify a new data source and or table for importing To close the DTS and return to HGA Close button at the bottom of the DTS window 5 2 Exporting Data using the D
493. useful to create a field named County or Municipality in order to organize stations wells Often stations for the project lie within a specific county or municipality It is easier to create this list that may be expanded as desired and link it to the County or Municipality field Then when it is necessary to enter data for the stations the County may be selected from a list contained within a combo box this eliminates the task of continually re typing the same values 2 In the Geologic Description category Lithology table it may be convenient to define a Linked List for the Soil Color field The list may contain generic soil colors ex light brown dark brown black grey etc When the time comes to enter data for this field the color may be selected from this linked list contained within a combo box instead of re entering the same values If the selected field contains a linked list then a combo box arrow will appear on the right side of the field Click on this arrow to view the available list items for the field Lists lookup tables can be created using the List Editor which can be launched by selecting the List Editor menu option from the Settings menu or simply by clicking on the l EE List Editor button on the toolbar The List Editor can also be loaded from the Template Manager as described under the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager in Chapter 13 In the Template Manager s
494. utline and the Grid by clicking on the appropriate check box The Pattern Symbol frame includes a Visible checkbox which allows you to show hide the lithology patterns and a Width vertical scroll box which allows you to set the width of the lithology pattern as a percentage of the total column width Under the Description frame you can modify the visibility and font style of the descriptive text by selecting the Visible check box and Color box respectively 10 3 3 Plot Column The Plot column is designed to display various types of depth dependent graphs It supports both the Depth Interval as well as the Depth Point based data types The following are some example data that may be displayed using this column type e Geophysical investigation results e Analytical results chemical concentration e Analytical results for soil physics moisture content bulk density etc e Soil testing results pocket Penetrometer SPT Various plot settings are available For Depth Point based graphs the plot column supports the following plot types e Points e Connected vertices line graphs with or without points e Bar charts For depth interval plots the area under the plot may be filled in To create a Plot column click the El Add icon and select Plot from the combo box provided A new Plot column will be created in the designer window To create specific plots within this column select the newly added Plot sub node from the Design
495. ved or deleted within the Query Builder As mentioned previously once a query has been created it will appear in the appropriate node in the Project Browser Editing To quickly load a Data Query into the Query Builder right click on an existing query in the Project Browser under the Queries node or Station Group node and select Edit or Edit Dynamic Once in the Query Builder make the necessary changes to the query generate a new SQL statement execute it and Save Saving As One method of quickly creating multiple queries with similar conditions is to use the Save As option press the H Save as button in the toolbar To do so define all the necessary inputs for a query Then Save As the query under a new name Then simply make the 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Queries 161 required changes to the new query and execute and Save This is convenient for many cases For example if the only difference between the queries is in the Value field Query 1 find all stations where Vinyl Chloride gt 10 ppm Query 2 find all stations where Vinyl Chloride gt 500 ppm By duplicating the first query using the Save As option the second query can quickly be created by making a small change to only the Value field 6 7 View Queries Once queries have been saved they will be available from the main HGA interface A Station Group query will appear as a new branch under the Station Group node in the project bro
496. vem WO Sai Clay Fike fan am A Borge h_e bros El apon Daa 2 1 12 Data Entry Manual Data Entry There are two locations in HGA where data can be manually entered and or edited the Station List and the Station Data tabs If the source data is available in a text file spreadsheet XLS or database the data may be imported using the Data Transfer System DTS Data Transfer System DTS If the project database is going to store numerous stations it may be more efficient to import the data using the Data Transfer System DTS The DTS allows for importing data from the following source types e Text CSV e Excel 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or XLSX e MS Access Database MDB or ACCDB e MS SQL Server The DTS can be loaded by selecting Modules Import Data from the main menu the first DTS window is shown below O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Data Transfer System Import al a JOj x Choose a Data Source Specii a data transter packag Package name A DR Description e Save changes to this DTS package Select data soure Specity import tile name 2 Build a connection string Hents Cancel IE The DTS also allows exporting data from a project to one of the following formats e Text files CSV e Excel 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or XLSX or e MS Access Database MDB or ACCDB For more details on how to impo
497. vides an option to delete a vertex from the selected object To delete a vertex Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make it editable Select an object on this layer all its vertices will be highlighted Click on the he Delete vertex button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be removed the mouse cursor will change to an X Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object This menu item is only available when an object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Copy Map to Clipboard Copies the entire Map Window to the clipboard The map window can then be pasted as an image in other applications 11 2 4 Tools The Map Manager provides annotation tools which allow for drawing shapes and inserting text labels on the map The drawing tools are available in both the Tools menu and in the Map Manager toolbar The options for the annotation tools allow modifying the color and style of the annotation objects The annotation items are only available on map layers with the corresponding object type i e text line point polygon These are called annotation layers For example to draw polygons on the map a new map layer with the type Polygon must first be created using the Layer New menu option or if a polygon layer already exists it has to be set to edit mode To add text to a map layer a new layer wit
498. viewing window for displaying plots For example 2 columns X2 rows means that 4 plots may be displayed simultaneously in the viewer window Spacing width controls the amount of space between each plot in the horizontal direction Spacing height controls the amount of space between each plot in the vertical direction 9 2 Adding Plots The data source for the plots must originate from a Data Query before you create a plot you must build and execute a data query using the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set you are interested in analyzing along with the fields for a time series plot TIP If you are plotting a large water level dataset which was logged using a small time interval e g 1 Sample per hour over many days use the average aggregate function in the query builder to query the daily average water level By doing this you will lower the number of data points in your query and thus lower the drawing time when displaying the time series plot The following are required fields for the Time Series plots and as such must be present in your data query e Sample Date or Time e Value for the parameter of interest e g water level chemical concentrations temperature pH conductivity etc The following fields are not required but are available for plot and series grouping and to take advantage of additional plot options Station ID Station Name Chemical Parameter name Measured parameter units
499. while recording the AVI file and ensure the destination folder has adequate free space 13 4 Display Settings The Display Tree Panel should appear as shown in the figure here If the panel is not visible click View Model tree from the main menu bar or click the E button from the toolbar O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services x Stay on top Ff Site maps haf HGASD Ey Surfaces Sa Cross Sections Data BG AA ef Coarse Gravel fy Medium Sand 3 ai Gravel ae Fy Fine Sand Ey Silt 1 0 BR lf CC A DD Fa Setings b Background color Vertical Exaggeratiol 4 0 Interpretation type Geology gt Stations Label Prope ET itle e Live Update Apply 3D Explorer 373 The upper section of the Display Tree Panel contains a tree structured list of the elements which can be visualized while the lower section of this panel contains a table of the Display Settings for the selected display element The Display Tree Panel can be used to selectively view Stations cross sections interpretation layers and legends or alter the display settings of the selected elements The Display Tree Panel is structured in a hierarchical fashion where the elements within the tree can be expanded by clicking on the symbol Each display element listed in the Display tree has an associated Setting list that can be accessed by selecting clicking the display element from the tree A brief desc
500. will be loaded as a new layer 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 281 into the map project 11 2 2 5 Save Saves the selected layer 11 2 2 6 Delete Deletes the selected layer A layer cannot be deleted while it is in Edit mode 11 2 2 7 Create Intersection With this option you can create a new map layer from the intersection of any station points polyline polygon layer surface layer or color shade zebra layer with another polygon layer First select the map layer that will be intersected from the Layer Manager Toolbar Next select the Create Intersection option from the Layer menu The following dialog will appear Create Intersection x Please choose a polygon layer to make the intersection Mame of the new layer OF Cancel Help Select the desired layer from the combo box and enter a name for the new layer Click OK when you are finished and the new layer will be added to the Layer Manager panel Note When clipping color shade and surface layers the Name of the new layer field will be greyed out as it is not required 11 2 2 8 Properties Provides options for modifying the symbol for the shapes point line polygon on the current active layer in the Layer Manager The options dialog is shown below 2012 Schlumberger Water Services NN Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 11 2 2 9 Statistics Point Style E4 Pattern ae 14 Font WH l_Symbol Symbo
501. wing confirmation message will appear before Step 3 in the DTS Confirm e ag x Would you like to use Station Mames as unique identifiers For this transaction 2 Station ID not currently mapped is used to uniquely identify stations in HGA LS da You Will be prompted For action if stations with same names exist in the database When importing additional data from child tables and the source files contain only the station names the DTS will search for the appropriate Station IDs in the station table based on station names and map the data to appropriate stations Import Order NOTE When importing be sure to import data for the parent tables before the child ones For example Stations must be present in the database before you can import chemistry or lithology data for these stations Likewise for soil or groundwater chemistry data you must first define or import the sample id codes in the parent table then run through the DTS again to import the sample results into the correct fields How to Map Fields Follow the directions below to map fields in the source table to a destination table Select the Destination Category from the list on the right side of the window Select a Destination Table from the list on the right side of the window Select the Source Database Table from the list on the left side of the window Under the Source Table Click once in the Name column of a blank field across from the destination field whe
502. with duplicate samples the CV measures precision the lower the value the more precise the results Highlighting If a record is identified as not meeting the Template criteria specified above it will be highlighted according to the settings entered in this frame By default the record s Background Color will be changed to yellow However the user has the option to modify the Font the Background Color and the Border Color of the record by clicking on the appropriate button s 8 2 2 Check Spiked Settings A matrix spike is an aliquot of sample that is spiked with a known concentration of target analyte s prior to sample preparation Ideally there should be 100 recovery of the spiked concentration or very close to this The following settings are available 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control 185 Spike Settings Minimal percent recovery J5 Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color Minimal Percent Recovery You can find this option by selecting Project Export In this first step of the workflow you can create a template which can be opened in Excel for others to use to validate their data In the EDD Template Designer you select which fields you wish to have in your template by simply dragging and dropping them onto the Template Format Highlighting these are also bolded These are fields that are required to be able to import the data into the select table NO
503. ws of the data are created and preliminary interpretations made 3D Explorer can be used to create fence diagrams containing one or more of those cross sections The 3D Explorer provides a unique perspective of the entire site through its ability to display multiple cross sections simultaneously this perspective is not possible when viewing individual 2D cross sections The 3D Explorer in addition to displaying fence diagrams can also be used to display surfaces For example a surface depicting static groundwater elevations over the site can be created and displayed in the 3D Explorer Use the 3D Explorer to import basemaps for example a contour map or DXF site map may be draped or overlain on top of multiple fence diagrams The 3D Explorer also allows you to visualize your 3D Interpolation your plumes Finally use the AVI recording tools to record the auto rotation of the 3D fence diagrams or visualize your transient plume for presentation purposes 1 2 13 Report Designer HGA features a state of the art report generation tool that is equipped with a robust and easy to use runtime designer A Report Wizard provides steps to simplify the report creation process the results are high quality and professional reports containing company headers footers and company logos Reports can contain images and data from many of the HGA modules BHLP Map Manager Cross Section Editor 3D Explorer Time Series Plotter as well as for tables of data from
504. wser The stations which satisfy the query will be automatically added to this new Station Group A Data query will appear as a new branch under the Queries node in the project tree To see the results of the selected query right click on the query and select Execute Query option The query results will then be displayed in the Data Query tab as described below Data Query Tab The Data Query tab in the HGA main window provides an interface for vewing saved queries once they have been executedand searches HydroGeo Analyst Demo C Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help esale txea RE 2 29 FERIE L a Y 11 M Station Groups S Station Data dl Station List Sy Data Query E Station Data Queries Station Group Database T ables aquifertest_pumpingrates z A xI El aquifertest_pumpingtest_water_levels RowlD id x y name date_ chemica concenti result_ur a gg 2 0_waterlevel_per_date gt 1 42 535518 5 4814305 79GB 19 10 02 2000 BTEX 14 ug l Sq cfoss_section_interpretations 2 42 535518 5 4814305 79 GB 19 12 10 2000 BTEX 15 ug l Sy Stoss_section_model_interpretations 3 42 535518 5 4814305 79 GB 19 05 15 2000 BTEX 9 ug l cross tab_example 4 42 5355185 4814305 79 GB 19 05 21 2000 BTEX 9 ua l a diver data 5 42 535518 5 4814305 79 GB 19 06 25 2000 BTEX 11 ug l
505. y t axaAaQe St Data format FKE D HHHHH HH ad Default unit micrograms lter i Last Changed on 10 25 2010 11 08 42 AM Close Help As with other standard fields there is a number of view settings that can be modified by all users These settings include e The names of one or more fields involved in the linked fields set The default unit A default value Data display format An option to link the first field in a three field linked fields to a list 4 4 Managing Templates Creating a new template A new database template may be created during the project creation phase using the Project Wizard The new template will contain only the Stations table The template can be further enhanced using the procedures listed above lt is not possible to create a new blank template using the Template Manager Creating a copy of the current template Once a project is created based on a selected database template a copy of the database template will be added to the database for use as a user template As such the first time the Template Manager is opened it will only display this one user template As discussed earlier in this chapter multiple user templates can be created from this copy All users have the ability to make a copy of this template modify and save view settings in this newly created user template To create a copy of the current template select the E Copy Template As button at the 2012 Schlumberger W
506. y Map Project is registering the image map with the correct real world coordinates This procedure is called Georeferencing Since raster images do not contain information on the site s projection system or length units these details must be manually added using Georeferencing Georeferencing assigns points with known coordinates to the image the image is then scaled and the map extents are calculated NOTE The Map Manager does not provide an error trap for invalid georeferencing points Georeferencing Raster Images If a Raster image is selected from the Layer Import menu a message will appear stating that the image must be georeferenced Click Yes to continue and you will be prompted to save the georeferenced image as a new file Save Ir E Map gt 3 ex Data A wayne rey bmp J Selection Station Wayne F 4 testa bmp A Test Site Map bmp File name Save save as type Haale Cancel di Enter a name for the new image The file will be converted and saved as a bitmap BMP This new name will be used as the map layer name in the Map Manager Click Save to continue and the Georeference window will appear as shown in the following figure O 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 275 2 Select Map Region d E E O ES File View Edit Options Goa 290 BBRk 4 oO Georeference Poin e 2 points 3 points 1 v1 AZ e AS Ya pels 751 piel 652 In order to m
507. y be easier to type in the date manually in the format compliant with your regional settings 6 3 2 Advanced Data Query Options Data Queries may contain Advanced Grouping and Sorting options providing a more detailed search of the database To add grouping options press the Advanced button at the bottom of the Query Builder window and options will appear as shown below 10 x Query Builder Xa a amp E Station Group Quen Data Query Design SQL View Preview Display Fields A A is Order by EE id station station gt station name Select a Query VCE sceeds2ll o zoll_samples i Soil Chemistry a fu she sample_code Sample_name z sample_date dh W Map and BHLP Ready fw Use current projection system Conditions E xpression Operator Expression Operator result_value 2 result unit soil chemistry chemical name Trichloroethane z AND po Pig 4 sol chemistry result value gt 10 AND z da soil_chemistry sample_date 2003 11 28 z 7 i frachoncode Interpreted qualifiers reporting detection_limit resul comment sample_matrix_code gemple_type_code io e gampling_reason El Beek Corinna Source Condition Project Function Field Operator Walue Operator Basic Cloze E Help Field Name soil chemistry sample_date Type DATESTAMP Rows IS Time 0 0 0 15 Under Group by List any field may be added fo
508. y other fields depending on the layer type If there are stations that share the same ID and are hidden behind the selected station then the scroll arrow buttons in the lower left corner can be used to view the information for other stations NOTE The information tool can only be used on shape layers that are visible and active Measure Provides an option to measure distances on the map window To use this utility 4 Select Measure from the Tools menu or click on the _ Measure button in toolbar Place the mouse cursor at the start point for the line The mouse cursor will change to a cross hair Click once with the left mouse button to start the line Drag the mouse cursor to the end point of the line To add a vertex to the line click once with the left mouse button then continue drawing to the new location As the line is drawn the distance from the start point to the end point i e the current mouse cursor location is displayed in a status bar at the bottom of the Map Manager window This is indicated in the sample image below Layer Information Station Laver Coord GCS WAS 1984 Datum O Was 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 30 Seg 54 22m Line 520 06m 535 986 4 813 623 1 8 564 There will be two values displayed here The Seg value is the distance from the current cross hair to the previous vertex location i e the distance of the line segment The Line value is the total line dista
509. y the paper size Click Ok 3 Manually define the page size within the Report Designer by increasing decreasing the page extents with the mouse cursor Now you are ready to print your report Limitations Although the Report Designer provides a detailed interface for customizing reports and templates it is limited in the following ways e You cannot print multiple copies within one print event e You cannot select specific pages to print e You cannot select a page range to print lf you wish to print your reports using these settings you can always export the report as a PDF and print the report s from a PDF Reader 14 5 Creating Reports Reports for your project can be created from the various modules within HGA including Data Grids Data Query Time Series Plots Borehole Log Plots Map Manager Cross Section Editor 3D Explorer HGA comes with several prepared report templates for most database schemas The first two report types listed above can be created through HGA s main interface while the remaining types are created only while using the respective modules of HGA The following few sections present detailed descriptions on creating each report type 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 420 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help 14 5 1 Creating Reports in HGA Main Window The main interface of HGA allows you to create reports in one of the following two ways e From a Grid create a report with the data in the selected grid
510. ying the current cross section window to the Windows clipboard The window may then be pasted into a supporting application Such as a document or image editor or slide presentation This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of the Cross Section Window Full Extent This menu item will result in Zooming out the cross section window to its original full extents Zoom In 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 337 Provides options for zooming into a section of the cross section that is defined by a rectangle drawn around the desired area Place the cursor on the cross section and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for zooming out on the cross section Click this menu item and the cross section window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is not already in a full extent mode Previous Extent Zooms the cross section window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms the cross section window to the next window dimensions View 3D Allows you to view one or more cross sections in 3D with the 3D Explorer Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear Export to 3D Explorer 3 X Select Cross5 ection Select All A BB
511. you click Finish you will create the data source which pon have just configured The driver may prompt you for more information File Data Source Filename DataSourceN ame Driver Microsoft Excel Driver xls A Back Cancel This dialog displays a summary of the data source information Click Finish to close the dialog and the following ODBC Setup dialog will appear ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup EAE Cancel e Help Databaze Version Workbook Select Workbook Options gt In this dialog select the Excel version from the combo box Press the Select Workbook button and the following dialog will appear 2012 Schlumberger Water Services 437 Hydro GeoAnalyst Help Select Workbook E Database Name Directories Oox Eds c Aodbc4data sources Lancel al gt ca gt Program Files gt Common Files _ Hep gt ODBC g Read Onl B Data Sources E y List Files of Type Drives Excel Files xl S c Network From this dialog browse to the drive and directory that contains the source file Click OK to select this file A confirmation dialog will appear listing the Excel format and filename as shown below ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup ki Wiehe sauce Hamne ok Descritor Cancel Databaze Help Version Excel 97 2000 Workbook DA Sample Stations le Select Workbook M Use
512. ys are grouped on a branch When you select the child table lowest branch you will find a list of ALL fields of the related tables below EDD Template Designer Sar 18a Template Version Submission URL Template Version URL 1 nS Location EH Soil Sample Template Format Sheet Name a P arameter Sample AA fo Parameter Result Aquifer Test View Names Sample ID Chemical Name Result Value Result Unit Reporting Detection Limit Sampling Precision Fraction Code Dilution Factor Analysis Method Analysis Date Qualifier When you select fields from the Grouped Sheets tab you will create a template with only one worksheet You have some additional options when creating your EDD Template You can set a version number to keep tracked in case in the future you wish to update a template A submission URL can be set as either an email address or as an FIP folder to upload to A Template Version URL can be entered so that when using the template in the HGA Quick Checker and the EDD import routine it can be verified that it is the most up to date version of the template Additionally you can add conditions onto the fields you have chosen that the HGA Quick Checker will verify For example you can make the Sample Date field required even though it is not a required field to enter the data into the database 2012 Schlumberger Water Services e Hydro GeoAnaly
513. ys a list of standard soil specifications shipped with HGA and allows the display of the soil type names and patterns for each classification The Material Specifications Editor may be launched from two locations Select the Material Specifications option from the Settings menu or click on the S button in the toolbar In the Project Wizard click the button provided in Step 4 Provide Project Settings The Material Specifications Editor will appear as shown in the following screenshot 2012 Schlumberger Water Services Using Hydro GeoAnalyst 69 Material 5pecifications Editor Demo Project eS Oj x Existing Material Specifications Active Maternal Specification DIN 4023 Mame Picture Coarse Gravel Medium Gravel Fine Gravel Sand Coarse Sand Medium Sand P so The left side of the window displays the soil types belonging to the selected Soil Classification System SCS which may be chosen from the combo box in the upper left comer The right side of the window provides the interface for editing an existing custom material specification or creating a new one In the lower left corner of the window there are four buttons Use the Pz button to modify the selected SCS Use the xl button to delete the SCS Use the H button to set the selected SCS as the project default TE Use the button to export the SCS In the lower right corner there are several buttons that control the soil

Hydro GeoAnalyst 2012.1 Users Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents